JP2017074097A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of optimally improving taste of a game.SOLUTION: A ROM 263 stores a plurality of types of high probability-mode win/failure tables A, B, C having mutually different jackpot winning probabilities. When a first probability variable mode flag is set in a RAM 264 and the number of game rounds executed after termination of an opening/closing execution mode are 20 times or less, the game machine executes win/failure determination processing by referring to a highest probability-mode win/failure table A having the highest jackpot winning probability. Further, when a second probability variable mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game rounds executed after termination of the opening/closing execution mode are 10 times or less, the game machine executes win/failure determination processing by referring to a high probability-mode win/failure table B. When the jackpot is not won in the abovementioned conditions, the game machine executes win/failure determination processing by referring to a low probability-mode win/failure table C having a lowest jackpot winning probability among the high probability-mode win/failure tables A, B, C.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained by lottery or when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, the game machine shifts to a predetermined game state. And when it transfers to a predetermined | prescribed game state, opening and closing of the pitching apparatus provided, for example in the game area | region is started (for example, refer patent document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of games.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 is characterized in that a predetermined ball-entrant portion into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the predetermined entrance part;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to grant correspondence information;
A state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the result of the granting determination being that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant correspondence information;
With
As the mode of the grant determination, a low probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively low, a first high probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than the low probability mode, and the grant correspondence result And a second high probability mode that is higher than the first high probability mode.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of games.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd action | operation part in the case of being a non-induction state, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 2nd action | operation part in the case of an induction state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the internal structure of a distribution prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the allocation winning device in 1st distribution execution mode, (B) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the allocation winning device in 2nd distribution execution mode. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the flow of the game in this pachinko machine, and the display content in a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in the prize valid period of the game prize and the through winning part for distribution, and distribution execution mode. (A) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the 1st distribution execution mode, (B) It is a time chart which shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the 2nd distribution execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process in display side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure change process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution waiting in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution start in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution end process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electricity start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power open | release process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power closing process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power completion | finish process in the main side MPU. (A)-(j) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a game progresses. (A), (B) It is a time chart which shows the operation | movement aspect of the allocation prize-winning apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution waiting performed in the main side MPU in 3rd Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the main side ROM in 4th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the classification table, (c) It respond | corresponds to each hit result. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a table group. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution waiting in the main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the allocation table. It is a flowchart which shows the distribution end process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process in the main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus corresponding to the gaming state in which a decision | availability determination process and a distribution determination process are performed using the 2nd high probability table group, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus corresponding to the gaming state in which a success determination process and a distribution determination process are performed using the low probability table group or the fifth high probability table group. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in main side MPU in 5th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the winning probability of the success determination process which can be selected in the probability lottery process of a success / failure determination, (b) Of the distribution determination process which can be selected in the probability lottery process of a distribution determination It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a winning probability. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure finalizing process performed in main side MPU in 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game state transfer process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game state transfer process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st game state transfer process performed in main side MPU in 7th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd game state transfer process in main side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the kind of hit result in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for distribution in main side MPU. (A) It is a front view of the game board in 9th Embodiment, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the variable winning apparatus provided in the game board. It is a rear view for demonstrating various winning detection sensors. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for low probability modes, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table for high probability modes, (c) In order to demonstrate a distribution table It is explanatory drawing of. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of various game results. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game times control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the main side command corresponding | compatible process performed in MPU of an audio | voice light emission control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various count number distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 10th Embodiment. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the hole on a croon, (b) It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the crune in the vertical direction so that the three holes provided on the croon may become a cross section. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the count number specific process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the payout total number lottery table specific process in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various payout total number lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening continuation lottery process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various open continuation lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 13th Embodiment. (A) It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the variable prize apparatus so that the count hole and count passage part in 14th Embodiment may become a cross section, (b) The continuation hole and the passage part for continuation are a cross section. It is the longitudinal cross-sectional view which cut | disconnected the variable prize apparatus so that it might become, (c) The longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the condition where the movable member inclined to the continuation hole side in the state which removed the door and the front wall part And (d) is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining a situation in which the movable member is inclined toward the count hole in a state where the opening / closing door and the front wall portion are removed. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various continuous lottery tables. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 15th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening control process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the inclination direction of the movable member according to the round number and the count number. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process performed in MPU of the main controller in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big winning opening / closing process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the reading process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the big prize opening process performed by MPU of the main controller in 17th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an open | release duration time table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceptance table for low probability modes in 17th Embodiment, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceptance table A for high probability modes, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the acceptance table B for high probability modes, (d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success table C for high probability modes, (e) For demonstrating a distribution table It is explanatory drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of a main controller. (A) The number of game times, (b) A period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table B for the high probability mode, and (c) the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM. In the situation, it is a period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode, and (d) a period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode, (E) This is a period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high / probability mode success / failure table C in the situation where the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM, and (f) the low / probability mode success / failure table. This is a period during which the success / failure determination process is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process performed in MPU of the main controller in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process performed in MPU of the main controller in 20th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 16 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 22 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 23 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 23 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 23 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 22 of the resin base 21.

  The structure of the game board 23 is demonstrated based on FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 23.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 23 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 guide the means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 22 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeding device 27b for supplying a game ball stored in an upper plate 75a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and the launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is launched.

  The game board 23 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening has a general winning portion 31, a first operating portion 32, a second operating portion 33, a special drawing through winning portion 34, a distributing through winning portion 35, a distributing winning device 36, a special electric winning device 37, and a variable. A display unit 41, a special drawing unit 42, a universal drawing unit 43, and the like are provided.

  Even if a ball is thrown into the special drawing through winning section 34 and the distributing through winning section 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, the number of game media that can be used by the player in the case where a winning to any of the general winning unit 31, the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, the distribution winning device 36, and the special electricity winning device 37 occurs. A predetermined number of game balls are paid out in order to increase the value. Specifically, with respect to the number of winning balls, when 10 balls are thrown into the general winning portion 31, 10 game balls are paid out, and when the first operating portion 32 is thrown out. When three game balls are paid out and a ball enters the second operating unit 33, one game ball is paid out and a ball enters the distribution prize device 36 15 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the special prize winning device 37, the same 15 game balls are paid out as when a ball is entered into the distribution winning device 36. Is executed.

  As will be described later, the distribution winning device 36 is provided with a discharge passage area 65b and a V winning passage area 65c. The game balls that have entered the distribution winning device 36 are discharged into the discharge passage area 65b and the V winning passage. Although one of the areas 65c will pass through, the same number (specifically, 15) of game balls will be paid out regardless of which of the discharge path area 65b and the V prize path area 65c passes. Is done. The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in the first operating part 32 and the second action part 33 may be the same, and the number of prize balls in the sorting prize winning device 36 is the special electric prize. The configuration may be greater or less than the number of prize balls of the device 37.

  In addition, an out port 23a is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 23, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 23a. Further, the game board 23 is provided with a large number of nails 23b and various members such as a windmill in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 23a, the general winning part 31, the first operating part 32, the second operating part 33, the special drawing through winning part 34, A game ball entering the distribution through winning unit 35, the distribution winning device 36, and the special electricity winning device 37 is also expressed as winning.

  A variable display unit 41 is provided so as to include the central portion of the game area PA. Due to the fact that the peripheral portion of the variable display unit 41 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 23, an area where the game ball launched into the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA1 that is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 41, and a lower area than the variable display unit 41 that is continuous below the upper area PA1. A left area PA2 that is the left area, a right area PA3 that is continuous to the upper area PA1 and below the variable display unit 41, and a left area PA2 and a right area PA3. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower area PA4 which is continuous below and below the variable display unit 41.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with a rotation amount within a first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first launch operation, the game ball is moved to the left of the lateral center position in the upper area PA1. Run down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the left area PA2, and the lower area PA4. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, in the upper area PA1, on the right side of the lateral center position. A game ball begins to flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4. That is, the player can play the game so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2 of the left area PA2 and the right area PA3 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the launch operation device 28, and the right area A game can be played so that a game ball flows down on PA3. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA1, the right area PA3, and the lower area PA4.

  The 1st operation part 32 is installed in lower field PA4. The first operating part 32 is opened upward, and no member such as an opening / closing member for preventing the game ball from entering the first operating part 32 is provided. In a situation where game balls are being fired in the same manner, the winning probability to the first operating unit 32 is constant without depending on the game state. In other words, the first operating part 32 can always enter a game ball that flows down the game area PA toward the first operating part 32. The first operating unit 32 is a game ball that is disposed directly below the stage 41 a formed in the variable display unit 41 and flows into the stage 41 a through a guide passage formed in the variable display unit 41. The game balls discharged from the center of the stage 41a to the outside of the variable display unit 41 are easy to win the first operating unit 32. The first operating part 32 is provided with a detection sensor 32a, and a game ball won in the first operating part 32 is detected by the detection sensor 32a.

  Here, as described above, the first operating part 32 is provided in the lower area PA4. However, a game that flows down the right area PA3 upstream of the first operating part 32 toward the right area PA3. A restricting nail 23c is provided so that the sphere cannot reach the first operating portion 32. In addition, the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a is provided for the left area PA2, and is not provided for the right area PA3. With these configurations, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, the first operating unit 32 can be won, but the game ball flows down the right area PA3. When the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the winning to the first operating unit 32 becomes impossible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game balls flow down the right area PA3 because the regulation nail 23c is not provided or the entrance of the guide passage to the stage 41a is provided to the right area PA3. Even when the firing operation device 28 is operated as described above, the first operating unit 32 may be awarded.

  The 2nd operation part 33 is installed in right field PA3. In other words, the second operating unit 33 cannot win when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated.

  The configuration of the second operating unit 33 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4A is a longitudinal sectional view of the second operating part 33 in the non-accepting state. The second operating unit 33 includes a base unit 51 in which a discharge passage 53 for discharging the game ball flowing in from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 23 is formed, and a discharge ball 53 for flowing the game ball flowing down the game area PA. And a guiding unit 52 for guiding to the above. The entrance 53a of the discharge passage 53 has an opening area equal to or greater than that of one game ball, and is open toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 54 is provided on the outlet 53b side of the discharge passage 53, and the detection sensor 54 detects a game ball that has won the second operating unit 33.

  The guide unit 52 receives a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA from below, and guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 53, and into the discharge passage 53. The guide drive unit 56 for displacing the guide member 55 between the initial position where the game ball cannot be guided and the guide position where the guidance is enabled, and the guide member 55 are disposed at the initial position In the state where the guide ball 55 is disposed at the guiding position and the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position in the state where the inflow of the game ball into the discharge passage 53 is not blocked. And a blocking member 57. The guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are arranged to face each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction so that the guide member 55 is located below. A transmission unit 58 is provided so as to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 56 to the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in a non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position by a biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 53 and do not protrude into the game area PA. Thereby, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the inlet 53a of the discharge passage 53 in the game area PA is not guided into the discharge passage 53 by the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57, that is, the game ball is second The game area PA flows downward without entering the operating portion 33. Further, since the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 becomes less than one gaming ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from entering the second operating portion 33.

  When the guide driving unit 56 is in the driving state, the guide member 55 and the blocking member 57 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, so that the guide member 55 is disposed at the guiding position and the blocking member 57 is not Located in the blocking position. FIG. 4B is a vertical cross-sectional view of the second operating portion 33 in the induction state.

  When the guide member 55 is disposed at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 55 protrudes from the inlet portion 53a of the discharge passage 53 toward the game area PA. This amount of protrusion is such that it is possible to receive a game ball flowing down from the front area of the entrance 53a in the game area PA from below. The top surface of the guide member 55 is inclined downward toward the inlet 53 a of the discharge passage 53, so that the game ball received from below on the front end side of the guide member 55 is the top surface of the guide member 55. To be guided into the discharge passage 53. In addition, when the blocking member 57 is disposed at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 57 is displaced so that its tip end is positioned above the blocking position, so that the game rolls on the upper surface of the guide member 55. The sphere flows into the discharge passage 53 without interfering with the blocking member 57. Thereby, when the guide drive unit 56 is in the drive state, the game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 53a in the game area PA enters the second operating unit 33. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the guide drive unit 56 is in the non-driven state, the guide member 55 is disposed at the initial position, and the blocking member 57 is disposed at the blocked position. A closed state of the portion 33, a non-accepting state of the second operating portion 33, and a non-inducting state of the second operating portion 33). Is in the non-blocking position is referred to as a guiding state of the guiding unit 52 (or an open state of the second operating portion 33, a receiving state of the second operating portion 33, a guiding state of the second operating portion 33).

  The second operating portion 33 includes a cover member 59 provided so as to face the inlet portion 53 a of the discharge passage 53 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 59 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 59a in the front area of the entrance portion 53a in the game area PA, and 1 game ball passing through the front area of the entrance portion 53a simultaneously. It is provided to restrict the movement of the game ball to the front and the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10 while limiting the number of the game balls. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 53 of the second operating portion 33 when the guiding unit 52 of the second operating portion 33 is in the guiding state. It is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the inlet portion 53a into the discharge passage 53 in the guide state.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the right area PA3, a special-purpose through winning portion 34 and a distributing through winning portion 35 are juxtaposed in the vertical direction above the second operating portion 33. In other words, the special drawing through winning section 34 and the distributing through winning section 35 are not allowed to win when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the right area PA3. When the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down, a prize can be won. The special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distributing through winning portion 35 have through holes penetrating in the vertical direction, and the vertical holes of the special drawing through winning portion 34 are arranged so that the through holes are on the same axis. A distribution through winning portion 35 is provided at a lower position. The distance between the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the distributing through winning portion 35 is about one game ball, and the through hole of the special drawing through winning portion 34 and the through through winning portion for distributing. No obstruction member such as a nail 23b is provided between the through hole of the portion 35. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the special drawing through winning section 34 in the vertical direction surely passes through the distributing through winning section 35. A second actuating portion 33 is provided at a position vertically below the distribution through winning portion 35. Further, in the right region PA3, the special electric prize winning device 37 and the swinging device are disposed downstream of the second actuating portion 33. A prize winning device 36 is provided. Accordingly, it is possible for a game ball that has won the special drawing through winning section 34 or the distributing through winning section 35 to win the second operating section 33, the special electric prize winning device 37, or the distributing winning apparatus 36. .

  In the right area PA3 in which the second actuating part 33, the special drawing through winning part 34 and the distributing through winning part 35 are collectively arranged, the left side is in front of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the board surface of the game board 23 in the variable display unit 41. The right side is defined by a regulating wall that is provided on the resin base 21 of the inner frame 13 and protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 23. The right-side area PA3 is set to have a smaller horizontal dimension than the lower area PA4, and the horizontal dimension is such that it is impossible to line up the game ball entry devices in the horizontal direction at the same height position. It has become. As a result, it is possible to limit the flow trajectory of the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 to a predetermined range, and the game to the second actuating portion 33, the special drawing through winning portion 34, and the distributing through winning portion 35. It is easy for balls to enter.

  In the right area PA3, the arrangement of the plurality of nails 23b on the upstream side of the special drawing through winning section 34 is set so as to guide the game balls flowing down the right area PA3 to the special drawing through winning section 34. . Thereby, the game ball flowing down the right area PA3 is easy to enter the special drawing through winning portion 34, and the second operating portion 33 and It is easy to enter the distribution through winning portion 35.

  A special sensor through winning portion 34 is provided with a detection sensor 34a, and the detection sensor 34a detects a game ball that has won the special figure through winning portion 34. In addition, the distribution through winning portion 35 is provided with a detection sensor 35a, and the detection sensor 35a detects a game ball won in the distribution through winning portion 35.

  Based on the winning in the special drawing through winning section 34, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating section 33 is switched from the non-inducing state to the guiding state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning in the special figure through winning section 34 as a trigger, and the normal figure unit 43 provided in the lower left corner, which is an area through which a game ball does not pass in the game area PA, is used. The graphic display is changed on the figure display unit 43a. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning in the guidance execution state, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and when the variable display of the pattern in the general map display unit 43a is finished, the state shifts to the guidance execution state. In the guidance execution state, the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state in a predetermined manner.

  The general-purpose display unit 43a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display as in the symbol display device 44 described later on the general-purpose display unit 43a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the general-purpose display unit 43a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the general map display unit 43a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 43, a universal map hold display section 43b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 43a. The number of game balls won in the special drawing through winning section 34 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the general figure holding display section 43b.

  Incidentally, the display range of the general-purpose display unit 43a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 described later. Furthermore, the display range for both the general symbol display unit 43 a and the general symbol hold display unit 43 b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display device 44 rather than the general symbol display unit 43a and the general diagram hold display unit 43b.

  A winning lottery is performed based on the occurrence of a winning in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. When the winning lottery is performed, the special figure unit 42 displays the change of the pattern, and finally the result corresponding to the winning lottery result is displayed.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 42 is provided with a special figure display unit 42a. In the special figure display unit 42a, a winning lottery is performed based on the winning of the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33, thereby displaying the variation of the pattern. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. The variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display unit 42a, and the display until the variation display of the pattern is terminated after displaying a predetermined result corresponds to one game.

  The special figure display unit 42a is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 44 described later on the special figure display unit 42a, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the special figure display unit 42a. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the special figure display unit 42a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 42, a special figure holding display part 42b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 42a. The number of game balls won in the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the reserved number is displayed by turning on the special figure display unit 42b. The display range of the special figure display section 42a is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44 described later. Further, the display range for the entire special figure display unit 42 a and special figure hold display unit 42 b is also narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display device 44 rather than the special figure display part 42a and the special figure hold display part 42b.

  When the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special symbol display unit 42a, a display effect is performed in accordance with the symbol display device 44 provided in the variable display unit 41. The symbol display device 44 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. The display contents on the symbol display device 44 will be described in detail later. The symbol display device 44 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  When the winning lottery based on the winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 becomes a winning result, and the game round corresponding to the winning result is finished, the winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 is valid. Become. Then, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period, the mode shifts to a distribution execution mode in which a winning to the distribution winning device 36 is possible. Note that, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period and a shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, the winning to the distributing through winning portion 35 becomes invalid again.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution winning device 36 is provided at a position below the second operating portion 33 in the right region PA3. In other words, the allocation winning device 36 is not allowed to win when the launch operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the launch operation is performed so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when the device 28 is being operated.

  The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 will be described with reference to FIG. 5 in addition to FIG. FIG. 5 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the internal configuration of the distribution winning device 36.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the distribution prize winning device 36 includes a distribution inlet 61 that is large enough to allow a game ball to pass therethrough. A distribution-side opening / closing member 62 that switches to an open state in which a ball can pass is provided. The distribution side opening / closing member 62 is opened by being driven by a distribution inlet drive unit 63 through a link mechanism (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 5, the game ball that has won the distribution entrance 61 is led out to a branch passage 65 formed in the base body 64 of the distribution winning apparatus 36. The branch passage 65 includes an upstream passage region 65a set so that the passage direction is inclined downward in the horizontal direction from the entrance portion of the branch passage 65 to the middle position of the branch passage 65, and the upstream passage region 65a. The discharge passage area 65b is set to be continuous with the downstream end of the discharge passage so that the passage direction is vertically downward, and is branched from the midway position of the discharge passage area 65b. And a V winning path area 65c for guiding the ball. In this case, since the dimension of the upstream passage area 65a in the direction orthogonal to the passage direction is not less than one game ball and less than two game balls, the upstream passage region 65a is in a direction orthogonal to the passage direction. The game ball is prevented from passing through the upstream passage area 65a in a state where a plurality of game balls are arranged. Therefore, a plurality of game balls are prevented from reaching the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b at the same time.

  A switching piece 66 for guiding the game ball that has flowed into the discharge path area 65b to the V prize path area 65c is provided at a branch point of the discharge path area 65b to the V prize path area 65c. The switching piece 66 is rotatably supported in a region opposite to the V winning award passage region 65c with respect to the discharge passage region 65b in the base body 64, and is retracted as a whole outside the discharge passage region 65b. The position can be displaced between the position and the V guide position protruding into the discharge passage area 65b. The switching force is transmitted to the switching piece 66 through a transmission unit (not shown). When the switching drive unit 67 is in the non-driven state, the switching piece 66 is disposed at the retracted position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown), and the switching drive unit 67 is in the driving state. The switching piece 66 is displaced against the urging force and disposed at the V guide position.

  When the switching piece 66 is disposed at the retracted position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 flows down the discharge passage region 65b without being guided to the V winning passage region 65c. Then, the game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by the count detection sensor 68 provided downstream of the branch position by the switching piece 66 in the discharge passage area 65b. On the other hand, when the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V guide position, the game ball that has flowed into the branch passage 65 is received from below by the switching piece 66. The upper surface of the switching piece 66 in the state where it is arranged at the V guide position is inclined downward toward the V winning path area 65c. Thereby, the game ball received from below by the switching piece 66 flows into the V winning path area 65c by its own weight, and flows down through the V winning path area 65c. The game ball is discharged to the rear of the game board 23 after being detected by a V winning detection sensor 69 provided in the V winning path area 65c.

  Whether the game ball is detected by the count detection sensor 68 or the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the same number of award balls corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 is paid out. Is done. In addition, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an opening / closing execution mode occurs after the distribution execution mode. On the other hand, when the distribution execution mode ends without the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  During the period in which the distribution execution mode is set, the pattern display is performed by the distribution display unit 42c provided in the special figure unit 42. The period during which the variation display of the pattern is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c will be described in detail. The winning effective period in which the winning result is displayed on the special display unit 42a and the winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 is valid. When it is started, the variation display of the pattern is started in the distribution display part 42c. Then, when the distribution execution mode ends, the change display of the pattern is ended. In this case, when detection of a game ball is occurring in the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, the display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is completed in a state where the stop result at the time of V winning is displayed. In the distribution execution mode, when no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the change display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is terminated with the stop result at the time of non-V winning being displayed. Is done. When the stop result at the time of V winning is displayed, the opening / closing execution mode occurs after that, and when the stop result at the time of non-V winning is displayed, the opening / closing execution is triggered by the execution of the current distribution execution mode. There is no transition to mode.

  The distribution display unit 42c is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform complicated display like the symbol display device 44 in the distribution display unit 42c, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for controlling the display of the distribution display unit 42c. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the distribution display unit 42c, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  The display range of the distribution display unit 42 c is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display device 44 rather than the distribution display part 42c.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to win the special electric prize winning device 37. As shown in FIG. 3, the special prize winning device 37 is provided at a position below the second operating unit 33 and above the sorting prize winning device 36 in the right region PA3. That is, the special electric prize winning device 37 cannot receive a prize when the shooting operation device 28 is operated so that the game ball flows down the left area PA2, and the shooting operation device so that the game ball flows down the right area PA3. Winning is possible when 28 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the special electric prize winning device 37 has a large winning opening 37a of a size that allows a game ball to pass through, and a closed state in which the gaming ball cannot pass through the large winning opening 37a and the gaming ball. Is provided with a special electric side opening / closing member 37b for switching to an open state in which can pass. The special electric side opening / closing member 37b is opened by being driven by a special electric drive unit 37c through a link mechanism (not shown). The special electric prize winning device 37 is provided with a game ball passage so that the big prize opening 37a serves as an entrance portion, and the game ball that has flowed into the game ball passage through the big winning opening 37a is a special electric prize detection sensor provided in the game ball passage. After being detected by 37d, it is discharged behind the game board 23.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 23 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 71 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window portion 71 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 72 is fitted therein. The window panel 72 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin, and the game area PA is defined through the window panel 72 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 73 is provided above the window unit 71. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 74 that output sound effects according to the gaming state are provided. Further, below the window portion 71, an upper bulging portion 75 and a lower bulging portion 76 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper plate 75a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 75, and a lower plate 76a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 76. The upper plate 75a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 76a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 75a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 81 that controls the main control of the game is mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 23). The main control device 81 has a main control board accommodated in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main controller 81. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 82 formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and a payout mechanism 83 and a control device assembly unit 84 are attached to the back pack 82.

  The payout mechanism 83 includes a tank 85 to which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 86 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 85. The game balls paid out from the payout device 86 are discharged to the upper plate 75a or the lower plate 76a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 86. The payout mechanism 83 is mounted with a backpack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power supply, for example, while supplying main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 84 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 87 having a function of controlling the payout device 86 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power supply / launch control device 88 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 87 and the power supply / launch control device 88 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 87 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board 91 that controls the main control of the game. An MPU 92 is mounted on the main control board 91. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. A RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 92, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 81.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 95 provided in the main control device 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and a payout control device 87 is connected. The power failure monitoring board 95 is connected to a power supply / launch control device 88 having a function of supplying operating power, and power is supplied to the MPU 92 via the power failure monitoring board 95.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 32a, 34a, 35a, 37d, 54, 68, and 69 (hereinafter referred to as various winning detection sensors 32a to 69) are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. The various winning detection sensors 32 a to 69 include a detection sensor 32 a provided in the first operation unit 32, a detection sensor 54 provided in the second operation unit 33, and a detection sensor 34 a provided in the through-winning unit 34 for special drawings. , A detection sensor 35 a provided in the distribution through winning portion 35, a count detection sensor 68 and V winning detection sensor 69 provided in the distribution winning device 36, and a special electricity prize detection sensor 37 d provided in the special electricity prize device 37. Is included. In addition, a detection sensor provided in the general winning portion 31 is included. Based on the detection results of these various winning detection sensors 32a to 69, the MPU 92 makes a winning determination to each winning corresponding winning portion. Further, the MPU 92 executes various lotteries based on winnings to the first operating unit 32 and the second operating unit 33.

  A power failure monitoring board 95, a payout control device 87, and a sound emission control device 101 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. For example, the payout control device 87 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. When the payout control device 87 receives the prize ball command, the payout device 86 is driven to control the number of game balls specified by the prize ball command. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 101.

  On the output side of the MPU 92, the guide drive unit 56 switches the guide unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 between the non-guided state and the guided state (in other words, opens and closes the inlet 53a of the second operating unit 33). The switching entrance driving unit 63 for opening and closing the distribution side opening / closing member 62 of the distribution winning device 36 and the switching piece 66 for shifting the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 between the retracted position and the V guide position. The drive unit 67, the special electric drive unit 37c for opening and closing the special electric side opening / closing member 37b of the special electric prize winning device 37, the special figure unit 42, and the universal figure unit 43 are connected. Incidentally, the special figure unit 42 is provided with a special figure display part 42 a, a special figure holding display part 42 b and a distribution display part 42 c, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Similarly, the universal map unit 43 is provided with a universal map display unit 43 a and a universal map hold display unit 43 b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. The main control board 91 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 92 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, when the guidance state of the guidance unit 52 is won, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 so that the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state, and the return condition to the non-guidance state is satisfied. Then, the output of the drive signal is stopped to return the induction unit 52 to the non-induction state. Further, when the opening start condition for the distribution inlet 61 is satisfied in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 so that the distribution inlet 61 is in an open state. When the closing condition of the distribution inlet 61 is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the distribution inlet 61 is closed. Further, when the guidance start condition to the V winning path area 65c is established in the distribution execution mode, the MPU 92 outputs a drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 so that the switching piece 66 is disposed at the V guidance position. When the return condition to the retracted position is satisfied, the output of the drive signal is stopped and the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, when the opening start condition of the special winning opening 37a is satisfied, the MPU 92 sends a drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c so that the special winning opening 37a is in an open state in which a game ball can be won. When the closing condition of the special winning opening 37a is established, the output of the drive signal is stopped to make the special winning opening 37a in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. Further, the display control of the special figure unit 42 is executed in the MPU 92 in each game time, the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the guidance unit 52 is in the guidance state is clearly indicated, the display control of the general map unit 43 is executed in the MPU 92.

  The power failure monitoring board 95 relays between the main control board 91 and the power supply / launch control device 88, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 88. The payout control device 87 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 86 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 92 of the main control device 81.

  The power / launch control device 88 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main controller 81, the payout controller 87, and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied.

  Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 88 is provided with a power supply unit for power application 88a and a power supply unit for power interruption 88b. The power supply unit for power supply 88a is connected to, for example, a commercial power source in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power source. It has the function to do. The power supply unit for power interruption 88b is made of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply unit for power supply 88a when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged. Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF or when the power is cut off such as when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply (when power supply from the external power supply is cut off), the main power unit 88b is discharged from the power interruption. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the control device 81 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 87. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 and the RAM of the payout controller 87 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit 88b during power interruption. Retained.

  Here, the RAM 94 of the main control device 81 temporarily stores information on the current gaming state and the progress of the game, and the RAM of the payout control device 87 temporarily stores information on the number of unpaid prize balls. Is done. In this case, since the backup power is supplied to the RAMs from the power supply unit 88b for power interruption as described above, even if there is no power supply from the power supply unit 88a for power supply, the current game It is possible to store and hold the state, the progress of the game, and unpaid prize ball information for a predetermined period. On the other hand, the backup power is not supplied to the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 from the power interruption unit 88b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 is not backed up, and is destroyed or destroyed when the power supply from the power supply unit 88a is turned off. Erased.

  The capacity of the power supply unit 88b for power interruption is ensured to be relatively large, and information stored in the RAM 94 of the main controller 81 before the power supply is cut off is retained within a predetermined period (for example, 1 day or 2 days). The The power supply unit 88b for power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, and may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery.

  The power supply / launch control device 88 is provided with a power supply unit for power failure (not shown) different from the power supply unit 88b for power interruption. In the power source / launch control device 88, even after the DC stable power source of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power source unit for power failure is discharged for a time sufficient for execution of power failure processing described later, The output of 5 volts, which is a drive power source for the control system, is configured to maintain a normal value. Thereby, main controller 81 etc. can perform and complete processing at the time of a power failure normally.

  In addition to the various power supply units 88a and 88b, the power supply / launch control device 88 is provided with a launch control unit 88c. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 88c.

  The touch sensor 28a has a built-in capacitor. When the player's hand touches the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electrical signal corresponding to the handle operation detection is emitted. Output to. The firing control unit 88c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle by receiving the predetermined electric signal. The firing control unit 88c grasps whether or not the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 is operated according to the electrical signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates according to the electrical signal received through the variable resistor 28c. The amount of rotation operation of is grasped.

  The launch control unit 88c transmits a condition establishment signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 92 of the main control device 81 when a predetermined game ball launch condition is established. Specifically, the firing control unit 88c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is touched by the player from the touch sensor 28a, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is continuously transmitted from the push sensor 28b to the MPU 92 on the condition satisfaction signal (signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction). If any of the above signals has not been received, a LOW level condition establishment signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition establishment) is transmitted to the MPU 92. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. In addition to the above conditions, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added as a condition for transmitting a condition establishment signal corresponding to the condition establishment.

  In the MPU 92, when the HI level condition establishment signal is received and the game ball can be permitted to be released, the HI level launch permission signal (a signal corresponding to the launch permission) is sent to the launch control unit 88c. Will continue to be sent. Note that the MPU 92 transmits a LOW level launch permission signal (a signal not corresponding to launch permission) when the HI level condition establishment signal is not received from the launch control unit 88c, but the launch permission signal LOW. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launching mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 92, the launch control unit 88c periodically drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 27. In this case, if the game ball is continuously supplied to the game ball launching mechanism 27, one game ball is launched into the game area PA in a specific launch cycle (specifically 0.6 sec). . Further, since the firing strength is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of launching, the game ball is launched with strength according to the amount of rotation of the operation handle.

  The sound emission control apparatus 101 includes a sound emission control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 103 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 104 is executed. A certain RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Based on the command received from the main control device 81, the MPU 103 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74 and transmits the command to the display control device 111.

  The display control device 111 includes a display control board 112 on which the MPU 113 is mounted. The MPU 113 includes a ROM 114 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 113 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 114 is executed. A RAM 115, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 113 controls the symbol display device 44 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 101.

  Although not shown, the display control board 112 includes a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like in addition to the MPU 113. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 44. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays the image data on the symbol display device 44. The character ROM plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 44. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 44, and the display contents of the symbol display device 44 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the main control device 81 are referred to as main MPU 92, main ROM 93, and main RAM 94, and the MPU 103, ROM 104, and RAM 105 of the sound emission control device 101 are used as sound light. The MPU 113, the ROM 114, and the RAM 115 of the display control device 111 are referred to as the display MPU 113, the display ROM 114, and the display RAM 115, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 92 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main side MPU 92 uses various counter information in the game, and wins lottery, setting of the display of the special symbol display unit 42a, lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 44, general symbol display unit Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, a winning random number counter C1 used for the winning lottery and a type counter C2 used for determining the winning type, as shown in FIG. A game in the distribution counter C3 used for lottery of the execution mode of the distribution execution mode, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the special figure display unit 42a and the symbol display device 44 The fluctuation type counter CS used when determining the fluctuation display period is used. Furthermore, the main power random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the guidance unit 52 of the second operation unit 33 is in the guidance state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 94.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds “1” to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 occurs. . The special figure holding area 122 includes a first area 123a, a second area 123b, a third area 123c, and a fourth area 123d. According to the winning history for the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33, Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is stored in any of the areas 123a to 123d as the hold information on the first special figure side.

  In this case, in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, the first area 123a → the second area 123b → when the winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the third area 123c → the fourth area 123d. By providing the four areas 123a to 123d as described above, up to four game ball winning histories to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 are held and stored.

  In addition, the number which can be reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 123 is not limited to four and may be arbitrary, and may be other plural such as two, three or five or more. May be singular.

  In addition to the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d, a special figure execution area 124 is provided in the special figure reservation area 122. The special figure execution area 124 is an area for storing the hold information to be subjected to special decision determination or type determination when the special figure display unit 42a starts the variable display of the pattern. The hold information stored in the first area 123a is shifted to the execution area 124 for the special figure when the variable display of the special figure display unit 42a is started.

  Information corresponding to the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. The distribution execution area 125 is an area in which numerical information for determining the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is stored when the distribution execution mode in the distribution winning device 36 is started. In the allocation execution area 125, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period in which the winning to the distributing through winning portion 35 is valid, the distribution counter C3 Is stored.

  Information corresponding to the general electric random number counter C4 is stored in the general figure holding area 126 provided in the main side RAM 94 when a winning to the special figure through winning unit 34 occurs. The special chart holding area 126 includes a first area 127a, a second area 127b, a third area 127c, and a fourth area 127d, and a general power random number counter in accordance with the winning history to the special drawing through winning section 34. The numerical information of C4 is stored in any one of the areas 127a to 127d as the hold information on the normal side.

  In this case, in the first area 127a to the fourth area 127d, the first area 127a → the second area 127b → the third area 127c when a winning to the special drawing through winning portion 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times. → Numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fourth area 127d. By providing the four areas 127a to 127d in this way, up to four game ball winning histories to the special-purpose through winning portion 34 are reserved and stored.

  Note that the number that can be stored in the reserved map area 126 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be two, three, five or more, and the like. It may be.

  In the common map hold area 126, an execution area 128 for general maps is provided. The execution area 128 for the common map is an area in which the hold information to be subjected to the determination of whether or not to guide is stored when the variable display is started in the general map display unit 43a. Specifically, when the variable display of the general map display unit 43a is started, the hold information stored in the first area 127a of the general map hold area 126 is shifted to the execution area 128 for the normal map.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is incremented one by one within the range of “0 to 250”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is periodically updated, and the value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the general-purpose holding area 126 at the timing when the game ball is won in the special figure through winning section 34. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the guidance unit 52 to the guidance state based on the stored value of the general power random number counter C4.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of modes are set as support modes so that the support modes of the guidance unit 52 are different. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency at which the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state per unit time when compared with the game area PA in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in a similar manner is relative. The high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so as to be high and low.

  The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability (for example, both 4/5) in the induction state winning in the induction state lottery using the general-purpose random number counter C4. In the low-frequency support mode, the number of times the guidance unit 52 enters the guidance state when the guidance state is won is set, and the guidance unit 52 is maintained in the guidance state in one execution of guidance control. The upper limit induction period to be set is long. In this case, when the induction state is won in the high frequency support mode and the induction state of the induction unit 52 occurs multiple times, the closing period from the end of one induction state to the start of the next induction state is It is set to be shorter than one upper limit induction period. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (ie, the normal map display section) after the next guidance state lottery is performed after one guidance state lottery is performed, compared to the low-frequency support mode. The one display continuation time in 43a) is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the second operating unit 33 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating unit 32 than in the second operating unit 33, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is higher than in the first operating unit 32. The probability of winning a prize in the section 33 is increased. When a prize is awarded to the second operating unit 33, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. It can be carried out.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high-frequency support mode is in the guided state per unit time higher than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above, and for example, the guided state winning in the guided state lottery It is good also as a structure which makes the probability of becoming high. In addition, a secured time (for example, based on the winning to the special drawing through prize winning section 34 in the general map display section 43a) secured after the next guidance status lottery is performed and then the next guidance status lottery is conducted. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Furthermore, the number of executions of the guidance state is increased, the upper limit induction period is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next guidance state lottery is performed after one guidance state lottery is performed is shortened. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The winning random number counter C1 is incremented by “1” in order within the range of “0 to 399”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 399). The winning random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated, and the value of the winning random number counter C <b> 1 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The random number value that is won at the time of determination of success / failure is stored in the main ROM 93 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the success / failure lottery mode in the success / failure lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that are the winning results is ten. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table is referred to in the lottery, the number of random numbers that are the winning results is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary. If the winning result is obtained, a winning validity period in which winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 is valid occurs, and distribution is executed when the winning to the distributing through winning portion 35 occurs. It will shift to the mode.

  The type counter C2 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within the range of “0 to 29”, and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the value of the type counter C2 at that time is stored in the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33.

  In this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of hit results are set. These multiple winning results are: (1) a winning lottery mode in a winning lottery after the branch execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode or after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) no transition to the opening / closing execution mode. It is set by providing a difference between the two conditions of the support mode in the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 after the branch execution mode ends or after the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  The assignment destination of the hit result for the type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a type table. And as such a distribution destination, a low probability big hit result and a high probability big hit result are set. Specifically, in the type table, among the values of the type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 15” corresponds to the low probability result, and “16 to 29” corresponds to the high probability result. It corresponds.

  The low probability result is obtained when the success / failure lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the branch execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode or after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift.

  The high-accuracy result indicates that the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the branch execution mode without transition to the opening / closing execution mode or after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is a result. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode continue until the lottery result in the winning lottery results in a winning result and shifts to the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 by that.

  It should be noted that the normal gaming state in relation to each of the above gaming states is not the winning validity period, the distributing execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode of the distribution through winning portion 35, and the winning / losing lottery mode is a low probability mode, This means that the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  The distribution counter C3 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within the range of “0 to 29”, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The distribution counter C3 is periodically updated, and the value of the distribution counter C3 at that time is a timing at which a prize is awarded to the distribution through winning part 35 during the winning validity period of the distribution through winning part 35. It is stored in the execution area 125 for distribution. Then, the distribution execution mode is executed in an execution mode corresponding to the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125.

  Here, in the distribution execution mode, a predetermined number of times that the distribution inlet 61 is opened up to a predetermined distribution release period as an upper limit is executed, and a predetermined distribution-side upper limit is set. The process continues until one of the conditions for the number of game balls to win the distribution winning device 36 is satisfied. In addition, in the one-time opening mode of the distribution winning device 36, a plurality of types are set with different distribution opening periods from when the distribution inlet 61 is opened until it is closed. More specifically, the distribution-side long-term mode in which the distribution release period is set to 29 seconds, which is a long time, and the distribution-side medium in which the distribution release period is set to 15 seconds, which is a medium time shorter than the above-mentioned long time. A period mode and a short period mode in which the allocation release period is set to 0.5 sec, which is a short time shorter than the medium time, are set. In the pachinko machine 10, when the launch operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. In addition, the upper limit number of distribution sides in the distribution execution mode is set to 10. Then, in the distribution side long-term aspect and the distribution-side middle period aspect among the above-described release aspects, the distribution release period is set longer than the product of the game ball firing period and the distribution-side upper limit number. It will be. On the other hand, in the distribution-side short period mode, a distribution release period of a time shorter than the product of the game ball firing period and the number of distribution-side upper limit, more specifically, a time shorter than the game ball firing period is set. Has been. Therefore, when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution-side long-term mode or the distribution-side middle-period mode, a prize corresponding to the distribution-side upper limit number is generated at the distribution entrance 61. It is expected that when the distribution winning device 36 is opened once in the distribution-side short period mode, no winning at the distribution entrance 61 occurs.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of execution modes of the distribution execution mode are set. Specifically, the first sorting execution mode in which the sorting inlet 61 is opened only once in the sorting-side long-term mode, and the sorting inlet 61 is opened once in the sorting-side short-term mode. After that, there is a second distribution execution mode in which the distribution inlet 61 is opened once in the distribution-side middle period mode.

  The operation modes of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 8 (a1) and FIG. 8 (a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIG. 8 (b1) and FIG. 8 (b2) show the distribution release period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 8 (c2) show a period in which the switching piece 66 of the sorting and winning device 36 is arranged at the V guide position.

  First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8 (a1), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8 (b1). In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening in the distribution-side long-term mode is performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing t2, when the predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 was first started, the switching piece 66 is guided from the retracted position to the V position as shown in FIG. Switch to position. Thereafter, when the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the timing t2, at the timing t3, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V induction position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 according to the distribution-side long-term mode is executed, and the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position in relation to the game ball firing cycle is Even if the launch operation is continued for the purpose of winning the distribution winning device 36 before the start of the first distribution execution mode, the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 36 surely reaches the upper limit number on the distribution side. It is a timing not to. Therefore, if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls winning the distribution entrance 61 will receive the V winning of the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 after being surely guided to the passage area 65c. When the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is started after the end of the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, whereby the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 8 (b1), and illustrated in FIG. 8 (a1). Thus, the first distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the number of winning prizes to the sorting winning device 36 reaches the sorting-side upper limit number before the allocation opening period elapses, the sorting inlet 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, and the first. The distribution execution mode ends. However, even in this case, as described above, the first distribution execution mode ends after an opportunity for the game ball to be guided to the V winning path area 65c occurs.

  Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 8 (a2), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 8 (b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution-side short period mode. The distribution opening period according to the distribution side short period mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened until the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 8 (b2) and 8 (c2), the distribution inlet 61 is at the timing t12, which is the timing before the timing t13, which is the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Closed. However, even if the distribution inlet 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode does not end and continues.

  After that, at the timing t13 when the second distribution execution mode is continued and the distribution inlet 61 is continuously closed, a predetermined time after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V guide position as shown in FIG. After that, the V guidance continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14 in which the second sorting execution mode is continued and the sorting inlet 61 is continuously closed. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, since the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short-term mode in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, no winning in the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Even if a prize is awarded to the allocation prize winning device 36, a game ball that wins the sorting prize winning apparatus 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first opening round ends is branched in the allocation prize winning device 36. The longest period required to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the path 65 is the period from the end of the first opening to the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Shorter than (timing t12 to timing t13). Therefore, even if the launch operation is continued in order to win the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode, the game ball can be detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. The nature is low. Since the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect a game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is not started after the end of the second distribution execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 8 (b2), the distribution inlet 61 is opened again at the timing t15 which is a timing after the timing t14 which is the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position. . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 correspond to the distribution-side middle period mode. Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side middle period mode elapses at the timing of t16, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 8 (b2), and illustrated in FIG. 8 (a2). Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends. In addition, when the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution-side middle period mode, the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution-side upper limit number in the distribution opening period according to the distribution-side middle period mode. obtain. Then, when the number of winning prizes to the allocation winning device 36 reaches the allocation upper limit number before the allocation release period corresponding to the allocation-side middle period mode elapses, the timing is earlier than the timing of t16. The distribution inlet 61 is closed, and the second distribution execution mode ends.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and the first The opening / closing execution mode occurs after the end of the one distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second allocation execution mode, even if the game balls aiming for winning the distribution winning device 36 are normally launched, the detection of the game balls by the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. No, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the end of the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the player expects the first distribution execution mode to occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Incidentally, in the opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed a predetermined number of times. The round game is a predetermined number of times that the special winning opening 37a is opened up to a predetermined special electricity release period as an upper limit, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls are received as a special winning opening. It is a game that continues until either one of the conditions for winning 37a is satisfied. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode is set to 15, and in each round game, the opening of the special winning opening 37a having a special electricity release period of 29 sec and an upper limit number of 10 is 1 Only executed once. In this case, as described above, when the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 27 is driven so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Therefore, the special electricity release period in each round game is longer than the product of the launch period of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game. Therefore, if the game balls aiming to win the special electric prize winning device 37 are normally fired, in each round game, more than the upper limit number of game balls will win the big prize opening 37a. Each time a winning is made to the special winning opening 37a, the number of game balls corresponding to the special electricity winning device 37 is paid out. Therefore, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the player is given the benefit of increasing the number of game balls that can be used by the player.

  In addition, regardless of which of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode occurs, the distribution-side upper limit number of game balls are awarded to the distribution winning device 36 in the corresponding distribution execution mode. Can occur. Accordingly, it is possible to make the total number of winnings to the allocation winning device 36 in the allocation execution mode the same or substantially the same in the first allocation execution mode and the second allocation execution mode. The total number of game balls to be paid out can be made the same or substantially the same in these branch execution modes. Thereby, even if it is the second allocation execution mode that basically does not involve the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the increase in the number of game balls that can be used by the player is equivalent to that in the first allocation execution mode. Profit can be obtained, and it is possible to reduce a player's disadvantage to the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

  The selection mode of the sorting execution mode for the sorting counter C3 is stored in the main ROM 93 as a sorting table. Specifically, in the distribution table, among the values of the distribution counter C3 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 2” corresponds to the first distribution execution mode, and “3 to 29” is This corresponds to the second distribution execution mode. That is, the selection probability is set lower in the first distribution execution mode than in the second distribution execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection probability may be the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, and the second distribution execution mode is the first. It is good also as a structure by which the selection probability is set lower than 1 distribution execution mode.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within the range of “0 to 198” and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the main MPU 92 determines the variation display period in the special figure display unit 42a. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the special figure display unit 42a.

<Relationship between game flow and display contents on symbol display device 44>
Next, the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display content on the symbol display device 44 will be described. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the game flow in the pachinko machine 10 and the display content on the symbol display device 44.

  In a situation in which neither the game effective time, the payout valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode, or the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the game ball is placed on either the first operation portion 32 or the second operation portion 33. When winning is held or when the hold information is stored in the special figure holding area 122, the main MPU 92 executes the determination processing for the special figure side holding information as shown in FIG. 9A. Is done. In this case, the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display unit 42a. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9A, the game display effect is also started in the symbol display device 44.

  10 (a) and 10 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 44 in the game play, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the allocation execution mode. In the following description, the period in which the game time, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode are executed are also referred to as a unit variation execution period.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, in the unit variation execution period, the symbol display device 44 has three variation display regions 131 including a first variation display region 131, a second variation display region 132, and a third variation display region 133. ~ 133 are set. In each of these three variable display areas 131 to 133, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As these multiple types of symbols, nine types of symbols each having numbers “1” to “9” are set. When symbols are displayed in the variable display areas 131 to 133, nine types of symbols are sequentially displayed in ascending order of numbers in any of the variable display areas 131 to 133. In addition, after the symbol “9” is displayed, the display target returns to the symbol “1”. The first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132 are set side by side in the upper region on the display surface of the symbol display device 44, and the third variation display region 133 on the display surface of the symbol display device 44 is the first variation. It is set so as to include the horizontal center position in the area below the display area 131 and the second variable display area 132.

  FIG. 9 (A) shows a case where the main side MPU 92 executes the success / failure determination process on the special map side hold information and the effect for the game turn is started, that is, when the unit variation execution period is started. As described above, the symbol variation display is started in all of the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, the variable display of the symbols is sequentially stopped in the order of the first variable display area 131 → the second variable display area 132 → the third variable display area 133. In this case, when the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 does not occur, the reach change display is not generated on the symbol display device 44 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the variable display of symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133 is terminated without stopping and displaying the combination of reach symbols and the combination of winning symbols.

  On the other hand, when the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, that is, when the result of the determination processing for the holding information on the special figure side is a winning result, at the timing when the game round ends, FIG. c) and as shown in FIG. 9C, the combination of reach symbols is displayed when the stopped symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 become the same symbol, and the third variation is displayed in the situation. In the display area 133, reach variation display in which symbol variation display is performed is performed. That is, in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132, the stop result after the symbol variation display corresponds to the result of the success / failure determination processing for the hold information on the special figure side, and the result of the success / failure determination processing is hit. If the result is not a result, the same symbol is not stopped and displayed in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132. The same symbol is stopped and displayed in 131 and the second variation display area 132.

  The timing at which the reach variation display is started in the symbol display device 44 corresponds to the end timing of the effect for game play, and the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started at this timing. When the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, as shown in FIG. 10B, the symbol display device 44 further displays the reach variation and further wins the distribution through winning portion 35. A winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the player should aim is displayed. In the winning aim notification image 134, a special drawing through winning unit 34, a distributing through winning unit 35, a second actuating unit 33, a special electric winning device 37, and the like are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special drawing through winning unit 34, the distributing through winning unit 35, the second operating unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distributing winning device 36. An image corresponding to the mode is displayed, and an image indicating that a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 is to be aimed is displayed. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that it is the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35. Therefore, it is easy to perform a launch operation aimed at winning a prize for the distribution through winning portion 35.

  A launch operation aimed at winning a prize in the distribution through winning section 35 is performed, and a winning in the distribution through winning section 35 occurs as shown in FIG. Judgment processing is executed. When the target selected in the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode, the first distribution execution mode is started in the distribution prize winning device 36 as shown in FIG. Even in this case, the reach fluctuation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. Even when the first distribution execution mode is started, the display of the winning aim notification image 134 is continued together with the reach variation display. In the winning aim notification image 134, a special drawing through winning section 34, a distributing through winning section 35, a second operating section 33, a special electric winning apparatus 37, and the like are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special drawing through winning unit 34, the distributing through winning unit 35, the second operating unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distributing winning device 36. The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the winning aim notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 should be aimed to an image indicating that a winning to the distributing winning device 36 should be aimed. The contents of the winning aim notification image 134 are the same when the second distribution execution mode is started.

  As already described, in the first distribution execution mode, the V winning prize detection sensor 69 basically detects a game ball. As shown in FIG. 9 (f), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the variation display of the pattern in the third variation display area 133 is completed even in the middle of the first distribution execution mode. To do. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9D, the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a symbol that forms a combination of reach symbols in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. is there. In other words, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated in a state where the winning symbol combination is stopped even if it is in the middle of the distribution execution mode. It will be. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs.

  Thereafter, when the first distribution execution mode ends, the opening / closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. When the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode is started in the state where the winning aim notification image 134 is displayed on the symbol display device 44. In the winning aim notification image 134, a special drawing through winning section 34, a distributing through winning section 35, a second operating section 33, a special electric winning apparatus 37, and the like are arranged in the vertical direction in the right area PA3 of the game area PA. The image corresponding to the distribution winning device 36 on a one-to-one basis is the actual installation of the special drawing through winning unit 34, the distributing through winning unit 35, the second operating unit 33, the special electric winning device 37, and the distributing winning device 36. The display content displayed in a mode corresponding to the mode is maintained. However, the content of the winning aim notification image 134 is changed from an image indicating that the winning to the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed to an image indicating that the winning to the special electricity winning device 37 should be aimed. The contents of the winning aim notification image 134 are the same when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball and the opening / closing execution mode occurs in the second distribution execution mode.

  On the other hand, when the target selected in the distribution determination process of the main MPU 92 is the second distribution execution mode, the second distribution execution mode is started in the distribution prize winning device 36 as shown in FIG. Is done. Even in this case, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued. As already described, in the second allocation execution mode, basically, the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect a game ball, so that the opening / closing execution mode basically does not occur after the end of the second allocation execution mode. In addition, at the timing when the second distribution execution mode ends, the pattern variation display in the third variation display area 133 ends. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9E, the stop symbol in the third variation display area 133 is a combination of a symbol that forms a reach symbol combination in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. Are different designs. That is, when the allocation execution mode ends without the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated without stopping the winning symbol combination. Become. Thereby, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur. Even if the first distribution execution mode occurs, if the game ball is not detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, so the combination of winning symbols is stopped and displayed. Without this, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated.

  Here, even if the second allocation execution mode is executed in the allocation winning device 36 as shown in FIG. 9 (i), the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. 9 (j). It can happen to be detected. For example, in the second allocation execution mode, the allocation prize winning device 36 is first opened once in the allocation-side short-term mode. A winning to the prize winning device 36 occurs, and the winning game ball stays on the upstream side of the branching path to the V winning path area 65c in the discharge path area 65b for some reason, and the switching piece 66 is at the V guide position. It is conceivable that after reaching the branch position after being arranged, the V winning path area 65c is led. Such an event may occur due to a clogged ball or the like even when a game is played regularly, and may also occur due to an illegal act.

  As shown in FIG. 9 (j), when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, even in the middle of the second distribution execution mode, the pattern in the third variation display area 133 of the symbol display device 44 is displayed. The change display of is finished. In this case, as shown in FIG. 9F, the stop symbol of the third variation display area 133 is a combination of a symbol that forms a reach symbol combination in the first variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132. Are different designs. That is, in the second distribution execution mode, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 44. Furthermore, the stop symbol in the third variation display area 133 is a symbol that is not included in the symbol to be displayed when the symbol variation display is performed in the third variation display region 133. The symbol is “E”. This symbol is a symbol that is stopped and displayed only when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode. Accordingly, it is possible to clearly notify the player or the manager of the game hall that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in spite of the second distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, when the second distribution execution mode ends, the opening / closing execution mode occurs as shown in FIG. In the opening / closing execution mode, although the winning aim notification image 134 corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode as described above is displayed on the symbol display device 44, the display effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode is started. Instead, the display mode of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 9 (E) is maintained. This makes it possible to clearly notify that the opening / closing execution mode that has occurred from the second branch execution mode is being executed even when the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Further, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode is different from the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode.

  Hereinafter, an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode and an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 11A shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode, and FIG. 11B shows the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode. FIG. 11A shows a period during which the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and FIG. 11A and 11B show a case where the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 37 does not occur in each round game.

  First, the execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing t1, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and the opening of the special electric prize device 37 in the first round game is started at the timing t2 when the special electric opening period T1 has elapsed. In addition, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing t3 when the special electricity release period T2 has elapsed. Thereafter, the opening of the special prize winning device 37 in the second round game is started at the timing t4 when the first special electricity closing period T3 (specifically, 2 sec) has elapsed. Then, at the timing t5 to the timing t10, the closing of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the special electricity release period T2 and the opening of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the first special electricity closing period T3 are repeated.

  Thereafter, at the timing t11 when the special electricity release period T2 in the last round game has elapsed, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started. The current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing t12 when the ending period T4 has elapsed.

  Next, an execution mode of the opening / closing execution mode generated from the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  At the timing of t21, the operation mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, and the special electric prize winning device 37 in the first round game at the timing of t22, which is the timing at which the same special electricity opening period T1 as the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode has elapsed. Opening is started. Also, the special prize winning device 37 is closed at the timing t23, which is the timing when the same special electricity release period T2 has elapsed as in the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, the opening of the special prize winning device 37 in the second round game is started at the timing t24 when the second special electricity closure period T5 (specifically, 60 sec) longer than the first special electricity closure period T3 has elapsed. . Then, at the timing of t25 to t30, closing of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the special electricity opening period T2 and opening of the special electricity winning device 37 accompanying the passage of the second special electricity closing period T5 are repeated.

  Thereafter, at the timing t31 when the special electricity release period T2 in the last round game has elapsed, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is closed and the ending effect is started. Then, the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t32, which is the timing when the same ending period T4 has elapsed as in the situation triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  As described above, in the opening / closing execution mode generated with the second distribution execution mode as an opportunity, the special electricity closing period between rounds is longer than the opening / closing execution mode generated with the first distribution execution mode as an opportunity. In the opening / closing execution mode that is triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting unit 73, and the speaker unit 74 notifies that fact. As a result, the fact can be recognized by the manager of the game hall during the opening / closing execution mode, and sufficient time to deal with the fact can be given to the manager. Furthermore, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to fraud, it is possible to reduce the digestibility of the opening / closing execution mode, and the unit time for the fraud It is possible to reduce the amount of profits obtained per hit.

  In addition, the period during which the special prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than that of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation where game balls are being fired, etc., opening and closing triggered by the second sort execution mode by lengthening such closed period It becomes possible to make the execution mode longer.

  Also, not only the ending period is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is lengthened, but the special electricity closing period at the timing before the last round game is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is prolonged. It is planned. As a result, when the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by an illegal act, the illegal act is dealt with at a stage before the game ball payout in the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, the upper limit number and the special electricity release period of each round game are the same in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode occurs as a result of a regular game played instead of an illegal act, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode It is possible to pay out game balls equivalent to.

<About various processes executed by the main MPU 92>
Next, various processes executed to advance the game in the main MPU 92 will be described. The main MPU 92 is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main process, first, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until 1 sec elapses after the main process is activated. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 94 is permitted (step S102), and the internal function register of the main MPU 92 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided in the power supply / launch control device 88 is manually operated (step S104), and it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the main RAM 94. (Step S105). Also, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored at the time of power-off, that is, the validity of the stored data ( Step S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 94 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 94. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase button has not been pressed, “1” is set in the power failure flag and the checksum is normal, and step S109 is not executed without executing step S108. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 94 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value. Also, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 87 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 87.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the main MPU 92 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process (step S110). In addition, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and a variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is performed (step S112). In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 94, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is made to switch from the state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to the state in which it is permitted (step S113). If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is started repeatedly with a period of 4 msec.

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board 95, and when the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the random number random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical value information from the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the distribution counter C3, and the general-use random number counter C4, and adding each of the read numerical information to 1 A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111 (step S203), and the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112 (step S204). Thereafter, a game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Thereafter, on the condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 37c, 56, 63, and 67 is executed. For example, when the information for switching the distribution inlet 61 of the distribution prize winning device 36 to the open state is set, output of a drive signal to the drive unit 63 for the distribution inlet is started, and the information should be switched to the closed state. When the information is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 to the V guide position is set, the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started, and the information to be switched to the retracted position is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Also, when the information for switching the special winning opening 37a of the special electric prize winning device 37 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is started, and the information to be switched to the closed state is set. If so, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Further, when the information for switching the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 to the guidance state is set, the output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 is started, and the information to be switched to the non-guidance state is set. If so, output of the drive signal to the guide drive unit 56 is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, a winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the winning detection process, the signals received from the various winning detection sensors 32a to 69 are read, and the general winning unit 31, the first operating unit 32, the second operating unit 33, the special-purpose through winning unit 34, and the distribution. The process which specifies the presence or absence of a prize to the through prize winning unit 35, the distribution prize winning device 36 and the special electric prize winning device 37 is executed.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 94 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed (step S211). In the fraud detection process, by monitoring the occurrence of a plurality of types of events and confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the game stop setting is made in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed (step S212). In a situation where the launch operation is continued with respect to the launch operation device 28, as already described, one game ball is launched in 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined launch cycle.

  Thereafter, as input status monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of the winning detection sensors 33a to 59b and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing of step S208 (step S208). S213).

  After that, special figure special electric control processing is performed for performing control of game times in the special figure display unit 42a, display control of the distribution display unit 42c, execution control of the distribution execution mode, and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode ( Step S214). In addition, whether or not the guidance unit 52 of the second actuating unit 33 is in the guidance state is determined for guidance, and is usually used for switching the guidance unit 52 between the guidance state and the non-guidance state. Electric control processing is executed (step S215). In the ordinary power control process, if the support through mode is not the allocation valid mode, the allocation execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, the low-frequency support mode corresponds to the low-frequency support mode. The display control of the general map display unit 43a and the drive control of the guidance unit 52 are performed according to the contents. If the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the display control and guidance of the general map display unit 43a with the content corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Drive control of the unit 52 is performed. Further, in the ordinary map electric power control process, if the winning through period winning portion 35 for allocation is in any of the winning validity period, the allocation execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is frequently supported until immediately before that. Regardless of whether the mode is set, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode. This prevents the guidance unit 52 from obstructing the flow of the game balls toward the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution execution mode or the flow of game balls toward the special electricity winning device 37 in the opening / closing execution mode. It becomes possible.

  Thereafter, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S215, setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information on the special figure side in the special figure hold display section 42b, Output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number in the general-purpose hold display unit 43b is set (step S216). Also, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S214 to step S215, setting of output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 42a and output information for updating the display content of the distribution display unit 42c. Setting and setting of output information for updating the display content of the general map display unit 43a are performed (step S216).

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 87 are confirmed, and a payout state reception process for performing a process corresponding to the check result is executed (step S217). Also, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S218). In addition, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S219).

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S206, or after executing the processing of steps S207 to S219, the timer interrupt processing is terminated.

<Special Figure Special Electric Control Process>
Next, the special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure special electric control process, when winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33 occurs, a process for acquiring the special figure side holding information is executed, and the special figure side holding is performed. When the information is stored, whether or not the hold information is determined is determined, and further, a process for performing an effect for playing a game is executed using the determination as to whether or not the information is stored. Further, when the result of the determination is a winning result, after the stage effect for the game is executed, a winning valid period of the distribution through winning section 35 is generated, and the distribution through winning section 35 is allocated during the winning effective period. When winning is won, a process of shifting to the distribution execution mode is executed. Then, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, a process of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is executed after the distribution execution mode is completed.

  Specifically, in the special figure special electricity control process, first, a special figure side hold information acquisition process is executed (step S301). In the special figure side hold information acquisition process, in the situation where the number of special figure side hold information stored in the special figure hold area 122 is less than the upper limit storage number, to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33 In the first special figure reservation area 123 in the first area 123a to the fourth area 123d of the first special figure reservation area 123, the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the value of the type counter C2 are used as the reservation information on the special figure side. It stores in the area where the digestion order is early among the areas where the hold information is not stored. In addition, when the reservation information on the special figure side is acquired, the data for updating the display content of the special figure hold display unit 42b in accordance with the increase in the number of the special information on the special figure side. Set up. Further, when the hold information on the special figure side is acquired, a hold increase command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored on the special figure side in the symbol display device 44 is updated in correspondence with the new acquisition of the special figure side reserved information.

  After that, the special figure special power address table stored in the main ROM 93 is read (step S302). In the special figure special power address table, the start address of a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special electric power counter is set. The special figure special power counter is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the processing contents to be executed in the special figure special electric control process.

  The special figure special electric control process includes a process for controlling the effects for the game times, a process for controlling the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35, and a process for controlling the distribution execution mode. And a process for controlling the open / close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game times, a special figure change start process (step S305) which is a process for starting the effect for the game times and an effect for the game times are advanced. And a special figure changing process (step S307), which is a process for ending the effect for the game round, is set. In addition, a distribution waiting process (step S308) is set as a process for controlling the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35. Further, as a process for controlling the distribution execution mode, a process for starting distribution (step S309) which is a process for controlling the opening of the distribution execution mode and a period after the opening of the distribution execution mode are controlled. The process for distribution (step S310) which is a process for performing this is set. Also, as a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special electricity start process (step S311) which is a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode opening, and a process for controlling the open state of the special electricity prize winning device 37 Special electric power release opening process (step S312), special electric charge closing device process (step S313) for controlling the closed state of the special electric prize winning device 37, opening / closing execution mode ending and opening / closing execution mode end A special electric power ending process (step S314), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state, is set.

  The special figure special electricity counter can take values from “0” to “9”, and each value from “0” to “9” corresponds to the start address SA0 to SA9 of each process (step S305 to step S314). ing. Specifically, when the value of the special figure special counter is “0”, the special figure variation start process (step S305) is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electric counter is “1”. When the figure changing process (step S306) is an execution target and the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the special figure finalizing process (step S307) is the execution target, and the special figure special electric power counter value is “ If the value is “3”, the distribution waiting process (step S308) is an execution target. If the value of the special figure special power counter is “4”, the distribution start process (step S309) is an execution target. When the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “5”, the distribution process (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, the special electricity start process (step S311). Is the execution target, When the value of the special figure special counter is “7”, the special electric release opening process (step S312) is executed, and when the special figure special electric counter value is “8”, the special electric charge closing process (step S313). Is the execution target, and when the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “9”, the special electric power end process (step S314) is the execution target.

  In the special figure special power control process, after reading the special figure special electric address table (step S302), the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special electric counter is obtained from the special figure special electric address table (step S303). The process jumps to the process indicated by the start address (step S304). In the following, special figure change start processing (step S305), special figure change processing (step S306), special figure confirmation processing (step S307), distribution standby processing (step S308), and distribution start processing (step S309) ), The distribution process (step S310), the special electricity start process (step S311), the special electricity release process (step S312), the special electricity closure process (step S313), and the special electricity end process (step S314) will be described individually.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure variation start process of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S402) on the condition that the number of hold information on the special figure side is one or more (step S401: YES). In the data setting process, the data stored in the first area 123a of the special figure holding area 122 is moved to the special drawing execution area 124. Thereafter, processing for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the special figure holding area 122 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 123a to 123d to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area 123a, and the second area 123b → The data in each area is shifted such that the first area 123a, the third area 123c → the second area 123b, and the fourth area 123d → the third area 123c. In the data setting process, data setting is performed so that the display content of the special figure hold display section 42b is updated in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold information on the special figure side this time. In the data setting process, a hold reduction command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103. As a result, the image for informing the number of reserved information stored on the special figure side in the symbol display device 44 is updated in correspondence with the decrease in the special information side reserved information.

  After the data setting process is executed, a validity determination process is executed (step S403). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the success / failure table for the low probability mode is read from the main ROM 93, and if the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, the success / failure table for the high probability mode is read. Read from. After reading the success / failure table, the information for success / failure determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out from the hold information stored in the execution area 124 for special maps, and the read numerical information is the above-described success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information set as the hit result.

  If the result of the determination process is a hit result (step S404: YES), the type determination process is executed (step S405). In the type determination process, the type table is read from the main ROM 93, the type determination information, that is, the numerical value information acquired from the type counter C2, is read from the hold information stored in the special drawing execution area 124, and the read numerical value It is determined whether the information corresponds to the low probability result or the high probability result set in the type table.

  After executing the type determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of the winning result specified in the type determination process (step S406). Specifically, “1” is set to the low-accuracy flag when the low-accuracy result is supported, and “1” is set to the high-accuracy flag when the high-accuracy result is supported. . In the following description, the process for determining whether or not the result is various hit results is performed by determining whether or not “1” is set in the corresponding flag of the main RAM 94. In addition, when “1” is set in step S406, the game state transition process is executed when the distribution execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Cleared to "0".

  After the hit result flag setting process is executed, a stop result setting process for the hit result is executed (step S407). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for hit results stored in advance in the main ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. In this stop result table for winning results, the types of the pattern stop modes that are stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a are set differently for each type of winning results. In step S407, step S405 is changed to step S405. The information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the hit result specified in the above is stored in the main RAM 94. Note that the pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the hit results. A method for selecting a stop result for a winning result for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  If the result of the determination process is not a winning result (step S404: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S408). Specifically, the information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the main ROM 93 in advance. The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the winning result.

  After executing any of the stop result setting processes, the process for specifying the variable display period is executed (step S409). In the process of specifying the variable display period, a process for specifying the variable display period of the game times is executed. Specifically, first, the table for the variable display period corresponding to the support mode in the current game round and corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process is read from the main ROM 93. These variable display time tables are set so that a longer variable display period is more easily selected when the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result than when the result is a miss result, and the result of the type determination process is higher. If the result is a positive result, a longer variable display period is set to be easier to select than if the result is a low probability result. When there are many people with a small number of cases, a longer variable display period is set to be easier to select, and when the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning result, the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. If the display period of the fluctuation display is longer than the case, and the result of the success / failure determination process is an outlier result, the low frequency support mode is the higher frequency support mode. It is set more likely to be selected longer change display period than that. And by setting the table for the variable display period in this way, the average value of the variable display period becomes longer when the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result than when it is a miss result, If the result of the type determination process is a high probability result, the average value of the variable display period will be longer than if the result is a low probability result. If the number of pending information is small, the average value of the variable display period is longer than when there are many, and if the result of the success / failure determination process is a hit result, the high frequency support mode is the low frequency support mode. If the average value of the variable display period is longer than the case, and the result of the acceptance / rejection determination process is an outlier result, the low frequency support mode is more variable than the high frequency support mode. The average value of the period is longer. Note that the average value of the variable display period as a whole is longer in the low-frequency support mode than in the high-frequency support mode. Although detailed description is omitted, the effect for the game times in the symbol display device 44 is executed such that the game times having a longer variable display period increase the player's expectation. For example, the number of appearing characters increases in game times with a long variation display period.

  Information on the variable display period specified in the variable display period specifying process is set in a timer counter provided in the main RAM 94. When the variable display period information is set in the timer counter, the timer update process (step S210) in step S210 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) is executed until the value of the timer counter reaches “0”. Subtracted.

  Thereafter, the variation command and the type command are transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S410). The change command includes information on the change display period specified in step S409. The type command includes information on game results (results of success / failure determination processing and results of type determination processing).

  Thereafter, after the fluctuation display table for the special figure display unit 42a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S411), the special figure display unit 42a starts the variable display of the pattern (step S412). The variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a is a table in which a variation display pattern of a pattern when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a is determined in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display unit 42a, the same variation display table is used regardless of the result of the success / failure determination process and the result of the type determination process. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a, the variation display of the pattern by the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the special figure display unit 42a has the pattern of the pattern by the predetermined pattern. Control data for one turn in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variable display of the pattern is performed in the special figure display unit 42a, the variable display table for the special figure display unit 42a is repeatedly used until the variable display period determined in step S409 elapses.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S413). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special figure fluctuation start process is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the special figure fluctuation in-process ( "1" corresponding to step S306).

<Processing contents of sound-side MPU 103>
As described above, the information of the fluctuation display period read out as described above is set in the fluctuation command and transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game times in the sound light side MPU 103 will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a timer interruption process repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) in the sound light side MPU 103.

  First, a table setting process for performing a process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 92 is executed (step S501). FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the table setting process. When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 92 (step S601: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S602). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the success / failure determination process and the type determination process determined by the main MPU 92 at the start of the current game turn is specified, and the specified information is Write to the side RAM 105.

  Then, the effect lottery process for determining the content of the effect for game times is performed (step S603). In the effect lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to make a notice display on the symbol display device 44 in the current game round. The notice display is a situation in which the symbol variation display is performed in all of the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the symbol display device 44, or the first variation display region. In the situation in which the symbol variation display is stopped in 131 but the symbol variation display is performed in both the second variation display region 132 and the third variation display region 133, the display of the symbol display device 44 is displayed in advance. This is a display effect that suggests the degree of expectation that a winning result will occur in the current game round, in other words, the degree of expectation that the reach variation display will be executed in the current game round. As a mode for a notice display, a mode in which the background image of the symbol display device 44 is used as a background image for a notice display, a mode in which a character image for a notice display is displayed, and a type of a symbol that is variably displayed are used for a notice display. Examples include types.

  In the effect lottery process, the effect lottery table corresponding to the variation command and type command received this time is read from the main ROM 93, and the value of the lottery counter whose value is periodically updated in the main RAM 94 is read. Then, the value of the lottery counter is checked against the current effect lottery table to determine whether or not to execute the notice display and the kind of notice display to be executed. In this case, the game times corresponding to the winning results are set to have a higher probability that the notice display will occur than the game times corresponding to the missed results. In addition, a game notice corresponding to the winning result is more easily selected than a game corresponding to the missed result, and a type of notice display having a higher expectation level for the reach variation display is selected. In addition, a game notice corresponding to a high probability result is more likely to be selected than a game corresponding to a low probability result, a type of notice display with a high expectation level for the reach variation display to be executed. In addition, the longer the game display variation display period, the higher the probability that the notification display will be generated, and the higher the expectation that the reach variation display will be executed, the easier it is to select the notification display.

  After the effect lottery process is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S604). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an outlier result, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 is obtained. Corresponding information is determined as information on the stop result of the current game round. In this case, since the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 does not occur after the game round is ended, not only the first fluctuation display area 131 and the second fluctuation display area 132 but the third fluctuation when the game round is ended. Also in the display area 133, the symbol variation display is terminated. Therefore, as the information of the stop result in this case, not only the first variable display area 131 and the second variable display area 132 but also the type of symbols to be stopped are determined for the third variable display area 133. The combination of stop symbols in the first variation display region 131, the second variation display region 132, and the third variation display region 133 in the case of an outlier result is determined by lottery so as not to be a combination of reach symbols and the same symbol combination. Is done.

  Further, in the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low probability result, a combination of the same even number symbols in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 in the symbol display device 44. Information corresponding to the stop result in which is established is determined as information on the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game round is finished and the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of reach symbols is formed by the same even symbols. Will be displayed. The type of reach symbol combination based on the even symbols is determined by lottery. Further, if the stop result of the current game round is a highly accurate result, the stop result in which a combination of the same odd number of symbols is established in the first variation display area 131 and the second variation display area 132 in the symbol display device 44 is obtained. Corresponding information is determined as information on the stop result of the current game round. In this case, after the game round is finished and the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the symbols are displayed in the third variation display area 133 in a state where the combination of reach symbols is formed by the same odd symbols. Will be displayed. The kind of reach symbol combination by this odd symbol is determined by lottery.

  In addition, even if it is a low probability result, a combination of reach symbols with the same odd number of symbols can be formed, and even if it is a high probability result, a combination of reach symbols with the same even number of symbols It is good also as a structure which can be formed. In this case, it is possible to select an odd number of symbols as a combination of reach symbols more easily in the case of a high probability result than in the case of a low probability result. It is possible to notify the degree of expectation that the result is a hit result. In addition, an odd number of symbols is not selected as a combination of reach symbols when the result is low probability, while an even number or odd number of symbols is selected as a combination of reach symbols when the result is a high probability result. It is good. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the combination of the reach design with the odd number of symbols corresponds to the high probability result and the combination of the reach design with the even number of the symbols corresponds to the low probability result, the symbol “3” or the symbol “7” is used. A combination of reach symbols with some symbols such as the above corresponds to a high-accuracy result, and a combination of reach symbols with other symbols may correspond to a low-accuracy result.

  Thereafter, a control table reading process corresponding to the execution contents of the effect in the current game round is executed (step S605). In this process, information on the variable display period is specified from the contents of the variable command received this time, information on the variable display period, information on the game result specified in step S602, and the effect lottery in step S603 A control table corresponding to the combination of the process lottery result information and the stop result information determined in step S 604 is read from the sound light side ROM 104 and written to the sound light side RAM 105. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the current game turn effect and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 corresponding to the current game time effect are set. Accordingly, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 are performed according to the control table.

  Thereafter, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S606). The variation pattern command includes information on the variable display period of the game time that is the start target, information on the combination of stop symbols, information on whether or not to perform the advance display, and the execution target when the advance display is executed. Information on the type of notice display. Upon receiving the variation pattern command, the display-side MPU 113 starts display control for executing an effect for game times in the symbol display device 44.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16), after executing the table setting process, a command transmission process is executed (step S502). In the command transmission process, in the situation where the control table is read in the sound side RAM 105, the command of the type set in the control table when the command transmission timing set in the control table is reached. Is transmitted to the display-side MPU 113.

  Thereafter, the light emission control process is executed (step S503), and the sound output control process is executed (step S504). In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 105 in the table setting process in step S501. In the sound output control process, the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is performed according to the table read to the sound light side RAM 105 in the table setting process in step S501. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed (step S505). In the pointer update process, information is set for updating the data to be referred to in the table read out in the table setting process in step S501 to the data corresponding to the next control process.

<Processing content of display MPU 113>
Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing execution control of effects for game times on the display side MPU 113. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display side MPU 113 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  In the V interrupt process, when a command is received from the sound side MPU 103 (step S701: YES), the display pattern table corresponding to the received command is read from the display ROM 114 and written to the display RAM 115 (step S702). . For example, when a variation pattern command is received from the sound light side MPU 103, a display pattern table of a type corresponding to the variation pattern command is read from the display side ROM 114 and written into the display side RAM 115. This display pattern table includes the variable display period in the current game round, the type of combination of stop symbols, the presence / absence of execution of the advance display, and the type of advance display to be executed when the advance display is executed. It corresponds to the combination. Therefore, display control is executed by the display side MPU 113 according to the display pattern table, so that an effect for game times is executed on the symbol display device 44 over the variable display period determined by the main side MPU 92. When it is decided that the sound light side MPU 103 is to execute the notice display, the kind of notice display determined by the sound light side MPU 103 is executed on the symbol display device 44 in the middle of the effect for the game times. Is done. Further, when the effect for the game round is ended, the combination of the stop symbols determined by the sound light side MPU 103 is displayed on the symbol display device 44.

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, or if the process of step S702 is executed, a pointer update process is executed (step S703). In the pointer update process, information setting is performed to update the data to be referred to in the display pattern table read in step S702 to the data corresponding to the current control process. Thereafter, task processing is executed (step S704). In the task processing, a parameter necessary for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing on the symbol display device 44 is calculated. Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed (step S705). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time on the symbol display device 44 is created, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 112. To a VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP creates drawing data in a frame area of a VRAM (not shown) according to this drawing list, thereby causing the symbol display device 44 to display an image for one frame.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S306 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the variation display period of the current game times in the special figure display unit 42a has not elapsed (step S801: NO), and when the display content update timing of the special figure display unit 42a is reached (step S802: YES) The data setting for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 42a is performed by referring to the fluctuation display table for the special figure display unit 42a read in step S411 in the special figure fluctuation start process (FIG. 15) ( Step S803). Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the special figure display part 42a is updated to the display content of the next order.

  The mode at the start of the variable display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a and the update mode of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the processing result of the success / failure determination process and the processing result of the type determination process, Regardless of the content of the game-playing effects in the symbol display device 44, the game is performed in a certain manner. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and the display pattern in a constant display order is repeatedly performed. When the variable display period has elapsed, the display pattern No matter which order is displayed, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display unit 42a.

  On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed (step S801: YES), the information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display unit 42a stored in the main side RAM 94 at the start of the game round is read (step S804). Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game time is displayed on the special figure display unit 42a. Regardless of whether or not the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the special figure display unit 42a is the winning validity period, the distribution execution mode, and the open / close execution mode of the distribution through winning unit 35, the special figure display unit 42a This is maintained until the next display of the variation of the pattern is started. Further, information on the final stop period (for example, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S805). Thereby, the measurement of the last stop period is started.

  Thereafter, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S806). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the final stop command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits the final stop command to the display side MPU 113 in the other process of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the final stop command from the sound light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 stops and displays the combination of stop symbols in the current game round over the final stop period. The display pattern table for reading is read out. Thereby, the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the current game time is stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 44 over the final stop period.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S807). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “1” when the special figure fluctuation process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter corresponds to the special figure finalizing process (step S307) by adding 1. “2”.

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, the special figure determination process executed in step S307 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S901: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a missed result (step S902: NO), the special figure special electric counter value is cleared to “0”. (Step S903). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S901: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a winning result (step S902: YES), the variable display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S904), the distribution display unit 42c starts to display the variation of the pattern (step S905). The variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is a table in which a variation display pattern of the pattern when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display unit 42c is determined in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display unit 42c, the same variation display table is used. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the distribution display unit 42c, the variation display of the pattern according to a predetermined pattern is repeated. However, the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c includes Control data for one turn in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed on the distribution display unit 42c, the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S906). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special figure determination process is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special electric counter that is the addition target by adding 1 is the distribution waiting process ( “3” corresponding to step S308).

  Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S907). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the distribution display start command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S607 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the distribution display start command. Reading is performed from the light side ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S608). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 during the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the winning effective period, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the winning effective period. Also, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S609). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the distribution display start command from the sound light-side MPU 103, the display-side MPU 113 reads a display pattern table for continuing the reach variation display during the winning validity period in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). . Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . In addition, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 should be aimed.

<Distribution standby processing>
Next, the distribution standby process executed in step S308 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution standby process, first, an update process of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S1001). In the update process, when it is the update timing of the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c, refer to the variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c read out in step S904 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 20). To set data for updating the display content of the distribution display section 42c. Thereby, the display content of the pattern in the distribution display part 42c is updated to the display content of the next order.

  The mode at the start of the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c and the update mode of the variation display of the pattern are the types of the winning results in the previous game times, and the duration of the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c. This is performed in a certain manner regardless of whether the symbol display device 44 is in a certain manner. For example, when a predetermined plurality of update timings occur, the display content of the pattern goes around once and a display pattern having a constant display order is repeatedly performed. Regardless of the order in which the patterns are displayed, the stop result corresponding to the game result in the distribution execution mode is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the distribution display unit 42c.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred occurs only in step S1002. As a result, the winning validity period to the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is completed.

  If a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1003). Then, the distribution determination process is executed using the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1004). In the distribution determination process, the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the above.

  If the result of the distribution determination process is the first distribution execution mode (step S1005: YES), “1” is set to the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1006). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 92 which one of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “1”, it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “0” Specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. Note that the value of the first distribution execution flag is cleared to “0” when the distribution execution mode that is not accompanied by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1007). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the first distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S610 in the table setting process (FIG. 17) and displays the control table corresponding to the first distribution command. Data is read from the light side ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S611). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the first distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 performs a light emission effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Is done. Note that the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode are different from the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. Further, the first distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S612). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the first distribution command from the sound light-side MPU 103, the display pattern for continuing the reach variation display in the first distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read the table. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . In addition, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed. In addition, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for enabling the player to recognize that the first distribution execution mode is the current execution target among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the result of the distribution determination process is the second distribution execution mode (step S1005: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1008). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the second distribution command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S613 in the table setting process (FIG. 17) and displays the control table corresponding to the second distribution command. Reading is performed from the light side ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S614). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the second distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. Is done. Note that the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the second distribution execution mode are different from the light emission effect and the sound output effect corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Further, the second distribution command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S615). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second distribution command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display pattern for continuing the reach variation display in the second distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read the table. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . In addition, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize that the second distribution execution mode is the current execution target among the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Is done.

  Thereafter, information on the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1009). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for distribution is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1010). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the distribution standby process is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter corresponds to the distribution start process (step S309) by adding 1. “4”.

<Process for starting distribution>
Next, the distribution start process executed in step S309 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution start process, update processing of the distribution display unit 42c is first executed (step S1101). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

  In the distribution start process, the distribution opening period has passed (step S1102: YES), and “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94 (step S1102). S1103: YES), “1” is set to the open / close count counter SOC provided in the main RAM 94, and “10” is set to the winning counter PC provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1104). The open / close count counter SOC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of times the distribution entrance 61 of the distribution prize winning device 36 is opened and closed in the current distribution execution mode. The winning counter PC is a counter for the main side MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of distribution side upper limit numbers in the current distribution execution mode. Also, the first distribution release period (specifically 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1105).

  On the other hand, if the distribution opening period has elapsed (step S1102: YES) and the value of the first distribution execution flag in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S1103: NO), the main “2” is set to the open / close count counter SOC of the side RAM 94 and “10” is set to the winning counter PC of the main RAM 94 (step S1106). Further, the second distribution release period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1107).

  When the process of step S1105 or step S1107 is executed, a release setting process for distribution is executed (step S1108). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the distribution entrance driving unit 63 in the main MPU 92. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 is started to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the open state. . In this case, after the process of step S1105 is performed, the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the distribution-side long-term mode, and after the process of step S1107 is performed, the distribution-side short-term mode is performed. The distribution inlet 61 is opened.

  Thereafter, a distribution release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1109). When receiving the distribution release command from the main MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S616 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the distribution release command on the sound light side. Data is read from the ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S617). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 after the distribution opening period has elapsed in the distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes the corresponding light emission effect after the distribution opening period in the distribution execution mode has elapsed, and the speaker unit 74 performs the distribution in the distribution execution mode. The corresponding sound output effect is executed after the opening period has elapsed. Note that these light emission effects and sound output effects differ between the case of the first distribution execution mode and the case of the second distribution execution mode. In addition, a distribution release command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S618). When the display side MPU 113 receives the distribution release command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display side MPU 113 reads a display pattern table for continuing the reach variation display in the distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). . Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the variation display of the symbols is continued in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of the reach symbols stopped and displayed when the effect for the game round is terminated. . In addition, as described above, the symbol display device 44 displays the winning aim notification image 134 for notifying that the winning of the distribution winning device 36 should be aimed. Further, the symbol display device 44 displays an image for allowing the player to recognize the current execution target in the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Further, in the symbol display device 44, an image for allowing the player to recognize that the distribution entrance 61 is in an open state is displayed.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1110). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the distribution start process is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter corresponds to the distribution process (step S310) by adding “1”. 5 ".

<Processing for sorting>
Next, the distribution process executed in step S310 of the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the distribution process, update processing of the distribution display unit 42c is first executed (step S1201). The processing content of the update processing is the same as the processing content of step S1001 in the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21).

  In the distribution process, on the condition that the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 is switched from the retracted position to the V guide position (step S1202: YES), the register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 is stored. “1” is set (step S1203). Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is started to switch the switching piece 66 to the V guide position. As described above, the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position is the timing at which a predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the sorting inlet 61 was first opened in the sorting execution mode.

  In the distribution process, a register corresponding to the switching piece 66 in the main MPU 92 is provided on the condition that it is time to return the switching piece 66 of the distribution winning device 36 from the V guide position to the retracted position (step S1204: YES). Is cleared to “0” (step S1205). Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the switching drive unit 67 is stopped to switch the switching piece 66 to the retracted position. As described above, the timing at which the switching piece 66 is returned to the retracted position is the timing at which the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the switching piece 66 was switched to the V induction position.

  In the distribution process, on condition that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 (step S1206: YES), the V winning flag provided in the main RAM 94 is set to “1”. "Is set (step S1207). The V winning flag is a flag for the main side MPU 92 to specify that the game ball has been detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and in the situation where “1” is already set, the V winning detection sensor 69 When a game ball is detected, the state where “1” is set is maintained.

  Thereafter, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1208). When receiving the V winning command from the main MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S619 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and sends a control table corresponding to the V winning command from the sound light side ROM 104. The data is read into the sound light side RAM 105 (step S620). In the control table, the light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and the sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 after the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the occurrence of the V prize.

  Further, the V winning command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S621). When the display-side MPU 113 receives the V-winning command from the sound-side MPU 103, the display-side MPU 113 notifies the V-winning detection sensor 69 that a game ball has been detected in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Read the display pattern table. In this case, as the display pattern table, the first display pattern table corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode and the second corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the second distribution execution mode. And a display pattern table. When the first display pattern table is read, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach symbol combination in the first variable display region 131 and the second variable display region 132 are used. The symbol display device 44 is controlled so that the symbol is stopped and displayed in the third variation display area 133. In addition, an image for notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 44 separately from the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133.

  On the other hand, when the second display pattern table is read, as shown in FIG. 9F, the symbols forming the reach symbol combination in the first variable display region 131 and the second variable display region 132, and Are symbols that are not included in the symbols to be displayed when symbols are displayed in the third variation display area 133 so that the symbols that are not included in the third variation display region 133 are stopped and displayed in the third variation display area 133 The display of the device 44 is controlled. In addition, an image for notifying that a V prize has occurred is displayed on the symbol display device 44 separately from the symbols in the variable display areas 131 to 133.

  In the distribution process, it is determined in step S1209 whether the distribution closing period is in progress. The distribution closing period is a period from the end of the first opening of the distribution inlet 61 to the start of the second opening of the distribution inlet 61 in the second distribution execution mode. If it is not during the distribution closing period (step S1209: NO), the distribution release period set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (first distribution release period, second distribution release period, and third distribution release period) It is determined whether any of the above has elapsed (step S1213). If the distribution release period has elapsed, the distribution closing setting process is executed (step S1214). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the distribution entrance driving unit 63 in the main MPU 92 is cleared to “0”. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 is stopped to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the closed state. . Thereafter, the value of the open / close count counter SOC of the main RAM 94 is decremented by 1 (step S1215), and the value of the open / close count counter SOC after the 1 subtraction is “1” (step S1216: YES). The distribution closing period (specifically 6 sec) is set in the timer counter of the side RAM 94 (step S1217). Thereby, measurement of the distribution closed period is started.

  When the distribution closing period is set, an affirmative determination is made in step S1209. If the distribution closing period has elapsed (step S1210: YES), the third distribution release period (specifically, 15 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1211). Then, an opening setting process for distribution is executed (step S1212). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the distribution entrance driving unit 63 in the main MPU 92. Thereby, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the distribution inlet drive unit 63 is started to switch the distribution inlet 61 to the open state. . In this case, the distribution inlet 61 is opened in the distribution-side middle period mode.

  If the value of the open / close count counter SOC becomes “0” as a result of subtracting 1 from the value of the open / close count counter SOC of the main RAM 94 in step S1215 (step S1216: NO), the distribution end processing in step S1222 is performed. Run. If it is determined in step S1213 that the allocation release period has not elapsed, it is determined that one of the count detection sensor 68 and the V prize detection sensor 69 of the allocation prize winning device 36 has detected a game ball. As a condition (step S1218: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the winning counter PC in the main RAM 94 (step S1219), and the condition is that the value of the winning counter PC is “0” (step S1220: YES). Similar to S1214, the distribution closing setting process is executed (step S1221). Thereafter, a distribution end process is executed in step S1222.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the distribution end process in step S1222. If “1” is not set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S1301: NO), a stop result setting process when no V winning is generated is executed (step S1302). In the stop result setting process, information on the stop state of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the fact that no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the fact that the V winning is not generated in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. Regardless of whether or not the game pattern is stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c in the game time execution period and the opening / closing execution mode, the next display of the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started. Maintained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the distribution execution mode that is not accompanied by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is completed, or when the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the display so far on the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. It may be configured to be erased. In this case, the distribution display unit 42c may be configured such that nothing is displayed, or may be configured to continue the display indicating that it is not changing.

  Thereafter, a game state transition process is executed (step S1303). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the current distribution execution mode is a low probability result, the winning lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. To do. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the winning result that triggered the current distribution execution mode is a highly likely winning result, the winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the result of the success / failure determination process becomes a winning result, and shifts to the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 by that.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S1304). In the flag clear process, “0” is cleared for the various flags used in the game times that triggered the execution of the current distribution execution mode and the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode. Further, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S1305). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  On the other hand, when “1” is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S1301: YES), a stop result setting process when a V winning is generated is executed (step S1306). In the stop result setting process, information on the stop mode of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the game ball being detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. The information on the stop mode of the pattern is information on the stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when no V prize is generated in step S1302. Thereby, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. In step S1306, different stop mode information is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the first distribution execution mode and when the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the second distribution execution mode, The stop mode of the pattern when the variable display of the pattern in the minute display part 42c is completed is different. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the distribution display unit 42c which opening / closing execution mode that occurs thereafter is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in which distribution execution mode. . In addition, as already described, the pattern mode stopped and displayed in the distribution display unit 42c is maintained until the next display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started. Will continue to be displayed. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing during the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which distribution execution mode the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize. It becomes possible to confirm.

  Thereafter, information on the opening period for special electricity (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1307). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for special electricity is started. In step S1308, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94, the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. It is determined which of the execution modes. If it is the first distribution execution mode (step S1308: YES), the first opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1309). If it is the second distribution execution mode (step S1308: NO), the second opening command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1310).

  When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the first opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S622 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the first opening command. Data is read from the ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S623). In the control table, light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 sets the first distribution execution mode. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered is executed. Further, the first opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S624). When the display side MPU 113 receives the first opening command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). The display pattern table for executing is read. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode.

  When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the second opening command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 makes an affirmative determination in step S625 in the table setting process (FIG. 17), and displays the control table corresponding to the second opening command. Data is read from the ROM 104 to the sound light side RAM 105 (step S626). In the control table, light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, and the speaker unit 74 sets the second distribution execution mode. A sound output effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered is executed. Further, the second opening command is transmitted to the display side MPU 113 (step S627). When the display side MPU 113 receives the second opening command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). The display pattern table for executing is read. Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is executed in the symbol display device 44. The content of the display effect is different from the content of the display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode.

  When the process of step S1309 or step S1310 is executed, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1311). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the distribution process is executed is “5”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “6” corresponding to the special electric power start process (step S311) by adding one. It becomes.

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special electricity start process executed in step S311 of the special figure special electricity control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special electricity start process, when the special electricity opening period has elapsed (step S1401: YES), “15” is set to the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1402), and the main RAM 94 wins a prize. “10” is set in the counter PC. The round counter RC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the number of remaining round games in the opening / closing execution mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, the winning counter PC is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the remaining number of the upper limit number that can be won in the special electricity winning device 37 in each round.

  Thereafter, the special game release period of the round game (specifically 29 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1404). Then, an opening setting process for special electricity is executed (step S1405). In the opening setting process, “1” is set in the register corresponding to the special electric drive unit 37 c in the main MPU 92. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is started to switch the special winning opening 37a to the open state.

  Thereafter, the release command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1406). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the release command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits the release command to the display side MPU 113 in the other processing of step S628 in the table setting processing (FIG. 17). When the display side MPU 113 receives the release command from the sound light side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is being opened. Read the display pattern table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is being opened in the symbol display device 44 is executed.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1407). When the special electricity start process is executed, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is “6”, and by adding 1 the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “7” corresponding to the special electricity release process (step S312). It becomes.

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special electric power release opening process executed in step S312 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  If the special electricity release period has not elapsed (step S1501: NO), the value of the prize counter PC is decremented by 1 (step S1502: YES) on condition that the special electricity prize winning device 37 has been won (step S1502: YES) (step S1501: NO). S1503). If the value of the winning counter PC after the 1 subtraction is “0” (step S1504: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC (step S1505). Also, when the special electricity release period has elapsed (step S1501: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the round counter RC (step S1505).

  Thereafter, by determining whether or not “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag of the main RAM 94, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the first distribution execution mode. (Step S1506). When “1” is set in the first distribution execution flag (step S1506: YES), the first special electricity closing period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1507), and the first distribution execution flag is set. If “1” is not set (step S1506: NO), the second special electricity closing period is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1508).

  The second special electricity closing period is set to a time longer than the first special electricity closing period, as described above, and is set to a time longer than the special electricity opening period. Specifically, the first special electricity closing period is set to 2 seconds, while the second special electricity closing period is set to 60 seconds, which is twice or more the special electricity opening period. The setting of the second special electricity closing period is always performed between round games in the opening / closing execution mode. As a result, when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects that a game ball has been detected in the second distribution execution mode and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the V winning detection sensor 69 is switched to the first distribution execution mode. Compared to the case where the game ball is detected and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the minimum time required for the completion is longer.

  When the process of step S1507 or step S1508 is executed, a special electricity closing setting process is executed (step S1509). In the closing setting process, the register corresponding to the special electric drive unit 37c in the main MPU 92 is cleared to “0”. As a result, in the port output process of step S207 in the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the output of the drive signal to the special electric drive unit 37c is stopped to switch the special winning opening 37a to the closed state.

  Thereafter, a close command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1510). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the close command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits the close command to the display side MPU 113 in the other process of step S 628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). When the display-side MPU 113 receives a close command from the sound light-side MPU 103, in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), the display-side MPU 113 executes a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is closed. Read the display pattern table. Thereby, a display effect corresponding to the fact that the special winning opening 37a is closed in the symbol display device 44 is executed.

  Thereafter, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1511). Since the value of the special figure special electricity counter when the special electric release opening process is executed is "7", the value of the special figure special electric counter is "8" corresponding to the special electric charge closing process (step S313) by adding 1. It becomes.

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special electric power closing process executed in step S313 of the special figure special electric power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When the value of the round counter RC is not “0” (step S1601: NO), it is confirmed whether or not the timer counter value of the main RAM 94 is “0”, thereby closing the special electricity period (first special electricity closure). It is determined whether or not the period or the second special electricity closing period has elapsed (step S1602). When the special electricity closing period has elapsed (step S1602: YES), “10” is set to the winning counter PC of the main RAM 94 (step S1603), and the special electricity release period (specifically 29 sec) of the round game is set. The timer counter of the main side RAM 94 is set (step S1604). Thereafter, the special electricity release setting process is executed (step S1605) in the same manner as in step S1405 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 25), and the release command is sent to the sound side MPU 103 in the same manner as in step S1406 in the special electricity start process (FIG. 25). (Step S1606). Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1607). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “8” when the special electric power closing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is reduced to “7” corresponding to the special electric charge opening process (step S312) by subtracting one. "

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is “0” (step S1601: YES), an ending command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1608). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the ending command from the main side MPU 92, the sound table side MPU 103 transmits the control table corresponding to the ending command from the sound light side ROM 104 in the other process of step S628 in the table setting process (FIG. 17). Read to the side RAM 105. In the control table, light emission control data of the display light emitting unit 73 and sound output control data of the speaker unit 74 in the ending period are set. By referring to the control table, the display light emitting unit 73 executes a light emission effect corresponding to the ending period, and the speaker unit 74 executes a sound output effect corresponding to the ending period. The sound light side MPU 103 transmits an ending command to the display side MPU 113. When receiving the ending command from the sound light side MPU 103, the display side MPU 113 reads a display pattern table for executing a display effect corresponding to the ending period in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18). Thereby, the display effect corresponding to the ending period is executed in the symbol display device 44.

  Thereafter, information on the ending period (for example, 5 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1609). Thereby, measurement of an ending period is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1610). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “8” when the special electric power closing process is executed, the value of the special figure special electric power counter is “9” corresponding to the special electric power end process (step S314) by adding one. It becomes.

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special power end process executed in step S314 of the special figure special power control process (FIG. 14) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the special electricity ending process, when the ending period has elapsed (step S1701: YES), a game state transition process is executed (step S1702). In the game state transition process, if the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a low-probability result, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode. . However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times). On the other hand, if the winning result that triggered the current opening / closing execution mode is a highly accurate winning result, the winning lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are continued until the result of the success / failure determination process becomes a winning result, and shifts to the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 by that.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S1703). In the flag clear process, the various flags used in the game times that triggered the execution of the current distribution execution mode, the various flags used in the current distribution execution mode, and the various flags used in the current opening / closing execution mode Clear the flag to “0”. Also, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S1704). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

<Game progressing>
Next, how the game progresses in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 29 (a) shows an execution period of the game times, FIG. 29 (b) shows a timing when winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, and FIG. 29 (c) shows an execution period of the distribution execution mode. FIG. 29D shows the timing at which the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, FIG. 29E shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, and FIG. f) shows a period during which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the special figure display unit 42a, FIG. 29 (g) shows a period during which the variation display of the pattern is executed in the distribution display unit 42c, and FIG. h) is a period in which the effect for playing the game is being executed on the symbol display device 44 and the reach variation display is not being executed. FIG. 29 (i) is a diagram in which the reach variation display is executed on the symbol display device 44. 29 (a) and FIG. 29 ( ) Indicates a period in which a combination of three identical symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol display device 44.

  First, a case where a result of losing in the success / failure determination process is described.

  At the timing of t1, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), and as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the pattern is started in the special figure display unit 42a. As shown in FIG. 29 (h), the variable display of the symbols is started in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, at the timing of t2, when the game display variation display period elapses, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the picture in the special figure display section 42a is completed, and FIG. 29 (h) As shown in FIG. 29, the variation display of the symbols in the variation display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44 is terminated, and the current game round is terminated as shown in FIG. In this case, the special figure display unit 42a stops the display of the pattern corresponding to the result of losing / deciding result. Further, in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, combinations of symbols different from the combinations of reach symbols and the same symbols are stopped and displayed.

  Next, a case will be described in which the success / failure determination process results in a winning result and the process shifts to the distribution execution mode but the shift to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  At the timing of t3, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), so that the variation display of the pattern is started on the special figure display unit 42a as shown in FIG. 29 (f). As shown in FIG. 29 (h), the variable display of the symbols is started in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, at the timing of t4, when the game time variation display period elapses, the current game time is ended as shown in FIG. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the picture in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, the special figure display unit 42a stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process (the low or high probability result). Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 (h) and 29 (i), in the symbol display device 44, the first variation display area 131 is displayed from the situation where the variation display of the symbols is performed in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133. In the second variation display area 132, the reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the third variation display region 133 is switched to the situation in which the reach variation display is performed in which the symbol variation display is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has been started, the player can clearly recognize that the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 has started.

  In addition, at the timing of t4, which is the timing when the game round is finished, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variation display of the symbol is being displayed on the distribution display unit 42c in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed on the symbol display device 44. It is possible to grasp whether or not the display is regular.

  Then, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, and the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29 (c). Even when the distribution execution mode is started, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29 (g), and as shown in FIG. 29 (i). The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (d), the distribution execution mode is set as shown in FIG. 29 (c) at the timing of t6 without the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36. finish. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the pattern variation display on the distribution display unit 42c is terminated at the timing of t6. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V prize is not generated is stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. At the timing t6, the reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is terminated as shown in FIG. 29 (i). When the variation display is terminated, a symbol different from the symbols constituting the reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed in the third variation display area 133 of the symbol display device 44. This notifies the player that the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the distribution execution mode.

  Next, a case will be described in which the winning / failing determination process results in a winning result, the process shifts to the distribution execution mode, and the process shifts to the opening / closing execution mode after the distribution execution mode ends.

  At the timing of t7, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 29 (a), whereby the variation display of the pattern is started on the special figure display unit 42a as shown in FIG. 29 (f). As shown in FIG. 29 (h), the variable display of the symbols is started in the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44. Thereafter, at the timing of t8, when the game time variation display period elapses, the current game time is ended as shown in FIG. Accordingly, as shown in FIG. 29 (f), the variation display of the picture in the special figure display section 42a is terminated. In this case, the special figure display unit 42a stops and displays the pattern corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination process (the low or high probability result). Further, as shown in FIGS. 29 (h) and 29 (i), in the symbol display device 44, the first variation display area 131 is displayed from the situation where the variation display of the symbols is performed in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133. In the second variation display area 132, the reach symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the third variation display region 133 is switched to the situation in which the reach variation display is performed in which the symbol variation display is continued. By confirming that the reach variation display has been started, the player can clearly recognize that the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 has started.

  In addition, at the timing of t8, which is the timing when the game round is completed, as shown in FIG. The manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variation display of the symbol is being displayed on the distribution display unit 42c in the situation where the reach variation display is being performed on the symbol display device 44. It is possible to grasp whether or not the display is regular.

  Then, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, the distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 29 (c). Even when the distribution execution mode is started, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29 (g), and as shown in FIG. 29 (i). The reach variation display on the symbol display device 44 is continued.

  Thereafter, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 as shown in FIG. In this case, at the timing of the time t10, as shown in FIGS. 29 (i) and 29 (j), in the third variable display area 133 of the symbol display device 44, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach symbol combination. Is stopped. Thereby, in the symbol display device 44, the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133. Even if the V prize is generated, the distribution execution mode is continued as shown in FIG. 29C, and the variation display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is continued as shown in FIG. 29G. The

  Thereafter, the distribution execution mode ends at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29 (g), the change display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is terminated at the timing of t11. When the variable display is ended, the pattern corresponding to the stop result when the V winning is generated is stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42c. Then, at the timing of t11, the opening / closing execution mode is started as shown in FIG.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In the distribution execution mode, even if a game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur unless the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. As a result, in the distribution execution mode, the player not only enters the game ball into the distribution winning device 36 but also detects the game ball that has entered the distribution winning device 36 by the V winning detection sensor 69. I expect that. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode are set as the distribution execution mode. Basically, in the first distribution execution mode, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball. On the other hand, in the second allocation execution mode, detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69 does not occur. As a result, the player expects the first distribution execution mode to be executed. Therefore, the number of objects that the player expects can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, even if the first distribution execution mode is not selected in the distribution determination process, the second distribution execution mode is executed. As a result, when a winning in the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs and the distribution determination process is executed, the distribution execution mode is executed regardless of the result of the distribution determination process. The Rukoto. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities to execute the distribution execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in the distribution execution mode, an opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 37 is opened / closed is generated. As a result, when the game winning ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, the special winning prize in the open state is changed from the situation in which the game winning ball is entered into the open winning allocation device 36. A transition is made to a situation where a game ball is entered into the device 37, and the situation where a game ball is entered into the opened device is extended. Therefore, it is possible to ensure a long game execution period in which a game ball is inserted into an open device.

  In the allocation execution mode, the allocation prize winning device 36 is in an open state, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the special electricity prize winning device 37 is in an open state. Therefore, the target for the occurrence of a ball changes depending on each mode. Therefore, in a configuration in which a game is performed in which a game ball is inserted into a device that is in an open state in either the distribution execution mode or the opening / closing execution mode, the difference between the modes may be clarified. It becomes possible.

  In any of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode, when a game ball enters the distribution winning device 36, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Thereby, even when the second distribution execution mode occurs, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely reduced.

  In any of the first allocation execution mode and the second allocation execution mode, the total period during which the allocation prize winning device 36 is in the open state is allocated to the allocation prize winning device 36 in relation to the game ball firing cycle. It is set to a period during which the upper limit number of game balls can be entered. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce a player's feeling of disadvantage to the occurrence of the second distribution execution mode.

  Even if the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur. If the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, there is a high possibility that it is caused by fraud. In this case, by preventing the opening / closing execution mode from occurring , It is possible to prevent profits from being granted for such misconduct.

  A distribution execution mode is generated by causing a game ball to enter the distribution through winning portion 35. In other words, in order to generate the opening / closing execution mode, first, a game ball is entered into the distribution through winning portion 35 to start the distribution execution mode, and in the distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36 It is necessary to enter a game ball and generate a V prize. As a result, the target for entering the game ball changes in stages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, when a game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during the winning effective period of the distribution through winning portion 35, a shift to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the winning effective period Even if a game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during a period different from the above, the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. Thereby, it is possible to limit the situation in which the distribution execution mode is executed based on the game balls entering the distribution through winning portion 35.

  Different notifications are executed on the symbol display device 44 depending on whether a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode or a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. Similarly, different notifications are executed in the distribution display unit 42c when a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. This makes it possible to clearly grasp in which distribution execution mode the V winning has occurred.

  When the winning / no-go determining process is executed, the symbol variation display is started in each variation display area 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, and the first payout valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. Reach variation display is performed in the third variation display region 133 in a state where the combination of reach symbols is stopped and displayed in the variation display region 131 and the second variation display region 132, and the reach variation display is performed on the distribution through winning portion 35. This is also continued in the winning period and the allocation execution mode. When the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped in a state where the same symbols as the symbols forming the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed. When the allocation execution mode ends without generating a V prize, the reach variation display in the third variation display area 133 is stopped so that the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed. As a result, not only the fact that the game times are being executed and the result of the success / failure determination process are notified using the symbol variation display in each of the variation display areas 131 to 133, but also the winning of the distribution through winning portion 35 is awarded. The validity period, the distribution execution mode, and the presence / absence of occurrence of a V prize in the distribution execution mode are notified. Therefore, various types of information can be notified using the symbol variation display in each variation display region 131-133.

  While the game times are being executed, the special figure display unit 42a displays the variation of the pattern, and when the variation display of the pattern ends, the pattern corresponding to the result of the determination process is stopped and displayed. Further, in the winning validity period and the distribution execution mode of the distribution through winning section 35, the pattern display is performed in the distribution display section 42c, and when the display of the variation of the pattern ends, the distribution execution mode The pattern corresponding to the presence or absence of occurrence of the V prize is stopped and displayed. Thus, in the configuration in which a series of effects are executed in the game times, the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 and the distribution execution mode in each of the variable display areas 131 to 133 of the symbol display device 44, the special display is performed. By checking the unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c, it becomes possible to monitor each period individually.

  When the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the change display of the pattern on the distribution display portion 42c is started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall confirms whether or not the variation display of the pattern has been started on the distribution display unit 42c, thereby determining whether or not the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 has started. It becomes possible to grasp clearly.

  The change display of the pattern in the special figure display unit 42a is ended before the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 is started. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 to be generated is regular by checking the special figure display portion 42a. It becomes.

  Both the special figure display unit 42 a and the distribution display unit 42 c are directly controlled by the main MPU 92. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the content displayed on the special figure display part 42a and the distribution display part 42c.

  In the opening / closing execution mode generated with the second distribution execution mode as an opportunity, the special electricity closing period between rounds is longer than the opening / closing execution mode generated with the first distribution execution mode as an opportunity. In the opening / closing execution mode that is triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 itself, that is, the symbol display device 44, the display light emitting unit 73, and the speaker unit 74 notifies that fact. As a result, the fact can be recognized by the manager of the game hall during the opening / closing execution mode, and sufficient time to deal with the fact can be given to the manager. Furthermore, when the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the second distribution execution mode due to fraud, it is possible to reduce the digestibility of the opening / closing execution mode, and the unit time for the fraud It is possible to reduce the amount of profits obtained per hit.

  In addition, the period during which the special prize winning device 37 is closed in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is longer than that of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode. Since the closed period is constant without depending on the situation where game balls are being fired, etc., opening and closing triggered by the second sort execution mode by lengthening such closed period It becomes possible to make the execution mode longer.

  Also, not only the ending period is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is not lengthened, but the special electricity closing period at the timing before the last round game is lengthened and the opening / closing execution mode is lengthened. Is planned. As a result, when the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode is caused by an illegal act, the illegal act is dealt with at a stage before the game ball payout in the opening / closing execution mode is completed. It becomes possible to do.

  Further, the upper limit number and the special electricity release period of each round game are the same in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode. As a result, when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode occurs as a result of a regular game played instead of an illegal act, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode It is possible to pay out game balls equivalent to.

  When the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning result, the distribution execution mode of the type corresponding to the result of the determination / non-permission determination process or the type determination process is not executed, but the distribution is executed after the game round is completed. A sort execution mode corresponding to the result of the sort determination process executed when a game ball has entered the sort through prize unit 35 during the prize valid period of the through-thru prize unit 35 is executed. The Thereby, in the above-mentioned winning validity period in which the allocation execution mode is determined to occur, the player performs a launch operation while expecting the type of the allocation execution mode to be an advantageous type for the player; Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Since the distribution determination process is executed based on the game ball entering the distribution through winning portion 35, it is possible to clarify the execution trigger of the distribution determination process. When a game ball enters the distribution through winning portion 35 during the winning validity period, not only the distribution determination process but also the distribution execution mode is started. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game content as compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

  It is possible to grasp whether or not the distribution execution mode is being executed by checking the distribution display unit 42c by displaying the variation of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c in the distribution execution mode. It becomes. Further, in the configuration in which the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur depending on whether or not the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, The stop result of the distribution display part 42c changes depending on whether or not a V prize has occurred. Thus, not only as a display unit for notifying that the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution display unit 42c is a display for notifying whether or not a V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. It becomes possible to function as a part.

  The content of the stop result when the display of the variation of the picture on the distribution display unit 42c ends corresponds to the presence or absence of the V prize in the distribution execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not a V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode by confirming the stop result when the display of the variation of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the confirmation timing easy to understand when confirming whether or not a V winning has occurred based on the contents of the distribution display unit 42c.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the execution mode of the distribution execution mode is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 30 is a time chart showing operation modes of the distribution winning device 36 in each of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. 30 (a1) and FIG. 30 (a2) show the execution period of the distribution execution mode, FIG. 30 (b1) and FIG. 30 (b2) show the distribution release period of the distribution winning device 36, and FIG. c1) and FIG. 30 (c2) show a period in which the switching piece 66 of the sorting and winning device 36 is arranged at the V guide position.

  First, the first distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing t1, the first distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30 (a1), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). In this case, the distribution side long-term release is performed.

  Thereafter, at a timing t2, when the predetermined period (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed since the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started, the switching piece 66 is guided to the V position from the retracted position as shown in FIG. Switch to position. Thereafter, when the V induction continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing t2, at the timing t3, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V induction position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the distribution inlet 61 is first opened in the distribution-side long-term mode, and the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position in relation to the game ball firing cycle. As for the timing, even if the launch operation is continued aiming at the prize winning to the sorting prize winning device 36 before the start of the first sorting execution mode, the number of winning prizes to the sorting prize winning device 36 is sure to be the upper limit number on the sorting side. It is the timing that does not reach. Therefore, if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the first distribution execution mode, any of the game balls winning the distribution entrance 61 will receive the V winning of the distribution winning device 36. The game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 after being surely guided to the passage area 65c. When the V winning detection sensor 69 detects the game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is started after the end of the first distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, as the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side long-term mode elapses at the timing of t4, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). Then, at the timing of subsequent t5, the distribution inlet 61 is opened again as shown in FIG. 30 (b1). In this case, the distribution side short period mode is opened.

  Thereafter, when the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side short period mode elapses at the timing of t6, the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 30 (b1), and as illustrated in FIG. 30 (a1). The first distribution execution mode ends at the same time. In addition, when the number of winnings to the distribution winning device 36 reaches the distribution side upper limit before the distribution opening period elapses, the distribution inlet 61 is closed at a timing earlier than the timing of t6, and the first. The distribution execution mode ends. For example, when the number of winnings to the allocation winning device 36 reaches the allocation-side upper limit at a timing earlier than the timing of t4, the first allocation execution mode ends at that time, and the allocation-side short-term mode The distribution opening 61 is not opened again due to the above. However, even in this case, as described above, the first distribution execution mode ends after an opportunity for the game ball to be guided to the V winning path area 65c occurs.

  Next, the second distribution execution mode will be described with reference to FIG. At the timing of t11, the second distribution execution mode is started as shown in FIG. 30 (a2), and the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is started as shown in FIG. 30 (b2). In this case, in the second distribution execution mode, the opening of the distribution inlet 61 corresponds to the distribution-side short period mode. The distribution opening period according to the distribution side short period mode is shorter than the period required from when the distribution inlet 61 is first opened until the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 30 (b2) and 30 (c2), the distribution inlet 61 is at the timing t12, which is a timing before the timing t13, which is the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Closed. However, even if the distribution inlet 61 is closed, the second distribution execution mode does not end and continues.

  After that, at the timing t13 when the second distribution execution mode is continued and the distribution inlet 61 is continuously closed, a predetermined time after the opening of the distribution inlet 61 is first started. When the time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the switching piece 66 is switched from the retracted position to the V guide position as shown in FIG. 30 (c2). After that, the V guidance continuation period (for example, 3 sec) elapses from the timing t13 at the timing t14 in which the second sorting execution mode is continued and the sorting inlet 61 is continuously closed. As a result, the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position as shown in FIG.

  In this case, since the opening mode of the distribution entrance 61 is the distribution side short-term mode in the first opening time in the second distribution execution mode, no winning in the distribution winning device 36 occurs in the first opening time. Probability is high. Even if a prize is awarded to the allocation prize winning device 36, a game ball that wins the sorting prize winning apparatus 36 and normally flows down at the timing when the first opening round ends is branched in the allocation prize winning device 36. The longest period required to reach the downstream side of the branch position to the V winning path area 65c in the path 65 is the period from the end of the first opening to the timing when the switching piece 66 is switched to the V guide position. Shorter than (timing t12 to timing t13). Therefore, there is a possibility that the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36 even if the launch operation is continued aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 in the second distribution execution mode. Is low. Then, since the V winning detection sensor 69 does not detect the game ball, the opening / closing execution mode is not started after the end of the second distribution execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (b2), the distribution inlet 61 is opened again at the timing t15, which is later than the timing t14, which is the timing at which the switching piece 66 is switched from the V guide position to the retracted position. . The opening times of the distribution inlet 61 also correspond to the distribution side short-term mode. Thereafter, the distribution opening period corresponding to the distribution-side short period mode elapses at the timing of t16, whereby the distribution inlet 61 is closed as illustrated in FIG. 30 (b2), and illustrated in FIG. 30 (a2). Thus, the second distribution execution mode ends.

  As described above, in the first distribution execution mode, if the game ball aiming at winning the distribution winning device 36 is normally fired, the game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, and the first The opening / closing execution mode occurs after the end of the one distribution execution mode. On the other hand, in the second allocation execution mode, even if the game balls aiming for winning the distribution winning device 36 are normally launched, the detection of the game balls by the V winning detection sensor 69 basically occurs. No, the opening / closing execution mode does not occur after the end of the second distribution execution mode. As a result, the player expects the first distribution execution mode to occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the first distribution execution mode, more than the upper limit number of game balls can be awarded to the distribution winning device 36, whereas in the second distribution execution mode, the distribution winning device 36. You cannot expect to win more than the maximum number of game balls on the distribution side. Furthermore, in the second allocation execution mode, there is a high possibility that no prize is awarded to the allocation prize winning device 36. Thereby, it is possible to increase the advantage of the first distribution execution mode with respect to the second distribution execution mode.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration of the sorting standby process executed by the main MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the distribution waiting process, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S1801: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1801). S1802). Then, the distribution determination process is executed using the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S1803). In the distribution determination process, the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94, and the numerical information set as the first distribution execution mode in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the above.

  Thereafter, the display table for the distribution display unit 42c is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1804). In the display table for the distribution display unit 42c, data for specifying the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is set. That is, the display table includes data for specifying the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode and the display contents of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode. And data for specifying the are set. For example, when the distribution display unit 42c is a so-called 7-segment display, data for displaying “1” on the distribution display unit 42c as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the first distribution execution mode. Is set, and data for displaying “2” on the distribution display unit 42c is set as the display content of the distribution display unit 42c corresponding to the second distribution execution mode.

  Thereafter, data corresponding to the result of the current distribution determination process is specified from the display table for the distribution display unit 42c, and the specified data is set as display control data for the distribution display unit 42c (step S1805). ). As a result, the result of the sorting determination process is displayed on the sorting display unit 42c. That is, in the present embodiment, when the distribution determination process is executed, a display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed on the distribution display unit 42c, and the distribution display unit 42c changes the pattern. The display is not executed. As described above, when the distribution execution mode is started by displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display unit 42c, the distribution execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Which of the minute execution modes is supported can be notified by the distribution display unit 42c.

  In addition, when the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is when the distribution execution mode is not accompanied by the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Is terminated when the distribution execution mode ends, and when the opening / closing execution mode occurs, it ends when the opening / closing execution mode ends. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode is changed to either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is compatible, and by checking the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

  In addition, instead of the configuration in which the display on the distribution display unit 42c is erased at the end of the sorting execution mode without the transition to the opening / closing execution mode or at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. Regardless of whether or not the distribution execution mode is ended, it may be deleted, or may be deleted when a new game round is started. Further, the distribution display unit 42c continues to display the pattern corresponding to the result of the previous distribution determination process, and when the distribution determination process is executed, the display of the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed. The content may be changed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process in step S1803 (step S1806). When the first distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: YES), “1” is set to the first distribution execution flag provided in the main RAM 94 (step S1807). The first distribution execution flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 92 which one of the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode should be executed as the distribution execution mode. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “1”, it is specified that the first distribution execution mode should be executed. When the value of the first distribution execution flag is “0” Specifies that the second distribution execution mode should be executed. Thereafter, the first distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1808). The processing contents of the sound light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the first distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  On the other hand, when the second distribution execution mode is selected (step S1806: NO), the second distribution command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S1809). The processing contents of the sound light side MPU 103 and the display side MPU 113 when the second distribution command is transmitted from the main side MPU 92 are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  When the process of step S1808 or step S1809 is executed, information on the distribution opening period (for example, 3 sec) is set in the timer counter of the main RAM 94 (step S1810). Thereby, measurement of the opening period for distribution is started. Then, 1 is added to the value of the special figure special electricity counter (step S1811). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the distribution standby process is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special electric power counter corresponds to the distribution start process (step S309) by adding 1. “4”.

  In the present embodiment, the process for updating the display content on the distribution display unit 42c is not executed in the distribution start process (FIG. 22) and the distribution process (FIG. 23).

  As described above, when the distribution determination process is executed, display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is performed on the distribution display unit 42c. As described above, when the distribution execution mode is started by displaying the result of the distribution determination process on the distribution display unit 42c, the distribution execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode. Which of the minute execution modes is supported can be notified by the distribution display unit 42c.

  When the distribution execution mode is started, the display corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process displayed on the distribution display unit 42c is the distribution execution mode that does not involve the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. The process is terminated when the distribution execution mode ends. When the opening / closing execution mode occurs, the process ends. Thus, by confirming the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in the situation where the distribution execution mode is being executed, the distribution execution mode is changed to either the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp whether the opening / closing execution mode is compatible, and by checking the distribution display unit 42c at an arbitrary timing in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the opening / closing execution mode is changed to the first distribution execution mode and the first distribution execution mode. It is possible to grasp which of the two distribution execution modes is triggered.

  The distribution display unit 42c is directly controlled by the main MPU 92. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the information displayed on the distribution display part 42c.

  A special figure display part 42a is provided separately from the distribution display part 42c, and the change display of the pattern during the game is performed by the special figure display part 42a. Thereby, the display unit for notifying that the game times are being executed and the result of the success / failure determination process, and the display unit for notifying the result of the allocation determination process include the special figure display unit 42a and the allocation. The display unit 42c is provided separately. Therefore, it is possible to monitor each content individually by checking the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning validity period for the distribution through winning portion 35 is started, the display of the variation of the pattern is started in the distribution display portion 42c, and the winning through the distributing through winning portion 35 is received. When the distribution determination process occurs and the distribution determination process is executed, the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c may be terminated while the pattern corresponding to the result of the distribution determination process is stopped. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the winning validity period for the distribution through winning portion 35 by checking whether or not the display of the variation of the pattern is executed in the distribution display portion 42c. It becomes.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a display unit that is directly controlled by the main MPU 92 is provided separately from the special figure display unit 42a and the distribution display unit 42c. It is good also as composition which performs. In this case, in the display unit, similar to the distribution display unit 42c in the first embodiment, when the variation display of the pattern is terminated depending on whether or not the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure which makes the kind of the pattern to stop differ.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the embodiments described above, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is surely generated. In the present embodiment, even when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period, it is possible that the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. In addition, the probability of winning the shift to the distribution execution mode when the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs varies according to the gaming state. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the types of hit results in this embodiment will be described. As in the first embodiment, the winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being the winning result in the determination process (step S403) in the main MPU 92. Although there are a plurality of types of winning results that are common to the start of the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the combination of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process It is an opportunity to change the type to a different type. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, it corresponds to the selected winning result as long as there is no transition to the open / close execution mode triggered by the game time in which the type determination process is executed Each winning probability is not set.

  As data for selecting the type of the winning result by lottery in the type determination process, a type table 93a is provided in the main ROM 93 as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. FIG. 32B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the type table 93a. In the type table 93a, a hit result for the type counter C2 is assigned as a low hit result, a first high hit result, a second high hit result, a third high hit result, and a fourth high. There is a hit result and a fifth high chance result. Specifically, in the type table 93a, among the type counters C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the low probability result, and “10 to 13” corresponds to the first high probability result. “14-17” corresponds to the second high probability result, “18-21” corresponds to the third high probability result, and “22-25” corresponds to the fourth. It corresponds to the high-accuracy result, and “26 to 29” corresponds to the fifth high-accuracy result.

  Corresponding to each of the hit results, as shown in FIG. 32A, the main ROM 93 has a low accuracy table group 93b, a first high accuracy table group 93c, a second high accuracy table group 93d, A third high accuracy table group 93e, a fourth high accuracy table group 93f, and a fifth high accuracy table group 93g are provided. If any hit result is selected in the type determination process in a predetermined game time, and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs triggered by the predetermined game time, the type determination is performed when the opening / closing execution mode ends. A gaming state corresponding to the winning result selected in the process is set. When game times are performed in the gaming state, the success / failure determination process is executed using the success / failure tables included in the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to the gaming state, and the game times are changed following the game times. When the winning validity period of the through-thru winning portion 35 is generated, the allocation determination process is executed using the allocation tables included in the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to the gaming state. In the success / failure table, a numerical range of the winning random number counter C1 which is a winning result in the success / failure determination process is set. In the distribution table, a numerical range of the distribution counter C3 that is a winning result in the distribution determination process is set, and the numerical range that is the winning result includes the execution winning of the first distribution execution mode. A numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 and a numerical value range of the distribution counter C3 to be selected for execution in the second distribution execution mode are set.

  FIG. 32C is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the table groups 93b to 93g corresponding to each hit result. In the case of a low probability result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/5. In this case, the combination probability that becomes a winning result in the success / failure determination process and becomes a winning result in any of the distribution execution modes in the distribution determination process is 1/200. In the case of the first high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is ¼ higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is the case of the low-accuracy result. It becomes the same 1/5, and the synthesis probability is 1/20 higher than the case of the low probability result. In the case of the second high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/8 higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. 2/5 which is also high, and the synthesis probability is 1/20, which is the same as in the case of the first high-accuracy result. In the case of the third high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/10 higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. 2/5, which is higher than that of the first to second high probability results, and 1/25 which is higher than that of the low probability results. In the case of the fourth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/20 higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. 4/5 which is also high, and the synthesis probability is 1/25, which is the same as in the case of the third high probability result. In the case of the fifth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is the same as that of the low-accuracy result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result. Becomes 1/1 (that is, 100%), and the synthesis probability is lower than that of the first to fourth high probability results and is higher than 1/40 that of the low probability results.

  As described above, when the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a manner corresponding to any of the high-probability results, the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are performed in a form corresponding to the low-accuracy result. The synthesis probability is higher than when it is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving any one of the high probability results.

  Depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result, the combination type of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process, and accordingly, it is possible to diversify the game.

  The synthesis probability is different depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result. As a result, it is possible to produce advantages and disadvantages even in a highly accurate result. Moreover, even if it is a case where any highly accurate result is triggered, the said synthetic | combination probability will be 1/20 or less which is an upper limit reference | standard probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

  There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the win determination process is lower than other high-winning results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than other high-winning results. There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the sorting determination process is lower than other high-winning results, instead of the winning probability of the determination process being higher than the other high-winning results. As a result, it is possible to individually generate a situation in which the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is high and a situation in which the winning probability of the distribution determination process is high, and it is possible to diversify the objects whose advantages are increased. Become.

  Depending on the type of high-accuracy result, one of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the other is the same as the case of the low-accuracy result. A situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the advantage the same as in the case of the low hit result while the other is extremely higher in the advantage than in the case of the low hit result and the other in the determination process and the allocation determination process. The sharpness determination process and the distribution determination process can be sharpened.

  Although the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as in the case of the low probability winning result, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. In this case, if the winning / notifying process results in a win / no-win determination process, if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is certain. Will occur. In this situation, as long as the winning determination process results in a winning result, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed, so that the player's attention to the winning result in the winning determination process can be increased. It becomes possible.

  Note that, regardless of which table group 93b to 93g is selected, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is 1 / of the case where the winning result is obtained in the distribution determination process. 2 is constant.

  Hereinafter, a processing configuration for enabling execution of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process corresponding to the hit result as described above will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing special figure variation start processing in the present embodiment. The special figure variation start process is executed in step S305 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  In the special figure change start process, the data setting process is executed (step S1902) on condition that the number of the hold information on the special figure side is 1 or more (step S1901: YES). In the data setting process, the same process as the data setting process (step S402) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, the success / failure table corresponding to the current gaming state is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1903). Specifically, in the main side RAM 94, as a flag for specifying the gaming state by the main side MPU 92, a first high-accuracy state flag, a second high-accuracy state flag, a third high-accuracy state flag, a fourth high-accuracy state flag. A status flag and a fifth high-accuracy status flag are provided. A state in which “1” is set in the first high-accuracy state flag means that the game state is after the first high-accuracy hit result and the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and the second high-accuracy state flag A state in which “1” is set means that the game state is after the second high-accuracy hit result and the open / close execution mode has occurred, and the third high-accuracy state flag is set to “1”. Means that the game state is the game state after the opening / closing execution mode has occurred and the fourth high probability state flag is set to “1”. It means that the game state is after the winning result and the opening / closing execution mode has occurred, and when the fifth high-accuracy state flag is set to “1”, the fifth high-accuracy winning result is obtained, and then the opening / closing is executed. Game after mode occurs It means that a state, all the state where "1" to the high probability state flag not set means that a gaming state after subsequent closing execution mode will result per low probability occurs.

  In step S1903, the states of the first to fifth high-accuracy state flags in the main RAM 94 are specified, and the success / failure table is read from the table group corresponding to the determination result among the table groups 93b to 93g in the main ROM 93. Thereafter, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read in the hold information stored in the execution area 124 for the special figure, and the read numerical information is stored in the numerical result information set as the hit result in the read / uncheck table. It is determined whether or not it matches any one (step S1904).

  If the result of this determination processing is a winning result (step S1905: YES), the type table 93a is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S1906). Since only one type table 93a is provided, one type table 93a is read out. After that, the numerical information acquired from the type counter C2 is read in the hold information stored in the special chart execution area 124, and the read result numerical information set in the type table 93a is the low probability result, the first high probability. It is determined which one of the winning result, the second highly likely result, the third highly likely result, the fourth highly likely result, and the fifth highly likely result is supported (step S1907).

  After executing the type determination process, “1” is set in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the type of the winning result specified in the type determination process (step S1908). Specifically, the main side RAM 94 has a low winning flag, a first high winning flag, a second high winning flag, a third high winning flag, a fourth high winning flag, and a fifth high winning flag. In step S1908, “1” is set to only the winning flag corresponding to the result of the type determination process among the winning flags.

  Thereafter, a stop result setting process for a winning result is executed (step S1909). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for hit results stored in advance in the main ROM 93, The specified information is stored in the main RAM 94. In the stop result table for winning results, the type of the pattern stop mode that is stopped and displayed on the special figure display unit 42a is set differently for each hit result type. In step S1909, step S1907 is changed to step S1907. The information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the type of the hit result specified in the above is stored in the main RAM 94. Note that the pattern stop mode may be set in a one-to-one correspondence with each winning result, and a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the hit results. A method for selecting a stop result for a winning result for which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary. For example, the stop result may be selected according to the value of the type counter C2.

  The processing contents of steps S1910 to S1915 are the same as the processing contents of steps S408 to S413 of the special figure variation start process (FIG. 15) in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the distribution standby process in the present embodiment. The distribution standby process is executed in step S308 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  In the distribution standby process, first, an update process of the distribution display unit 42c is executed (step S2001). Note that the pattern change display on the distribution display unit 42c is started in step S905 in the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 20), as in the first embodiment. Further, the processing content of the update processing is the same as step S1001 of the distribution standby processing (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S2002). Here, the determination as to whether or not a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred occurs only in step S2002. As a result, the winning validity period to the distribution through winning portion 35 is generated only when the game round corresponding to the winning result is completed.

  When a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 has occurred (step S2002: YES), the value of the distribution counter C3 is stored in the distribution execution area 125 (step S2003). Thereafter, the states of the first to fifth high-accuracy state flags in the main side RAM 94 are specified, and the distribution table is read from the table group corresponding to the specified result among the table groups 93 b to 93 g in the main side ROM 93 to the main side RAM 94. As a result, the distribution table corresponding to the current gaming state is read (step S2004). FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the sorting tables included in the low probability table group 93b and the first high probability table group 93c. In the distribution table, among the distribution counters C3 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 23” corresponds to the outlier result, and “24 to 26” corresponds to the shift to the first distribution execution mode. “27 to 29” corresponds to the shift to the second distribution execution mode. In this case, a winning result is obtained with a probability of 1/5, and a transition to the first distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 1/2 of the winning result and 1 / of the winning result is obtained. Transition to the second distribution execution mode occurs with a probability of 2.

  Thereafter, in step S2005, it is determined whether or not the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches any of the numerical information set as the winning result in the read distribution table. In the distribution determination process in step S2005, when the numerical information stored in the distribution execution area 125 matches the numerical information of the winning result, the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution are performed. It is determined whether any numerical information in the execution mode matches.

  When the result of the allocation determination process is a win result (step S2006: YES), a stop result setting process at the time of allocation win is executed (step S2007). Specifically, information on the stop mode of the pattern to be stopped and displayed on the distribution display unit 42 c is read from the main ROM 93. This pattern stop mode information is different from the stop mode information when the first sort execution mode occurs, when the second sort run mode occurs, and when no sort run mode occurs. Is set. In step S2007, when the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the first distribution execution mode is read and the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped. The display of the distribution display unit 42c is controlled so as to be displayed, and when the second distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the second distribution execution mode is read out. At the same time, display control is performed on the sorting display unit 42c so that the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, setting processing for the distribution execution mode is executed (step S2008). In the setting process, the same process as the process of steps S1005 to S1010 of the distribution standby process (FIG. 21) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereby, the transition setting to the 1st distribution execution mode or the 2nd distribution execution mode is performed.

  Thereafter, after the variable display table for the V winning determination display section is read from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2009), the variable display of the pattern is started in the V winning determination display section (step S2010). In this embodiment, since the result of the distribution determination process is displayed on the distribution display unit 42c, a display for notifying whether it is the distribution execution mode and whether or not a V winning has occurred in the distribution execution mode. As a part, a V prize determination display part is provided separately. The V winning determination display unit is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. In this case, it is impossible to perform a complicated display like the symbol display device 44 in the V winning determination display unit, but it is possible to reduce the processing load for display control of the V winning determination display unit. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the V winning determination display unit, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable. The display range of the V winning determination display section is narrower than the display surface of the symbol display device 44. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise a player's attention degree to the symbol display apparatus 44 rather than the V prize determination display part.

  The variation display table for the V winning determination display unit is a table in which a variation display pattern of a pattern when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display unit is determined in advance. When the variation display of the pattern is executed in the V winning determination display section, the same variation display table is used. When the variation display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display portion, the variation display of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern is repeated, but the variation display table for the V winning determination display portion displays the variation of the pattern according to the predetermined pattern. Control data for one turn in the variable display is set. Therefore, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the V winning determination display section, the variation display table for the V winning determination display section is repeatedly used until the distribution execution mode is completed. In step S1101 of the distribution start process (FIG. 22) and step S1201 of the distribution process (FIG. 23) in this embodiment, the update process of the V winning determination display unit is performed instead of the update process of the distribution display unit 42c. Is executed based on the fluctuation display table.

  If the result of the allocation determination process is an outlier result (step S2006: NO), a stop result setting process for the out-of-distribution result is executed (step S2011). Specifically, information on the pattern stop mode corresponding to the fact that the result of the distribution determination process is an outlier result is read from the main ROM 93. The information on the pattern stop mode is information on the pattern stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process (step S2007) at the time of winning the distribution. In step S2011, information on the stop mode of the pattern corresponding to the result of the allocation determination process being an outlier result is read, and the distribution display unit 42c is displayed so that the pattern according to the mode corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed. Control.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S2012). In the flag clear process, “0” is cleared for various flags used in the current game round and the current winning validity period. Also, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S2013). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  Here, if a result of divergence is found in the distribution determination process, the special figure change start process is executed without shifting to the distribution execution mode, but the game state shift process is not executed. Therefore, if a result of losing is determined in the allocation determination process, the game state transition corresponding to the winning result generated in the game round that is the trigger for the transition to the winning valid period of the current distribution through winning portion 35 is made. That is, there is no change in the combination of the winning probability in the success / failure determination process and the winning probability in the distribution determination process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the distribution end process in this embodiment. The distribution end process is executed in step S1222 in the distribution process (FIG. 23).

  In the distribution end process, when “1” is set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2101: YES), a stop result setting process when a V winning occurs is executed (step S2102). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the V winning determination display section corresponding to the fact that a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. The information on the stop mode of the pattern is information on the stop mode that is not selected in the stop result setting process when no V prize is generated in step S2108. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped while the pattern corresponding to the occurrence of the V winning is displayed in the current distribution execution mode in the V winning determination display section. Also, in step S2102, information on different stop modes is read depending on whether the current distribution execution mode is the first distribution execution mode or the second distribution execution mode. That is, the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the first distribution execution mode and the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball in the second distribution execution mode. The pattern stop mode when the display of the variation of the pattern in the winning determination display section is different is different. As a result, it is possible to grasp from the display mode of the V winning determination display section whether the subsequent opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in which distribution execution mode. . In addition, since the mode of the picture stopped and displayed in the V winning determination display section is maintained until the next variation display of the pattern in the V winning determination display section is started, the display is continued in the subsequent opening / closing execution mode. The Thus, by confirming the V winning determination display section at an arbitrary timing during the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to determine in which distribution execution mode the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V winning. It becomes possible to confirm.

  Thereafter, in steps S2103 to S2107, the same processing as that in steps S1307 to S1311 of the distribution end processing (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is executed. Thereby, it shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, if “1” is not set in the V winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2101: NO), a stop result setting process when no V winning is generated is executed (step S2108). In the stop result setting process, information on the pattern stop mode of the V winning determination display portion corresponding to the fact that no game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 is read out. Thereby, the variation display of the picture is stopped in a state where the picture corresponding to the fact that the V prize has not occurred in the current distribution execution mode is displayed on the V prize determination display unit. Regardless of whether or not the pattern is stopped and displayed in the V winning determination display section, whether or not it is in the game time execution period and the open / close execution mode, until the next variation display of the pattern in the V winning determination display section is started. Maintained. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the allocation execution mode that is not accompanied by the transition to the opening / closing execution mode ends or when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the display up to that point in the V winning determination display section It may be configured to be erased. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which nothing is displayed on the V winning determination display portion, or a display indicating that the state is not changing may be continued.

  Thereafter, a flag clear process is executed (step S2109). In the flag clear process, “0” is cleared for various flags used in the current game round, the current winning validity period, and the current distribution execution mode. Further, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is cleared to “0” (step S2110). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  Here, when the V winning is not generated in the distribution execution mode, the special figure change start process is executed without shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, but the game state shift process is not executed. Therefore, when no V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the game state transition corresponding to the winning result generated in the game round that has been the trigger for the transition to the current distribution execution mode, that is, the success / failure determination process. No change occurs in the combination of the winning probability and the winning probability of the distribution determination process.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in the present embodiment. Note that the game state transition process is executed in step S1702 in the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  In the game state transition process, when “1” is set in any of the first high-winning flag, the second high-winning flag, the third high-winning flag, and the fourth high-winning flag in the main RAM 94 (Step S2201: YES), among the first high-accuracy state flag, the second high-accuracy state flag, the third high-accuracy state flag, and the fourth high-accuracy state flag of the main side RAM 94, a high value in which “1” is set “1” is set to the high probability state flag corresponding to the winning flag (step S2202). As a result, the high-accuracy table groups 93c to 93f corresponding to the current high-accuracy hit result are referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. The state of the high probability state flag set here is maintained until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time.

  Thereafter, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2203). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. The state where “1” is set in the first high-frequency support flag is held until the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is executed next time. However, as in the first embodiment, if the winning through period winning portion 35 for allocation is one of the valid paying period, the allocation execution mode, and the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode until immediately before that. Regardless of whether it is set, the support mode is set to the low frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, a state transition command corresponding to the high-accuracy state flag for which “1” is set this time is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2204). When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the state transition command from the main side MPU 92, the sound light side ROM 104 stores the control table corresponding to the current state transition command in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). To the sound light side RAM 105. As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in a manner corresponding to the current highly accurate result, and the sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed in a manner corresponding to the current highly successful result. The sound light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the state transition command received this time to the display side MPU 113. When the display side MPU 113 receives the command, the display side MPU 113 reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the symbol display device 44 based on the table.

  The display content of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the gaming state in which the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the second high probability table group 93d will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. To do. As shown in FIG. 38A, the probability display area 151 is displayed on the symbol display device 44 in the situation where the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed. In the probability display area 151, a probability-corresponding image corresponding to the winning probability of the current determination process is displayed. In this case, the probability-corresponding image is displayed based on the winning probability of the success / failure determination process in the gaming state in which the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b. Specifically, when the second high-accuracy table group 93d is referred to, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/4, and when the low-accuracy table group 93b is referred to, the success / failure determination process is won. It is 10 times the 1/40 probability. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the second high probability table group 93d is referred to, a “10 times” image is displayed in the probability display area 151 as the probability corresponding image. On the other hand, the winning probability of the sorting determination process including the symbol display device 44 is not notified. This makes it possible for the player to predict the winning probability of the sorting determination process while clearly indicating the winning probability of the winner determination process to the player.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37), when “1” is set in the fifth highly-acceptable winning flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2205: YES), the fifth highly probable flag of the main RAM 94 is determined. Is set to “1” (step S2206). As a result, the fifth high-accuracy table group 93g is referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Similarly to step S2203, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2207). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Thereafter, the common transfer command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2208). The processing executed by the sound light side MPU 103 when the common transfer command is received will be described later.

  In the game state transition process, when “1” is not set in any of the first to fifth winning flags of the main side RAM 94 (step S2205: NO), the first to fifth high probability state flags of the main side RAM 94 are set. Is cleared to “0” (step S2209). As a result, the low probability table group 93b is referred to in the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process. Further, “1” is set to the second high-frequency support flag provided in the main RAM 94, and “100” is set to the end reference counter provided in the main RAM 94 (step S2210). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, the value of the end reference counter is decremented by 1 every time one game is consumed, and when the value of the end reference counter becomes “0”, the second high frequency support flag is cleared to “0”. As a result, when 100 game times have been consumed, the support mode shifts from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode. Thereafter, similar to step S2208, a common transfer command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2211).

  When the sound light side MPU 103 receives the common transfer command from the main side MPU 92, the sound table MPU 103 receives the control table corresponding to the common transfer command from the sound light side ROM 104 in the table setting process (step S501) of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 16). Read to the light side RAM 105. As a result, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 is executed in such a manner that the player cannot identify which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is the target of use. Sound output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed. Further, the sound light side MPU 103 transmits a command corresponding to the common transfer command to the display side MPU 113. When the display side MPU 113 receives the command, the display side MPU 113 reads the display pattern table corresponding to the command in step S702 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18), and executes display control of the symbol display device 44 based on the table.

  The display content of the symbol display device 44 corresponding to the gaming state in which the winning / failing determination process and the distribution determination process are executed using the low probability table group 93b or the fifth high probability table group 93g is shown in FIG. This will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram. As shown in FIG. 38B, a “normal” image is displayed as a probability-corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44. Further, since the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is set to the high-frequency support mode regardless of whether the result is the low probability result or the fifth result, the operation mode of the guidance unit 52 is determined. , The player cannot grasp which of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used. As a result, the player plays the game while predicting which one of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used.

  In particular, when the fifth high probability table group 93g is the target of use, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as that of the low probability table group 93b, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. It has become. That is, if the hit result is a hit / fail judgment process, the sorting execution mode is surely generated. Then, when “normal” is displayed as the probability-corresponding image in the probability display area 151 of the symbol display device 44, the player plays a game while expecting that the fifth high probability table group 93g is set. It will be.

  On the other hand, when 100 game times are consumed when the low probability result is achieved, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the low frequency support mode while the fifth high probability result is obtained. Even if 100 game times are consumed, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 is maintained in the high frequency support mode. Thus, immediately after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the player can predict which one of the low probability table group 93b and the fifth high probability table group 93g is to be used, and the opening / closing execution mode. When the game times are repeatedly executed without causing the shift to, it is possible to make the player recognize which table group is the use target.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may vary, and the probability that the winning of the transition to the distribution execution mode may be varied in the distribution determination process. . This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of each determination process. Further, both the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the winning determination is the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are the situations where the low probability table group 93b is used. There can be different probabilities. As a result, it is possible to create a situation where the execution modes of both the success / failure determination process and the allocation determination process are fluctuating at the same time. It is possible to make it different. Therefore, the equalization of the game is suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the case of the present embodiment, in order for the transition to the opening / closing execution mode to occur, it is necessary that at least the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the transition to the distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process. is there. Therefore, there are a plurality of lottery processes targeted by the player who expects the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability that the probability of winning in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process will affect the probability of switching to the opening / closing execution mode. . In this case, as described above, the low probability table group 93b is used for both the probability of the winning result in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. The probability can be different from the situation. As a result, it is possible to diversify the transition probability to the opening / closing execution mode as compared with the configuration in which only one of the probability of the success / failure determination process and the probability of the distribution determination process varies. In addition, even if the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition execution mode in the distribution determination process are not greatly changed, the probability of switching to the opening / closing execution mode is greatly changed. It becomes possible to make it.

  There are three or more types of probabilities that a winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and probabilities of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process. This makes it possible to diversify the probabilities of winning results in each determination process and also diversify the synthesis probabilities of these determination processes.

  When the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a manner corresponding to any of the high-reliability results, the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process are executed in a manner corresponding to the low-reliability result. The synthesis probability is higher than that. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving any one of the high probability results.

  Depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result, the combination type of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting modes of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process, and accordingly, it is possible to diversify the game.

  The synthesis probability is different depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result. As a result, it is possible to produce advantages and disadvantages even in a highly accurate result. Moreover, even if it is a case where any highly accurate result is triggered, the said synthetic | combination probability will be 1/20 or less which is an upper limit reference | standard probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

  There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the win determination process is lower than other high-winning results, but the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than other high-winning results. There is a high-winning result in which the winning probability of the sorting determination process is lower than other high-winning results, instead of the winning probability of the determination process being higher than the other high-winning results. As a result, it is possible to individually generate a situation in which the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is high and a situation in which the winning probability of the distribution determination process is high, and it is possible to diversify the objects whose advantages are increased. Become.

  Depending on the type of high-accuracy result, one of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than that of the low-accuracy result, and the other is the same as the case of the low-accuracy result. A situation occurs. As a result, it is possible to make the advantage the same as in the case of the low hit result while the other is extremely higher in the advantage than in the case of the low hit result and the other in the determination process and the allocation determination process, It is possible to add sharpness by the determination process and the determination process.

  Although the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is the same as in the case of the low probability winning result, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 100%. In this case, if the winning / notifying process results in a win / no-win determination process, if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the shift to the distribution execution mode is certain. Will occur. In this situation, as long as the winning determination process results in a winning result, the transition to the distribution execution mode is confirmed, so that the player's attention to the winning result in the winning determination process can be increased. It becomes possible.

  When the V winning is generated, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the selection to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process may be collectively changed. This makes it easy for the player to understand the timing at which each probability varies.

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing game state transition processing in the present embodiment. Note that the game state transition process is executed in step S1702 in the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  In the game state transition process, if the game result of the game times that occurred before the current open / close execution mode is a highly accurate result (step S2301: YES), the probability determination lottery process for the determination of success / failure is executed (step S2302). In the present embodiment, there is only one type of highly accurate hit result. In the probability determination lottery process, the winning probability of the determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the success / failure determination process which can be selected in the probability determination lottery process for the determination of success / failure.

  As the selection target winning probabilities in the success / failure determination process, 1/4, 1/5, 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, which are higher than the winning probabilities at the low probability, are set. The lottery probabilities of the selection target winning probabilities in the probability lottery process for determination of success / failure are all the same, and specifically, the probability that each selection target win probability is selected is 20%. In the probability determination lottery determination process, first, a probability determination random determination table is read from the main ROM 93, and then numerical information is acquired from a determination lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. Then, the obtained numerical information is collated against a probability lottery table for determination of success / failure.

  After executing the probability determination lottery process (step S2302), the selected winning probability is set to “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability selected in the probability lottery process. Is set as the winning probability of the determination processing (step S2303). Thus, until step S2303 is executed next time, in step S1904 of the special figure change start process (FIG. 33), the success / failure determination process is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the flag set to “1”.

  Thereafter, a probability determination lottery process for distribution determination is executed (step S2304). In the distribution determination probability lottery process, the winning determination probability of the distribution determination process is determined by lottery. FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the winning probability of the distribution determination process that can be selected in the distribution determination probability lottery process.

  1/5, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1 are set as selection target winning probabilities in the distribution determination process. All the selection target winning probabilities in the allocation determination probability lottery process are all the same. Specifically, the probability that each selection target winning probability is selected is 20%. In the probability determination lottery process for distribution determination, first, a probability determination lottery table for distribution determination is read from the main ROM 93, and then numerical information is obtained from a distribution lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. Then, the acquired numerical information is collated with a probability lottery table for distribution determination.

  After the distribution determination probability lottery process (step S2304) is executed, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process set in step S2303 and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2304 is calculated. Calculate (step S2305). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2306). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, and when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is predetermined. When 3/5, 4/5 or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is not less than the predetermined value. Further, for example, when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the above integration result is predetermined regardless of which winning probability is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process. Below the value.

  If the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2306: NO), a probability determination process for distribution determination is executed (step S2307). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a value lower than the winning probability of the currently selected allocation determination process and the second largest value of the winning probability is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2305 and step S2306 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2305 to step S2307 is repeated until the synthetic probability of the integration result becomes a predetermined value or less.

  If the integration result is less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2306: YES), the current state is selected by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determination process. The winning probability is set as the winning probability of the distribution determination process (step S2308). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2309). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. In addition, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2310). As a result, the winning probability of the determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected this time in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are notified.

  In the game state transition process, when the game result of the game times that occurred before the current open / close execution mode is a low probability result (step S2301: NO), the initial probability setting process of the success / failure determination is executed (step S2311). ). In the setting process, the main-side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a high-winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing. In addition, an initial probability setting process for the distribution determination is executed (step S2312). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability of the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S2210 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set in the second high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 and the end reference counter of the main RAM 94 is set. “100” is set (step S2313). Thereby, it becomes a high frequency support mode which made 100 game times an upper limit. Further, the low-accuracy transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2314). Thus, the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are informed that both the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest probabilities.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are determined in the individual lottery process. Selected. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the mode of combination of each probability.

  If the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the assignment determination mode is won in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is a predetermined value. In the distribution determination process, the probability of winning the transfer to the distribution execution mode is corrected as follows. With this, in the configuration in which each of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are selected in the individual lottery process. Their combined probabilities can be kept within a predetermined probability range.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configuration for setting the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is different from that of the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process in this embodiment. The special figure finalizing process is executed in step S307 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  When the final stop period has elapsed (step S2401: YES), and the game result of the current game round is an outlier result (step S2402: NO), the special figure special electricity counter value is cleared to “0”. (Step S2403). As a result, the value of the special figure special electricity counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure fluctuation start process (step S305).

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S2401: YES), and the game result of the current game round is a winning result (step S2402: YES), a variation display table for the distribution display unit 42c is displayed. After reading from the main ROM 93 to the main RAM 94 (step S2404), the distribution display unit 42c starts to display the variation of the picture (step S2405). Thereafter, the value of the special figure special electricity counter is incremented by 1 (step S2406). Thereafter, a distribution display start command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2407). The processing contents of these steps S2404 to S2407 are the same as the processing contents of steps S904 to S907 of the special figure finalizing process (FIG. 20) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, a first game state transition process is executed (step S2408). That is, the first game state transition process is executed when the game times that are the winning results are completed. In other words, the first game state transition process is executed regardless of the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 and the game contents in the distribution execution mode. As will be described later, in the first game state transition process, a process for changing the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is executed, but the first game state transition process is the game contents in the winning validity period and the allocation execution mode. By being executed independently, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process can be changed even if the shift to the sorting execution mode does not occur, and can be changed even if the shift to the opening / closing execution mode does not occur.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the first game state transition process. First, it is determined whether or not the result is a highly accurate hit result of the determination process (step S2501). In the present embodiment, in the same way as in the first embodiment, either the high probability result or the low probability result is selected in the type determination process that is executed when the hit result is a hit result. Even when a win result is obtained in the distribution determination process, either a high-winning result or a low-winning result is selected using a lottery counter and a lottery table that are different from the type determination process. That is, there are a high probability result and a low probability result of the success / failure determination process, and a high probability result and a low probability result of the distribution determination process.

  If the result is a high-accuracy hit result of the success / failure determination process (step S2501: YES), a probability lottery process for determination of the success / failure is executed (step S2502). In the probability determination lottery process for the success / failure determination, similarly to step S2302 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, the selection target winning probabilities of the determination process for the success / failure are set to 1/4 and 1/5. , 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, one winning probability is selected.

  Thereafter, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected in step S2502 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2503). Then, it is determined whether or not the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the determination process. In the case where 1/4, 1/5, or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the integration result does not become a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2504: NO), a probability correction process for determination of success / failure is executed (step S2505). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected winning / failing determination process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2503 and step S2504 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2503-step S2505 is repeated until the synthetic | combination probability of the said integration result becomes below a predetermined value. When the composite probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2504: YES), the current state is set by setting “1” to the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process. The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the determination process (step S2506).

  If the result is not a high-accuracy result of the determination process (step S2501: NO), an initial probability setting process for the determination is performed (step S2507). In the setting process, the main-side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a high-winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the second game state transition process. Note that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process in step S1702 of the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  If the result is a high probability result of the sorting determination process (step S2601: YES), a probability determination lottery process for sorting determination is executed (step S2602). In the probability determination lottery process for the distribution determination, 1/5, 2 set as the selection target winning probability of the distribution determination process, as in step S2304 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment. One winning probability is selected from / 5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1.

  Thereafter, the product of the current winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2602 is calculated (step S2603). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2604). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already described. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process. When 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result does not become a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2604: NO), a distribution correction probability correction process is executed (step S2605). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determining process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2603 and step S2604 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2603 to step S2605 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is less than or equal to a predetermined value (step S2604: YES), by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the win probability of the currently selected distribution determination process, The currently selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the sorting determination process (step S2606). Thereafter, similarly to steps S2203 and S2207 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set to the first high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 (step S2607). Thereby, the support mode of the guidance unit 52 becomes the high frequency support mode. Further, a state transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2608). As a result, the winning probability of the determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected this time in the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are notified.

  If it is not the high probability result of the allocation determination process (step S2601: NO), an initial probability setting process of the allocation determination is executed (step S2609). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability of the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process.

  Thereafter, similarly to step S2210 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 37) in the fourth embodiment, “1” is set in the second high frequency support flag of the main RAM 94 and the end reference counter of the main RAM 94 is set. “100” is set (step S2610). Thereby, it becomes a high frequency support mode which made 100 game times an upper limit. Further, the low-accuracy transition command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103 (step S2611). Thus, the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 are informed that both the winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process are the lowest probabilities.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the change in the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is performed in the distribution execution mode when the game times that are the winning results in the corresponding determination process are completed. It can be executed regardless of whether or not it is executed and whether or not a V prize is generated. On the other hand, the change of the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process can be executed when the opening / closing execution mode that has occurred due to the V winning is completed. That is, a situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process varies and a situation in which the probability of winning the transition execution mode in the distribution determination process varies individually. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

  In addition, when the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process or the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than the predetermined value. As a result, the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process varies and the situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process varies individually. However, it is possible to keep the composite probability within a predetermined probability range.

<Seventh Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the processing configurations of the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process are different from those of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixth embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the first game state transition process in the present embodiment. The first gaming state transition process is executed in step S2408 of the special figure determination process (FIG. 41) in the sixth embodiment.

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-accuracy continuation number counter for determining whether or not there is provided in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S2701). In the present embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment, when a winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process and a high-accuracy result is selected in the type determination process, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is higher than that in the normal gaming state. The situation continues thereafter until the first gaming state transition process occurs for a predetermined number of times. One, two, and three times are set as the number of continuations, and the number of continuations is determined by lottery. Even if the low probability result is selected by the type determination process in a situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability result. The high-accuracy continuation number counter for determining whether or not it is correct is a counter for specifying the continuation number by the main MPU 92.

  When the value of the high-accuracy continuation count counter for the determination is “0” (step S2701: YES), on the condition that the high-accuracy hit result is selected in the type determination process in the current game round (step S2702: YES), a lottery process for determining the number of times of success / failure determination is executed (step S2703). As already described, once, twice, and three times are set as the number of continuations of the situation where the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is higher than that in the normal gaming state. In the lottery process for determining the number of times of success / failure determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93, and numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. By collating with the lottery table, the number of continuation determinations is selected from 1, 2, and 3. Then, the selected number of times of success / failure determination is set in a high-accuracy continuation number counter for determination of success / failure (step S2704).

  Thereafter, a probability lottery process for determination of success / failure is executed (step S2705). In the probability determination lottery process for the success / failure determination, similarly to step S2302 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment, the selection target winning probabilities of the determination process for the success / failure are set to 1/4 and 1/5. , 1/8, 1/10, and 1/20, one winning probability is selected. These selection target winning probabilities are higher than the winning probabilities set in the case of a low probability result.

  Thereafter, the product of the winning probability of the success / failure determination process selected in step S2705 and the current winning probability of the distribution determination process is calculated (step S2706). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2707). The predetermined value is set to 1/10. Therefore, for example, when 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the integration result is a predetermined value when 1/10 or 1/20 is selected as the winning probability of the determination process. In the case where 1/4, 1/5, or 1/8 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the integration result does not become a predetermined value or less.

  If the integration probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2707: NO), a probability correction process for determining whether or not it is correct is executed (step S2708). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected winning / failing determination process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2706 and step S2707 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2706-step S2708 is repeated until the synthetic | combination probability of the said integration result becomes below a predetermined value. When the composite probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2707: YES), the current state is set by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the winning probability of the currently selected success / failure determination process. The selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the winning / failing determination process (step S2709).

  When the value of the high-accuracy continuation number counter for determination of success / failure is not “0” (step S2701: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation number counter for determination of success / failure (step S2710). If the value of the high-probability continuation count counter after the subtraction is not “0” (step S2711: NO), the processes of steps S2705 to S2709 already described are executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the winning / determining determination process is not fixed, but every time the winning result is determined in the winning / determining determination process, the winning / non-winning result is within a range higher than the normal gaming state. The winning probability of the determination process can vary.

  On the other hand, if the value of the high-accuracy continuation count counter for the determination of success after “1” is “0” (step S2711: YES), an initial probability setting process for the determination of success / failure is executed (step S2712). In the setting process, the main-side RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a winning probability lower than all the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a high-winning result is obtained. Execute flag setting processing.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the second game state transition process in the present embodiment. Note that the second game state transition process is executed instead of the game state transition process in step S1702 of the special electricity end process (FIG. 28).

  First, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-accuracy continuation counter for distribution determination provided in the main RAM 94 is “0” (step S2801). In the present embodiment, unlike the sixth embodiment described above, when the winning determination result is selected in the distribution determination process and the winning probability is selected in the distribution determination process, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than in the normal gaming state. However, it continues until the second gaming state transition process occurs for a predetermined number of times thereafter. As the number of continuations, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 are set, and the number of continuations is determined by lottery. Even if the low probability result is selected by the distribution determination process in a situation where the number of continuations is one or more, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is not set to the winning probability corresponding to the low probability result. The highly reliable continuation count counter for distribution determination is a counter for the main MPU 92 to specify the continuation count.

  When the value of the high-precision continuation count counter for the distribution determination is “0” (step S2801: YES), on the condition that the high-accuracy hit result is selected in the current distribution determination process (step S2802: YES). ), The distribution determination continuation number lottery process is executed (step S2803). As already described, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 are set as the number of continuations of the situation in which the winning probability of the distribution determination process is higher than the normal gaming state. In the lottery process for the number of times of continuation determination, the lottery table corresponding to the lottery process is read from the main ROM 93 and numerical information is acquired from a lottery counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 94. Is checked against the lottery table to select one, two, three, four, and five times for the distribution determination. Then, the selected number of continuations of the allocation determination is set in the highly accurate continuation count counter of the allocation determination (step S2804).

  Thereafter, a probability determination lottery process for distribution determination is executed (step S2805). In the probability determination lottery process for the distribution determination, 1/5, 2 set as the selection target winning probability of the distribution determination process, as in step S2304 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39) in the fifth embodiment. One winning probability is selected from / 5, 3/5, 4/5, and 1/1.

  Thereafter, the product of the current winning probability of the success / failure determination process and the winning probability of the distribution determination process selected in step S2805 is calculated (step S2806). And it is determined whether the synthetic | combination probability of the integration result is below a predetermined value (step S2807). The predetermined value is set to 1/10 as already described. Therefore, for example, when 1/4 is selected as the winning probability of the success / failure determination process, the combined probability of the integration result when 1/5 or 2/5 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process Is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and 3/5, 4/5, or 1/1 is selected as the winning probability of the distribution determination process, the combined probability of the integration result is not less than the predetermined value.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is not less than or equal to the predetermined value (step S2807: NO), a distribution correction probability correction process is executed (step S2808). In the probability correction process, a winning probability having a winning probability lower than the winning probability of the currently selected distribution determining process and the next largest value is set as a selection target. And the process of step S2806 and step S2808 is performed again about the winning probability, and the process of step S2806 to step S2808 is repeated until the combined probability of the integration result becomes a predetermined value or less.

  When the synthesis probability of the integration result is equal to or less than a predetermined value (step S2807: YES), by setting “1” in the flag of the main RAM 94 corresponding to the selection probability of the currently selected distribution determination process, The currently selected winning probability is set as the winning probability of the sorting determination process (step S2809).

  If the value of the high-accuracy continuation counter for distribution determination is not “0” (step S2801: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the high-probability continuation counter for distribution determination (step S2810). If the value of the high-probability continuation number counter after the subtraction is not “0” (step S2811: NO), the processes of steps S2805 to S2809 already described are executed. As a result, in the situation where the number of continuations is 1 or more, the winning probability of the sorting determination process is not fixed, but the winning probability of the sorting determination process may fluctuate every time a transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs. It will be.

  On the other hand, when the value of the highly accurate continuation count counter for the distribution determination after 1 subtraction is “0” (step S2811: YES), an initial probability setting process for the distribution determination is executed (step S2812). In the setting process, the flag of the main RAM 94 is set so that the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, which is the lowest winning probability of the selection target winning probabilities that can be selected when a highly accurate winning result is obtained. Execute the setting process.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process becomes higher than when the probability is low, the situation is generated in the success / failure determination process for the number of continuation results. Continue until. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of generating a highly accurate result of the success / failure determination process. In addition, there are a plurality of types of continuation times, and the continuation times are selected by lottery. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than when the probability is low continues.

  Even in a situation where the situation in which the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is higher than that at the low probability continues, the probability can vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the probability.

  In the distribution determination process, when the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode can be higher than when the probability is low, the situation continues until the opening / closing execution mode is generated for the number of continuous times. As a result, it is possible to increase the profit of generating a highly accurate result of the sorting determination process. In addition, there are a plurality of types of continuation times, and the continuation times are selected by lottery. As a result, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the situation in which the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process can be higher than when the probability is low is continued.

  Even in a situation where there is a situation where the probability of winning the transition to the sorting execution mode in the sorting determination process can continue to be higher than when the probability is low, the probability can vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of the probability.

  The continuation count for the success / failure determination process and the continuation count for the distribution determination process are individually determined, and the types of continuation counts that can be selected are also different. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

  In addition, when the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the combined probability is The probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process or the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so as to be equal to or less than the predetermined value. Accordingly, even if the continuation count for the success / failure determination process and the continuation count for the distribution determination process are individually determined and the types of continuation counts that can be selected are also different, It is possible to keep the composite probability of the above within a predetermined probability range.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In each of the above embodiments, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 of the distribution winning device 36, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs surely. However, in this embodiment, the V winning detection sensor Even if a game ball is detected at 69, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode may not occur. Further, in the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, even if a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. It may happen that no transition occurs. In addition, the probability of winning the shift to the distribution execution mode when the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs varies according to the gaming state. Hereinafter, a configuration different from the fourth embodiment will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourth embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the types of hit results in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of hit results in the present embodiment. As in the first embodiment, the winning result is selected in the type determination process (step S405) in the main MPU 92 by being the winning result in the determination process (step S403) in the main MPU 92. Although there are a plurality of types of winning results that are common to the start of the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35, the winning probability of the success / failure determination processing, the winning probability of the distribution determination processing, and the V winning This is an opportunity to change the combination type of the winning probabilities of the V winning lottery process executed when the event occurs. However, even if the type of winning result is selected in the type determination process, it corresponds to the selected winning result as long as there is no transition to the open / close execution mode triggered by the game time in which the type determination process is executed Each winning probability is not set.

  As in the case of the fourth embodiment, the hit results are assigned to the low hit results, the first high hit results, the second high hit results, the third high hit results, There are 4 high-accuracy results and 5th high-accuracy results. In the case of a low-winning result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/20, the winning probability of the allocation determination process is 1/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/4. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating the winning probabilities is 1/400. In the case of the first highly successful winning result, the winning probability of the winning / failing determination process is 1/4, the winning probability of the distribution determining process is 1/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the second high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the winner determination process is 1/8, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 2/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/2. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40. In the case of the third high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/10, the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 2/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fourth high-accuracy result, the winning probability of the winning / decision determination process is 1/20, the winning probability of the distribution determining process is 4/5, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/3. Become. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/65. In the case of the fifth high probability result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is 1/40, which is a lower probability than the case of the low probability result, and the winning probability of the distribution determination process is 1/1. Thus, the winning probability of the V winning lottery process is 1/1. In this case, the value of the combined probability obtained by integrating these winning probabilities is 1/40.

  Note that the probability that the first sorting execution mode is selected in the sorting determination process is fixed to 1/2 of the winning result in the sorting determination process, regardless of which winning result is selected. It has become.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the distribution processing in this embodiment. The distribution process is executed in step S310 in the special figure special electric control process (FIG. 14).

  In the distribution process, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 (step S2901: YES), a V winning lottery process is executed (step S2902). In the V winning lottery process, the V winning lottery table corresponding to the current lottery state is read from the main ROM 93, the numerical information of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 94 is read, and the read numerical information is read out. Is compared with the read lottery table for V winning. If the result of the V winning lottery process is V winning winning (step S2903: YES), “1” is set to the V winning flag in the main RAM 94 (step S2904). As a result, as in the first embodiment, when the current distribution execution mode ends, the mode changes to the opening / closing execution mode. In step S 2905, the V winning command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 103.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, a negative determination is made in step S2903, or if the processing in step S2905 is executed, other processing is executed (step S2906). In other processes, the processes of steps S1201 to S1205 and steps S1209 to S1222 of the distribution process (FIG. 23) in the first embodiment are executed.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, when the success / failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V winning lottery process are executed in a manner corresponding to any high-winning result, the low-winning result is supported. In this manner, the combination probability is higher than the case where the success / failure determination process, the distribution determination process, and the V winning lottery process are executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of achieving any one of the high probability results.

  Depending on the type of the high-accuracy winning result, the types of combinations of the winning probabilities in the success / failure determination process, the winning probabilities in the distribution determination process, and the winning probabilities in the V winning lottery process are different. As a result, it is possible to diversify the setting mode of the winning probability of the winning / failing determination process, the winning probability of the distribution determining process, and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process, and accordingly, the game can be diversified. Become.

  The synthesis probability is different depending on the type of the high-accuracy hit result. As a result, it is possible to produce advantages and disadvantages even in a highly accurate result. Moreover, even if it is a case where any highly accurate result is triggered, the said synthetic | combination probability will be below 1/40 which is an upper limit reference | standard probability. This makes it possible to prevent the advantage from becoming excessively high.

  In the fifth high-winning result, the winning probability of the success / failure determination process is lower than in the case of the low-winning result, but the winning probability of the sorting determination process and the winning probability of the V winning lottery process are 100%. In this case, if a winning result is obtained in the winning / deciding process, the shift to the distribution execution mode is performed when a winning to the distributing through winning unit 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning unit 35. In addition to surely occurring, when the V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode, the shift to the opening / closing execution mode occurs surely. In this situation, as long as a winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process, the transition to the opening / closing execution mode occurs with a high probability, so the player's attention to the winning result in the determination process is increased. It becomes possible.

<Ninth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the count number of each round game is different for each type of jackpot result. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

<Configuration of game board 210>
First, the configuration of the game board 210 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a front view of the game board 210 according to the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 48B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the variable winning device 222 provided in the game board 210.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), the game board 210 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening includes a general winning port 221, a variable winning device 222, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion) 223, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion) 224, a through gate 225, a variable display unit 226, A main display unit 233, an accessory display unit 234, and the like are provided.

  When a ball enters the general winning port 221, the variable winning device 222, the upper operating port 223, and the lower operating port 224, the various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a disposed on the back side of the game board 210 are generated. 224c is detected, and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 227 is provided at the bottom of the game board 210, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 227. In addition, in the game board 210, a number of nails 228 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball, and various members (functions) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Here, “entering” means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also a game area PA after passing through the opening. The aspect which is not discharged | emitted from is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 227, the game ball enters the variable winning device 222, the upper operating port 223, the lower operating port 224 or the through gate 225. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 223 and the lower operating port 224 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 210. Both the upper working port 223 and the lower working port 224 are opened upward. Further, the two operation ports 223 and 224 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the upper operation port 223 is located on the upper side. The lower working port 224 is provided with an electric accessory 224a as a guide piece (support piece) composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 224a is connected to an electric combination drive unit 224b mounted on the back side of the game board 210, and is driven by the electric combination drive unit 224b to be in a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) and It is arranged in either an open state (support state or guide state). In the closed state of the electric accessory 224a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 224, and when the electric accessory 224a is in the open state, it is possible to win the lower operation port 224.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and there is a motorized state in which a winning of a game ball to the lower operating port 224 is likely to occur and a state in which winning is difficult to occur than a state in which winning is not impossible but is likely to occur. It is good also as a structure by which the accessory 224a is switched. Further, the electric accessory 224a may be omitted, and switching between a state in which a winning is likely to occur and a state in which a winning is less likely to occur is performed by the displacement of the lower operation port 224 itself.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (b), the variable winning device 222 includes a large winning port 222a that leads to the back side of the game board 210, and an open / close door 222b that opens and closes the large winning port 222a. . The open / close door 222b is connected to a variable prize driving unit 222c provided integrally as the variable prize winning device 222 (the connection portion is not shown), and is driven by the variable prize driving unit 222c to be in a closed state and an open state. It is arranged in either. Specifically, the game ball is normally in a closed state in which it cannot win, and the game ball is switched to an open state in which it is easy to win when winning the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in the internal lottery. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later.

  Here, various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a rear view for explaining the various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a.

  As shown in FIG. 49, a collective board unit 229 is provided below the variable display unit 226 on the back surface of the game board 210. The collective board unit 229 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a winning detection mechanism for detecting winning of game balls in various winning ports, and the like. .

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective board unit 229 has a general winning port 221, a variable winning device 222, an upper operating port 223, and a lower operating port 224 corresponding to the game board openings and at one downstream position. A collecting passage 229a is formed. Accordingly, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 221 and the like gather below the game board 210 via the collection passage 229a. There is a discharge passage below the game board 210, and the game balls gathered below the game board 210 by the collection passage 229a are led out into the discharge passage. The out port 227 similarly leads to the discharge passage, and the game balls that have not won any of the winning ports 221, 222, 223, 224 are led out into the discharge passage through the out port 227.

  Explaining about the winning detection mechanism, the collective board unit 229 is provided with a winning mouth sensor 221a at a position corresponding to each of the general winning holes 221 on the front side of the game board 210. In addition, a count sensor 222d is provided at a position corresponding to the variable winning device 222, an upper operation opening sensor 223a is provided at a position corresponding to the upper operation opening 223, and a lower operation opening sensor 224c is provided at a position corresponding to the lower operation opening 224. Is provided. Further, a gate sensor 225 a that detects a game ball passing through the through gate 225 is provided on the right side of the variable display unit 226 outside the collective board unit 229. A winning of a game ball is detected by the sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a as these ball detection sensors (game medium detection means). These sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a output electrical signals to the main controller 260 described later. Specifically, an HI level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is detected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a LOW level signal is output when a game ball is not detected, and a HI level signal is output when a game ball is detected. It is good also as a structure which outputs an electrical signal only in the state which is detecting.

  In the main display unit 233 shown in FIG. 48 (a), the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224 as a trigger, and the upper operation port 223 or the lower The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning at the operation port 224 is clearly indicated by the display. In other words, in this pachinko machine 10, the winning to the upper working port 223 and the winning to the lower working port 224 are not distinguished in the internal lottery, and are performed based on the winning to the upper working port 223 or the lower working port 224. The result of the internal lottery is displayed on the main display unit 233 which is a common display area. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the main display unit 233. After the display and the change display are stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The main display unit 233 is configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. However, the main display unit 233 is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as CRT or a dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern that is variably displayed on the main display unit 233, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which multiple types of characters are variably displayed, or a plurality A configuration in which the color of the seed is switched and displayed can be considered.

  In the accessory display section 234, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 225 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 225 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. Explicit by display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 225 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state of the electric role, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 234 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 224a provided in the lower working port 224 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The variable display unit 226 is provided with a symbol display device 231 for variably displaying (or variable display or switching display) a symbol which is a kind of symbol, and a center frame 232 is provided so as to surround the symbol display device 231. Has been. The symbol display device 231 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device 300 described later. The symbol display device 231 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be another display device having a display screen G such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be a display.

  In the symbol display device 231, the variation display of symbols is started based on winning in the upper working port 223 or the lower working port 224. That is, when the variable display is performed on the main display unit 233, the variable display is performed on the symbol display device 231 accordingly.

  The display content of the symbol display device 231 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 50 and FIG. 50 is a diagram individually showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 231, and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 231.

  As shown in FIGS. 50 (a) to 50 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9", respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It consists of sub-designs. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 51A, on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  As shown in FIG. 51B, on the display screen G, 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5.

  When an effect for game times is performed on the display screen G based on the winning at the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled in a predetermined direction with periodicity. The variable display is started. Then, the display is switched from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally the game is used in a state where a predetermined symbol is statically displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The production of is ended.

  In addition, when the effect for game times ends, if the game times correspond to the occurrence of probability variation jackpot results A and B, which will be described later, the same odd number or the same effective line for any active line A combination of symbols with an even number is formed. In addition, in the case of game times corresponding to the occurrence of normal jackpot results A and B, which will be described later, a combination of symbols in which the same even number is attached to any active line is formed.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 231 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the variable symbol display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. In addition, the pattern variably displayed on the symbol display device 231 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only a numeral may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 48A, a first holding lamp portion 235 corresponding to the main display portion 233 and the symbol display device 231 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 232. The number of game balls won in the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224 is reserved up to a maximum of 4, and the reserved number is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 235 is turned on.

  In the upper right portion of the center frame 232, a second holding lamp portion 236 corresponding to the accessory display portion 234 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 225 is reserved up to four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp section 236 is turned on.

  An inner rail portion 241 and an outer rail portion 242 are attached to the game board 210, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 241 and the outer rail portion 242, and a game mounted below the game board 210. A game ball 160 launched from a ball launch mechanism (not shown) is guided to the upper part of the game area PA.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 260 includes a main control board 261 that controls the main game and a power failure monitoring board 265 that monitors the power source. The main control device 260 may be provided with a trace means for leaving a trace of its opening or a trace structure for leaving a trace of its release to a board box that accommodates the main control board 261 and the like. . As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 262 is mounted on the main control board 261. The MPU 262 includes a ROM 263 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 262 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 263 is executed. A RAM 264, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 263 and the RAM 264 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 262, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 260.

  The MPU 262 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power failure monitoring board 265 and a payout control device 270 provided in the main control device 260 are connected to the input side of the MPU 262. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 265 is connected to a power source having a function of supplying operating power and a launch control device 280, and the MPU 262 is supplied with power via the power failure monitoring board 265.

  Various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, 224c, and 225a are connected to the input side of the MPU 262. In the MPU 262, a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning portion is performed. Further, the MPU 262 executes various lotteries based on winnings in the upper working port 223 and the lower working port 224.

  A power failure monitoring board 265, a payout control device 270, and a sound emission control device 290 are connected to the output side of the MPU 262. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 270 based on a winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning part.

  Various commands such as a change command and a type command are output to the sound emission control device 290. Details of these various commands will be described later. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 290 is electrically connected to the main control device 260 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 262, a variable prize driving unit 222c that opens and closes the opening / closing door 222b of the variable prize winning device 222, an electric combination driving unit 224b that opens and closes the electric combination 224a of the lower working port 224, and a main display unit. 233, an accessory display unit 234, and various holding lamp units 235 and 236 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 261, and the MPU 262 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 262 performs drive control of the variable winning drive unit 222c so that the special winning opening 222a is opened and closed. In addition, when the electric combination 224a is won, the MPU 262 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 224b so that the electric combination 224a is opened and closed. Further, in each game round, the display control of the main display unit 233 is executed in the MPU 262. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not the electric accessory 224a is to be opened is clearly indicated, display control of the accessory display unit 234 is executed in the MPU 262. In addition, when a game ball wins the upper working port 223 and the lower working port 224, the MPU 262 executes display control of the various holding lamp units 235 and 236.

  The power failure monitoring board 265 relays between the main control board 261 and the power source and launch control device 280, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control device 280. The payout control device 270 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 271 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 260.

  The power source and launch control device 280 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game arcade or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 261, the payout control device 270, etc., and the generated operating power is supplied. Incidentally, the power supply and launch control device 280 is provided with a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor, and even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF, the power supply unit for power interruption Power for storing and holding is supplied to the RAM 264 of the control device 260. The power supply and launch control device 280 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launching mechanism 281. The game ball launching mechanism 281 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound emission control device 290 includes a sound emission control board 291 on which an MPU 292 is mounted. The MPU 292 includes a ROM 293 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 292 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 293 is executed. A RAM 294, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated.

  The MPU 292 drives and controls the display light emitting unit 73 and the speaker unit 74 based on the command received from the main control device 260. In addition, these commands are sent to the display control device 300 as they are or after analysis. Incidentally, the sound emission control device 290 is electrically connected to the display control device 300 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 300 includes a display control board 301 on which an MPU 302 that is an element in which a program ROM 303 and a work RAM 304 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 305, a character ROM 306, and a video RAM 307 are mounted. It has.

  The MPU 302 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 290 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 305 (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 305).

  The program ROM 303 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 302 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 304 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 302, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 305 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 231. Since the VDP 305 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 305 is to be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 305 adjusts the timings of the MPU 302, the video RAM 307, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 307 from the character ROM 306 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 231.

  The character ROM 306 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 231. The character ROM 306 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 307 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 231, and the display contents of the symbol display device 231 are changed based on rewriting the contents of the video RAM 307.

<Electric Configuration for Performing Various Lottery in MPU 262 of Main Controller 260>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 262 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, setting the display of the main display unit 233, setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 231, setting the display of the accessory display unit 234, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 231 change and change. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, and variation type counter for determining display duration in main display unit 233 and symbol display device 231 CS is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 224a of the lower operating port 224 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is a hold provided as an acquisition information storage means in the RAM 264 when a winning to the upper working port 223 or the lower working port 224 occurs. It is stored in the sphere storage area 264a.

  The holding ball storage area 264a includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4, and matches the winning history to the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224. The combination of numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2 and reach random number counter C3 is stored in one of the holding areas RE1 to RE4 as holding information.

  In this case, in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224 occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area. Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of RE2 → third reserved area RE3 → fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224 are stored and stored. In addition, the holding area RE includes a holding number storage area NA, in order to specify the number in which the winning history to the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224 is stored in the holding number storage area NA. Is stored.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each numerical information stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display on the main display unit 233. At the start of one game round Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 250 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 264c of the RAM 264 at the timing when the game ball 160 wins the through gate 225. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 224a to the open state based on the stored value of the electric agent release counter C4.

  Here, in this pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the electric accessory 224a are different from each other. Specifically, in the support mode, when compared with the game area PA in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner, the electric accessory 224a of the lower working port 224 is released per unit time. The low frequency support mode (or low frequency guide state) and the high frequency support mode (or high frequency guide state) are set so that the frequency of the state becomes relatively high and low.

  In the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 224a is in the open state when the electrified open state is elected is set more than in the low frequency support mode, and the opening time of one time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the electric accessory 224a occurs a plurality of times, the closed state from the end of one open state until the next open state is started The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time (i.e., the next time that the electric component opening lottery is performed after the first electric component opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode (that is, The display continuation time for one time in the accessory display unit 234) is set short.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be awarded to the lower operation port 224 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 223 than in the lower operating port 224. However, in the high frequency support mode, the lower operating port 224 is connected to the lower operating port 224. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 224, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, so that in the high-frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (for example, on the display part 234 for an accessory based on a winning to the through gate 225) that is secured after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed. In the configuration in which multiple types of variable display time) are prepared, the short support time is more easily selected in the high frequency support mode or the average secure time is shorter than in the low frequency support mode. May be. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the first electric character releasing lottery is shortened, The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased by applying any one condition or any combination of the conditions for shortening the average time of the reservation time and increasing the winning probability. .

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that one by one is added in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 264a of the RAM 264 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (a success / failure information group) in a success / failure table storage area as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 263. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 54, as the success / failure table, the success / failure table for low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) in FIG. 54 (a) and the success / failure table for high probability mode in FIG. 54 (b) (high Probability success / failure information group) is set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  Under the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the number of random numbers resulting in the jackpot result is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to in the lottery, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), there are 21 random number values resulting in the jackpot result. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot result in the situation of the high probability mode. If the probability of winning in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of random numbers resulting in the jackpot result are arbitrary, and the jackpot resulting in the jackpot result in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the random number counter C1 may be configured so that only a part is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot result in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  Also, in each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value that is a jackpot result, and the result of the loss does not trigger the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 264a of the RAM 264 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 263. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 54C, a normal jackpot result A, a normal jackpot result B, a probability variation jackpot result A, and a probability variation jackpot result B are set as distribution targets for the jackpot result. A jackpot type counter C2 is assigned to each jackpot result so as not to overlap each other.

  The contents of the various game results will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of various game results.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the game results set in the pachinko machine 10 are a normal jackpot result A, a normal jackpot result B, a probability variation jackpot result A, a probability variation jackpot result B, and a missed result.

  Among these game results, the various jackpot results are game results that are selected when the winner is selected in the winner / lottery, and the missed results are game results that are selected when the winner is not selected in the winner / receiver lottery. In addition, the various jackpot results are game results that are the triggers for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, unlike the losing results, but the transition mode is the case of the normal jackpot results A and B as shown in FIG. This is different from the cases of probability variation jackpot results A and B.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode set in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, a round number regulation mode that is executed with a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit is set as the opening / closing execution mode.

  The round game satisfies one of the following conditions: a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) has elapsed, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won a prize winning opening 222a. This is a game in which the state where the special winning opening 222a is opened until it is played.

  In the normal jackpot result A and the probability variation jackpot result A, a transition is made to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is played with 10 as the upper limit number, and in each round game, the big winning opening 222a is opened and closed once.

  In the normal jackpot result B and the probable jackpot result B, a transition is made to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit of 5 times, and in each round game, the big winning opening 222a is opened and closed once.

  Also, in the game times where the normal jackpot results are A and B, the combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 231, and in the game times where the probability change jackpot results are A and B, the combination of even symbols or odd symbols is displayed on the symbol display device 231. Is stopped. That is, when the combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 231, the type of jackpot result cannot be specified from the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 231.

  In the normal jackpot results A and B, after the round number regulation mode ends, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode in which 100 is the upper limit. As a result, the high frequency support mode is continued over 100 game times which is the end reference number, and when 100 game times are consumed, the low frequency support mode is entered. In addition, the winning / failing lottery mode is set to the low probability mode.

  In the probability variation jackpot results A and B, after the round number regulation mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode with no limit and the high frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the game results of the game times become normal jackpot results A and B.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 264a at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 223 or the lower operation port 224.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231, and the remaining combinations are displayed in that state. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. In the game times corresponding to the detachment result, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 263 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 262 determines the variation display time on the main display unit 233 and the symbol variation display time on the symbol display device 231. The variation type counter CS is updated in each of timer interrupt processing described later, and the value of the variation type counter CS is determined when the variation display is determined at the start of variation display on the main display unit 233 and at the beginning of symbol variation by the symbol display device 231. Is acquired.

<Various processes executed by main controller 260>
Next, timer interrupt processing and normal processing that are executed in order to advance the game in the MPU 262 in the main controller 260 will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 262 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 262 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S3001, reading processing of various winning detection sensors 221a, 222d, 223a, and 224c is executed. Specifically, when a winning is made to the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224, 1 is added to the counter for three prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The counter for three prize balls is for counting the number of times a three prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 270 to pay out three game balls should be output. It should be noted that since the winning to the upper operating port 223 and the winning to the lower operating port 224 can occur simultaneously within the range of one processing time of the timer interrupt processing, the process of adding 1 to the counter for three prize balls is performed. It can be done twice.

  In addition, when a winning is made to the general winning opening 221, 1 is added to the 10 winning ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264 b of the RAM 264. The 10-award ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10-award ball command to instruct the payout control device 270 to pay out 10 gaming balls should be output.

  Further, when a winning is made to the big winning opening 222a, 1 is added to the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The counter for 15 prize balls is for counting the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 15 game balls.

  After executing the process of step S3001, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S3002.

  In subsequent step S3003, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S3004, a through winning process is performed in accordance with winning through the through gate 225. In the through winning process, if the winning to the through gate 225 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area 264c is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). On the condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S3003 is stored in the electric utility reservation area 264c. In addition, display control of the second reserved lamp unit 236 is performed in order to light the second reserved lamp unit 236 corresponding to the number of stored items reserved.

  Thereafter, in step S3005 to step S3008, a winning process for the operation port is executed. In the winning process for the operating port, first, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not a winning has occurred for the upper operating port 223 or the lower operating port 224. If no winning has occurred, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, in step S3006, is the start hold storage number NA stored in the hold number storage area NA of the hold ball storage area 264a less than an upper limit (eg, “4”)? Determine whether or not. If the start pending storage number NA is the upper limit value, the timer interruption process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number NA is less than the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S3007.

  In step S3007, the start pending storage number NA is incremented by one. In subsequent step S3008, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S3003 is stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 264a as holding information. In this case, it is stored in the first reserved area among the empty reserved areas RE1 to RE4 of the reserved area RE, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the current start reserved memory number NA. Further, display control of the first hold lamp unit 235 is performed in order to turn on the first hold lamp unit 235 corresponding to the start hold storage number NA. After executing the process of step S3008, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S3101 to S3107 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S3109 and S3110 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S3101, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 270. In addition, when an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for opening / closing execution mode is set, the command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290.

  In the subsequent step S3102, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

  In subsequent step S3103, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In the game times control process, determination of success / failure and distribution determination are performed, and the symbol display setting of the symbol display device 231 and display control of the main display unit 233 are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S3104, game state transition processing is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a succeeding step S3105, a power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 224a provided in the lower operation port 224 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, the electronic combination release of whether or not to make the electric combination 224a open using the numerical information acquired from the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electronic combination holding area 264c of the RAM 264 is performed. A lottery is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 224a is executed. Moreover, display control of the display part 234 for an accessory is performed so that the lottery result of electric character opening lottery may be taught.

  Here, as already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 224a, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. Is called. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 224a is opened when the electric combination open state is won is set more than in the case of the low frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. In the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 224a occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the completion of one open state. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, even if the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode.

  In a succeeding step S3106, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, on the condition that the launch permission signal output from the power source and launch controller 280 is input based on the launch operation being performed, a predetermined launch period (for example, 0.6 sec. ), The solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 281 is excited once. Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PA.

  In a succeeding step S3107, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM 264. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 265 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 265 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 262, and is deleted in the next main processing.

  When the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in step S3108, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S3109, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S3110, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step 3107 that the power failure flag has been set, the power shutoff has occurred, and therefore, the power interruption process from step S3111 is executed. That is, in step S3111, the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S3112. After the access to the RAM 264 is prohibited in step S3113, the power supply is completely shut down and the process is performed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process executed in step S3103 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the game times control process, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. When in the opening / closing execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processing after step S3202, that is, the game turn start processing in steps S3203 to S3205 and the game turn progress processing in steps S3206 to S3209. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning to the operation ports 223 and 224 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the main display unit 233 is in a variable display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. If the main display unit 233 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S3203 to S3205. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S3203, the number-of-holds storage area NA, which is the number of pieces of hold information stored on hold, is referred to by referring to the number-of-holds storage area NA of the hold-ball storage area 264a. Determine whether. The case where the start hold storage number NA is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 264a. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number NA is not “0”, a data setting process is executed in step S3204.

  In the data setting process, first, the start pending storage number NA is decremented by one. Further, the data stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE in the holding ball storage area 264a is moved to the execution area AE. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the holding areas RE1 to RE4 of the holding area RE is executed.

  This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4 to the lower area side, and clears the data in the first reservation area RE1 and the second The data in each area is shifted such as the reserved area RE2 → the first reserved area RE1, the third reserved area RE3 → the second reserved area RE2, and the fourth reserved area RE4 → the third reserved area RE3.

  In the data setting process, a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 235 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds is executed.

  After executing the data setting process, the game start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S3205. Here, the variation start processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S3301, a success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the success / failure lottery mode is a high probability mode. In the case of the high probability mode, referring to the high probability mode success / failure table among the tables stored in the success / failure table storage area, the information for determining the success / failure among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the jackpot It is determined whether or not the numerical information related to the random number counter C1 matches the high probability jackpot numerical information. In the case of the low probability mode, the numerical information relating to the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with reference to the low probability mode determination table among the tables stored in the determination table storage area. Is matched with the jackpot numerical information for low probability.

  In the following step S3302, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination process in step S3301 is a jackpot winning result. If the result is a big win, the type determination process is executed in step S3303.

  In the type determination process, information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, numerical information related to the jackpot type counter C2 is grasped. Then, with reference to the distribution table in the ROM 263, it is specified which of the jackpot results corresponds to the numerical information related to the grasped jackpot type counter C2. Specifically, which jackpot result corresponds to the normal jackpot result A, the normal jackpot result B, the probability variation jackpot result A, and the probability variation jackpot result B is specified.

  In the subsequent step S3304, a stop result setting process for jackpot result is executed. Specifically, information on the pattern mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 in the game times related to the start of the change is specified from the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in the ROM 263 in advance, The specified information is stored in the RAM 264. In the jackpot result stop result table, the types of patterns that are stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 are set differently for each jackpot result type. In step S3304, the pattern is specified in step S3303. Information on the pattern mode according to the type of the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 264.

  In the subsequent step S3305, a process of setting a flag in the RAM 264 according to the type of jackpot result specified in step S3303 is executed. Specifically, the first normal jackpot flag is set when the normal jackpot result A is specified, and the second normal jackpot flag is set when the normal jackpot result B is specified. When the jackpot result A is specified, the first probability variable jackpot flag is set. When the jackpot result B is specified, the second probability variable jackpot flag is set. In the following description, whether or not the various jackpot results are determined is determined by determining whether or not a flag corresponding to the RAM 264 is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3302, a stop result setting process for an outlier is executed in step S3306. Specifically, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 in the game times related to the start of the current change is specified from the stop result table for the detachment result stored in the ROM 263 in advance. The specified information is stored in the RAM 264. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  When the process of step S3305 is executed, or when the process of step S3306 is executed, a variable display time (variable display period) setting process is executed in step S3307.

  In this process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired. In addition, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 231 in the current game round. Specifically, when the game times related to the start of the current variation is a jackpot result, it is determined that reach display occurs. Even if it is not a jackpot result, if the numerical information related to the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of reach, it is determined that reach display occurs.

  When it is determined that the reach display occurs, the fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach generation fluctuation display time table stored in the ROM 263, and the fluctuation The display time information is set in a display duration counter provided in various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach display does not occur, the variable display time information corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the reach non-occurrence variable display time table stored in the ROM 263. Then, the variable display time information is set in the display duration counter. Incidentally, the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the non-reach generation variable display time table is different from the variable display time that can be acquired with reference to the reach generation variable display time table.

  Note that the variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of start pending storage numbers NA increases. Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. The generation variation display time table is set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may be such that the variable display time does not fluctuate according to the start pending storage number NA or the support mode, and the above relationship may be reversed. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time when reach occurs. In addition, in the case of various jackpot results, the variable display time table may be set individually for each of the case of outreach and the case of a non-reach outbreak result. In this case, the variable display time is allocated according to each game result.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S3307, the variable command and type command are set in step S3308. The change command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the information on the occurrence of reach is not included in the command for use, the audio emission control device 290 as the sub-side control device can identify the presence or absence of the reach from the information on the variable display time. In this regard, it can be said that the change command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred.

  The type command includes game result information. In other words, the type command includes information on the normal jackpot result A, information on the normal jackpot result B, information on the probability variation jackpot result A, information on the probability variation jackpot result B, and information on the losing result as game result information.

  The variation command and type command set in step S3308 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received the change command and the type command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3401: YES), based on the content of the type command in step S3402, It is determined whether the game result of the game times started this time is the probability variation jackpot result A, the probability variation jackpot result B, the normal jackpot result A, or the normal jackpot result B.

  When the probability variation jackpot result A, the probability variation jackpot result B, the normal jackpot result A, or the normal jackpot result B is any one, the symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the jackpot result is executed in step S3403. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game results of the game times started this time are the probability variation jackpot results A and B, and the game results of the game times started this time are the probability variation jackpot results A and B In this case, it is determined by lottery which of the odd symbol combination and the even symbol combination is to be stopped.

  Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 when the game results of the game times started this time are probability variation jackpot results A and B and the stop result is an odd symbol Is determined as information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of odd symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In addition, when the game result of the game start started this time is usually a jackpot result A, B, or when the game result of the game start started this time is a probabilistic jackpot result A, B and the stop result is an even symbol, The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same combination of even symbols is established on the active lines L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of even symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3402, a removal symbol determination process is executed in step S3404. In the symbol determination process, based on the content of the change command, it is determined whether or not it is a game time related to occurrence of outlier reach display. Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of detachment symbols is established on the lines L1 to L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined.

  In addition, when it is not a game turn related to occurrence of outreach display, the same symbol combination is not stopped on any of the active lines L1 to L5, and the combination of outreach symbols is also stopped. Information corresponding to the stop result that is not displayed is determined as information of the current stop result.

  After executing one of steps S3403 and S3404, the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, a process for determining an effect pattern of the current game time is executed. In this case, by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 263, the effect continuation time (effect continuation period) corresponding to the change command and the type command received this time is selected, and the contents of the effect Select. The MPU 262 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 in the current game round and the output control of the speaker unit 74 according to the effect pattern determined in step S3405.

  In subsequent step S3406, a stop result command corresponding to the processing result in step S3403 or step S3404 and a pattern command corresponding to the processing result in step S3405 are transmitted to display control apparatus 300. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 302 of the display control device 300 reads a data table for performing the current game-playing effect on the symbol display device 231 from the program ROM 303, and follows the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 305 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). As a result, the symbol display device 231 executes the effect for the game turn according to the effect pattern determined by the MPU 292 of the sound emission control device 290, and the stop result determined by the MPU 292 is finally stopped and displayed. The

  Returning to the description of the variation start process (FIG. 59), after performing the process of step S3308, the main display unit 233 starts the variation display of the pattern in step S3309. Then, this variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 58), when the main display unit 233 is in the variable display mode, the game times progress process of steps S3206 to S3209 is executed.

  In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S3206, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the display duration counter of the RAM 264 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S3307). The set value of the variable display time information is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S3207. In the variable display process, the display mode in the main display unit 233 is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S3208. In the change end process, the information stored in the RAM 264 is specified in any of the processes in steps S3304 and S3306 of the change start process (FIG. 59) executed when starting the currently executed game round. The main display unit 233 is controlled to display the pattern mode corresponding to the above.

  Here, the mode of the pattern that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 is different for each game result. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can visually check the game result of the game round by visually checking the main display unit 233 at the end of the game round. For example, the pachinko machine 10 exhibits the same behavior as the jackpot result. It is possible to easily confirm whether or not an illegal act to be performed is performed. On the other hand, the display range of the main display unit 233 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 231. Furthermore, the mode of the picture that is stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 is difficult for the player to recognize. Yes. Therefore, the player is expected to check the game result of the game times not from the main display unit 233 but from the display screen G of the symbol display device 231, and the degree of attention to the display screen G is increased.

  Then, after setting the change end command in step S3209, the game times control process is ended. The change end command set in step S3209 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). The sound emission control device 290 executes a process for ending the effect in the game times based on receiving the change end command. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently in the audio | voice light emission control apparatus 290 or the display control apparatus 300, without transmitting a fluctuation | variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S3502, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S3503 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S3504 whether or not the current jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The first probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A in the MPU 262. As described above, the first probability variation jackpot flag is set when the type of the current jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A in the type determination process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, the count number distribution table A corresponding to the probability variation big hit result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3505. The count number distribution table A will be described later.

  In subsequent step S3506, “10” is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is obtained by referring to the count distribution table A. The value is set in a winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Specifically, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games to be executed within the range of one opening / closing execution mode by the MPU 262. The winning upper limit counter PC is a counter for the MPU 262 to specify the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a, which is one end condition of the round game.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3504, it is determined in step S3507 whether or not the current jackpot result is a probability variation jackpot result B. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The second probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B in the MPU 262. The second probability variation jackpot flag is set when the type of the current jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B in the type determination process as described above.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3507, the count number distribution table B corresponding to the probability variation big hit result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3508. The count number distribution table B will be described later.

  In subsequent step S3509, “5” is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is referred to the count number distribution table B. The value is set in a winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Specifically, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3507, it is determined in step S3510 whether the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The first normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A in the MPU 262. As described above, the first normal jackpot flag is set when the type of the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A in the type determination process.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, the count number distribution table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3511. The count number distribution table C will be described later.

  In subsequent step S3512, “10” is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is obtained by referring to the count number distribution table C. The value is set in a winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Specifically, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3510, the count number distribution table D corresponding to the normal jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 in step S3513. The count number distribution table D will be described later.

  In subsequent step S3514, “5” is set to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the count number corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is referred to the count number distribution table D. The value is set in a winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Specifically, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

  Here, the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D will be described with reference to FIG. The various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D are provided so that the number of rounds of the round game and the number of counts are in a one-to-one correspondence. The count number is an upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for describing various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D.

  As shown in FIG. 62, the distribution of count numbers differs according to the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D. Specifically, in the case of the count allocation table A, “5” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC in 1R, 2R, and 9R, “10” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC in 3R to 8R, and 10R “25” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

  In the case of the count distribution table B, “5” is set to the prize upper limit counter PC in 1R to 2R, “15” is set to the prize upper limit counter PC in 3R and 5R, and “10” is set to the prize upper limit counter PC in 4R. Is set.

  In the count distribution table C, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 1R to 2R, “10” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 3R to 9R, and “20” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 10R. Is set. In addition, the total number of counts of each round game is the same as the count number distribution table A.

  In the case of the count distribution table D, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 1R to 2R, “15” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 3R to 4R, and “10” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC in 5R. Is set. The total number of counts of each round game is the same as the count number distribution table B.

  When the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D are compared, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same. As described above, in the present embodiment, even symbols of probability variation jackpot results A and B may stop even symbols as the final stop symbols. Although it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result from the pattern displayed on the main display unit 233, the pattern displayed on the main display unit 233 is difficult to understand. It is difficult to identify the type of jackpot result from the design. Here, assuming that the value of the 1R winning upper limit counter PC in the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D is different, the type of the jackpot result is obtained by grasping the 1R count number. Can be identified. In this case, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game cannot be performed while expecting that the probabilistic jackpot results A and B are obtained. In this regard, according to this configuration, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same in the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D. As a result, even when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, it is possible to play a round game while expecting that the probable big hit results A and B will be obtained.

  Further, when the count distribution table A corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A is compared with the count distribution table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 8R is It is the same. Therefore, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, it cannot be specified whether the type of jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A or the regular jackpot result A until the 9th R is digested. As a result, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, a round game can be performed while expecting a long-term probable big hit result A.

  Further, the count number distribution table C is set to have a greater number of 9R counts than the count number distribution table A. Here, when the 9R count number is set to be greater in the count number distribution table A than in the count number distribution table C, the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A. Would give the player a sense of disappointment with respect to the decision made and a feeling of disappointment with respect to the small number of round games being counted. In this case, the player's irritation may be accumulated. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the count number distribution table C is set to have a greater number of counts for the 9th R than the count number distribution table A. As a result, even if the player is notified that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A, the number of round games increases, and the player's irritation can be suppressed.

  Also, since the player wants the jackpot result type to be a probabilistic jackpot result A rather than the normal jackpot result A, it is expected that the count number of the 9R will be “5” instead of “10”. To do. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect not only an increase in the number of round games but also a decrease in the number of round games.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result by specifying the round game count number, and thus it is possible to make the player pay attention to the round game count number.

  Further, when the numbers of round games having the same upper limit number are compared, the total number of counts of each round game is the same. Specifically, the total number of counts of each round game is the same in the probability variation jackpot result A and the normal jackpot result A, and the number of counts of each round game in the probability variation jackpot result B and the normal jackpot result B The total is the same. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to what the type of jackpot result is, without changing the profit given to the player.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 61), when the process of step S3506 is executed, when the process of step S3509 is executed, when the process of step S3512 is executed, or when the process of step S3514 is executed, In step S3515, “1000” is set as the opening standby time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In addition, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the waiting time for opening is set in step S3515 regardless of the type of game result that is the trigger. Therefore, the waiting time for opening in the opening / closing execution mode is the same regardless of the type of game result that has been triggered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the waiting time for the opening may be slightly different, but may be configured to be recognized as the same by the player.

  After executing the process of step S3515, after setting an opening command in step S3516, the gaming state transition process is terminated. The opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode. The opening command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received an opening command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3407: YES), the effect setting processing for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S3408. To do.

  In the setting process of the performance for the opening / closing execution mode, first, based on the information included in the opening command, the type of game result and the type of final stop symbol that triggered the transmission of the command are specified, and the jackpot result The process for determining the production contents in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of the final stop symbol and the type of the final stop symbol is executed. Specifically, when the normal jackpot results are A and B, and when the probability variation jackpot results A and B and the final stop symbol is an even symbol, the effect A is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the probability variation jackpot results A and B and the final stop symbol is an odd symbol, the effect B is selected as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode. The effect for the opening / closing execution mode is different between the effect A and the effect B.

  As described above, when the normal jackpot results are A and B, and when the probability variation jackpot results A and B and the final stop symbol is an even symbol, the effects in the opening / closing execution mode are common. That is, it cannot be specified from the effect A whether the type of the jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A, B or the normal jackpot result A, B. Therefore, when the effect A is performed, the player can play a game while expecting that the types of jackpot results are the probable jackpot results A and B.

  The MPU 292 of the sound emission control device 290 executes the light emission control of the display light emission unit 73 in the current opening / closing execution mode and the output control of the speaker unit 74 according to the effect pattern determined in step S3408.

  In subsequent step S3409, an open / close execution mode command corresponding to the processing result in step S3408 is transmitted to display control apparatus 300. Based on the received opening / closing execution mode command, the MPU 302 of the display control apparatus 300 reads a data table for performing the effect for the current opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 231 from the program ROM 303, and according to the data table. A drawing list is output to the VDP 305 every time a predetermined image update timing is reached (for example, at a cycle of 20 msec). Thereby, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed in accordance with the effect pattern determined by the MPU 292 of the sound emission control device 290.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 61), if it is determined in step S3501 that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed, the process proceeds to step S3517. In step S3517, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special winning opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 222a is being opened. If the big prize opening 222a is not open, it is determined in step S3602 whether or not the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the process of opening the special prize opening 222a, which will be described later, from being performed in a situation where there is no opportunity to open the special prize opening 222a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3602, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3602, it is determined in step S3603 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the process of opening the special prize opening 222a described later from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S3603, the main prize winning opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If the round counter RC is not “0” and the timer counter T is “0”, the big prize opening opening process is executed in step S3604. In the special winning opening opening process, “15000” is set in the timer counter T, and the variable winning driving section 222c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 222a is opened. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 30 sec after the timer counter T is set to “15000”.

  As described above, in the situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launching mechanism 281 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big prize opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big prize opening 222a, the proportion of game balls that have rolled around the big prize opening 222a won the prize money 222a. Is approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that about 25 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 30 seconds, which is the continuation opening time of the big prize opening 222a. As described above, the largest number of counts in this embodiment is “25”. Therefore, by setting 30 sec as the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a, it becomes possible to reach the upper limit of the count number set for each round game.

  Here, when it is set as the structure from which the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a differs according to the number of counts, there is a risk that the kind of jackpot result may be specified by grasping the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a. There is. In this regard, according to this configuration, the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is set to be the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the type of jackpot result from being specified by the opening duration time of the special winning opening 222a.

  In the subsequent step S3605, an open command is set. The release command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 receives an opening command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3410: YES), the display light emission corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 222a in step S3411. While performing the light emission control of the part 73, the output control of the speaker part 74 is performed.

  In subsequent step S3412, an opening command is transmitted to the display control device 300 in order to make the display control device 300 recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 222a has been started. The MPU 302 of the display control apparatus 300 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received release command. Thereby, on the display screen G, an effect corresponding to the opening of the special winning opening 222a is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 63), if it is determined in step S3601 that the special winning opening 222a is open, the process proceeds to step S3606. In step S3606, by determining whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”, the opening continuation time (about 30 sec) has elapsed for the current opening of the big prize opening 222a. Determine whether or not. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S3607.

  In step S3607, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize winning opening 222a. When the game ball has not won the big prize opening 222a, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3607, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1 in step S3608. In subsequent step S3609, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3606 or an affirmative determination is made in step S3609, a closing execution process is executed in step S3610. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning driving unit 222c is finished so that the special winning opening 222a is closed. In the subsequent step S3611, a close command is set. The close command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received a closing command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3413: YES), the display light emission corresponding to the closing of the special prize opening 222a in step S3414. While performing the light emission control of the part 73, the output control of the speaker part 74 is performed.

  In subsequent step S3415, a closing command is transmitted to the display control device 300 in order to make the display control device 300 recognize that the closing of the special winning opening 222a has started. The MPU 302 of the display control device 300 switches the range of pointer information to be referred to in the data table based on the received close command. As a result, an effect corresponding to the closing of the special winning opening 222a is displayed on the display screen G.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 63), after the process of step S3611, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1 in step S3612. In a succeeding step S3613, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”.

If a negative determination is made in step S3613, the count distribution tables A, B, C, and D read to the RAM 264 in step S3614 are referred to, and the count corresponding to the value of the round counter RC is determined in step S3615. The number is set in a winning upper limit counter PC provided in various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264.

  In subsequent step S3616, "500" is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is ended. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is numerical information for an opening waiting time until the variable winning device 222 is changed from the open state to the closed state and subsequently to the open state again. In the pachinko machine 10, the numerical information is 1 sec. Is set. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3613, "2000" is set as the ending waiting time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3617. That is, in this pachinko machine 10, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. However, the waiting time is arbitrary.

  In step S3618, an ending command is set. The ending command set in this process is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

  As shown in FIG. 60, when the sound emission control device 290 has received an ending command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 (step S3416: YES), the sound emission control device 290 executes ending correspondence processing in step S3417. In the ending correspondence process, first, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed, and the output control of the speaker unit 74 is executed.

  Next, the content of the result of the lottery determination included in the ending command received this time is specified, and the process for determining the content of the ending effect corresponding to the content of the result of the success / failure lottery is executed. Specifically, when the current game result is a normal jackpot result A or B, an effect including the content for causing the player to recognize that the low probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. Determine as. In addition, when the current game result is the probability variation jackpot result A or B, the effect including the content for causing the player to recognize that the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is determined as the current ending effect. .

  After executing the ending handling process, an ending command corresponding to the processing result of the ending handling process is transmitted to the display control apparatus 300 in step S3418. When the display control device 300 receives the ending command, the display control device 300 specifies the content of the result of the lottery included in the ending command and displays the ending effect corresponding to the content of the result of the lottery on the display screen G.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 61), after executing the process of step S3517, it is determined in step S3518 whether the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. judge. If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the value of the round counter RC is “0”, it is determined in step S3519 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the timer counter T is “0”, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S3520. In the transition processing at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the first probability variation jackpot flag or the second probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 264, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is frequently supported. Set to mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. When the first normal jackpot flag or the second normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 264, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  Thereafter, in step S3521, after executing the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the gaming state transition processing ends. In the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode, the stored flag among the first normal jackpot flag, the second normal jackpot flag, the first probability variation jackpot flag, and the second probability variation jackpot flag is erased.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, the distribution of the number of counts of each round game is different according to the type of jackpot result. Therefore, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result by specifying the count number of round games. With this configuration, it is possible for the player to focus on the count number of each round game.

  When various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D are compared, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same. As described above, in the present embodiment, even symbols of probability variation jackpot results A and B may stop even symbols as the final stop symbols. Although it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result from the pattern displayed on the main display unit 233, the pattern displayed on the main display unit 233 is difficult to understand. It is difficult to identify the type of jackpot result from the design. Here, assuming that the value of the 1R winning upper limit counter PC in the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D is different, the type of the jackpot result is obtained by grasping the 1R count number. Can be identified. In this case, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, the round game cannot be performed while expecting that the probabilistic jackpot results A and B are obtained. In this regard, according to this configuration, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same in the various count number distribution tables A, B, C, and D. As a result, even when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, it is possible to play a round game while expecting that the probable big hit results A and B will be obtained.

Further, when the count distribution table A corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A is compared with the count distribution table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A, the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 8R is It is the same. Therefore, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, it cannot be specified whether the type of jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A or the regular jackpot result A until the 9th R is digested. As a result, when an even-numbered symbol is stopped as the final stop symbol, a round game can be performed while expecting a long-term probable big hit result A.

  Further, the count number distribution table C is set to have a greater number of 9R counts than the count number distribution table A. Here, when the 9R count number is set to be greater in the count number distribution table A than in the count number distribution table C, the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A. Would give the player a sense of disappointment with respect to the decision made and a feeling of disappointment with respect to the small number of round games being counted. In this case, the player's irritation may be accumulated. In this regard, according to the present embodiment, the count number distribution table C is set to have a greater number of counts for the 9th R than the count number distribution table A. As a result, even if the player is notified that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result A, the number of round games increases, and the player's irritation can be suppressed.

  Also, since the player wants the jackpot result type to be a probabilistic jackpot result A rather than the normal jackpot result A, it is expected that the count number of the 9R will be “5” instead of “10”. To do. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to expect not only an increase in the number of round games but also a decrease in the number of round games.

  Further, when the numbers of round games having the same upper limit number are compared, the total number of counts of each round game is the same. Specifically, the total number of counts of each round game is the same in the probability variation jackpot result A and the normal jackpot result A, and the number of counts of each round game in the probability variation jackpot result B and the normal jackpot result B The total is the same. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to direct the player's consciousness to what the type of jackpot result is, without changing the profit given to the player.

  In addition, 30 sec is set as the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a. As described above, in the situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launching mechanism 281 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big prize opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big prize opening 222a, the proportion of game balls that have rolled around the big prize opening 222a won the prize money 222a. Is approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that about 25 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 30 seconds, which is the continuation opening time of the big prize opening 222a. As described above, the largest number of counts in this embodiment is “25”. Therefore, by setting 30 sec as the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a, it becomes possible to reach the upper limit of the count number set for each round game.

  Regardless of the type of the jackpot result, the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is set to be the same. Here, when it is set as the structure from which the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a differs according to the number of counts, there is a risk that the kind of jackpot result may be specified by grasping the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a. There is. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the opening duration time of the big prize opening 222a is set to be the same, it is possible to prevent the type of the jackpot result from being specified by the opening duration time of the big prize opening 222a. Is possible.

<Another example of the ninth embodiment>
(1) The count distribution table may be changed during the round game. In this case, it is good also as a structure where the round number extension lottery process for determining whether to extend the number of rounds during a round game is performed. When an extension win is made in the round number extension lottery process, the count number distribution table is changed. More specifically, when the probability variation big hit result B is an extension winning in the round number extension lottery process, the count number distribution table B is changed to the count number distribution table A. Further, in the case of the normal jackpot result B, if the winning number is extended in the count number extension lottery process, the count number distribution table D is changed to the count number distribution table C. According to this configuration, even if the number of rounds is extended, it is possible to set the extended number of counts using a preset count number distribution table.

  (2) Either 5R or 10R may be selected as the number of rounds in any jackpot result. In this case, each jackpot result may be provided with a count number distribution table corresponding to 5R and a count number distribution table corresponding to 10R. Further, the distribution of the count numbers in the count distribution table corresponding to 5R may be the same as the distribution of the count numbers 1R to 5R in the count distribution table corresponding to 10R. According to the said structure, since the count number of 1R-5R becomes the same in the upper limit of the number of rounds 5R and 10R, the upper limit of the number of rounds cannot be specified until the 5Rth is digested. This makes it possible to play a game while expecting the number of rounds to increase.

  (3) Each count number distribution table A, B, C, D is not limited to a configuration in which the value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R is the same. For example, each count number distribution table A value of the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of 1R to 2R in A, B, C, and D may be different. According to this configuration, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who wants to immediately grasp the type of jackpot result.

  (4) The count number of each round game may be displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, a display area for displaying the count number of each round game is provided at the lower center of the display screen G, and the count number of the round game is displayed at the start of each round game. According to this configuration, since it is possible to grasp the count number of each round game by visually recognizing the display area, it is not necessary to store the count number of each round game. Therefore, the burden on the player can be reduced.

  (5) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a is not different depending on the count number, for example, the configuration in which the opening continuation time of the big winning port 222a is different depending on the count number. It is good. In this case, by continuing to operate the launch handle 28 for the duration of the opening of the big prize opening 222a, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a reaches the respective counts so that the number of the prize winning holes 222a is reached. It is good also as a structure by which the open duration is set. Specifically, when the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “5”, 6 sec is set as the opening duration of the large winning opening 222a, and the winning upper limit counter PC is “10”. In this case, 12 seconds is set as the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a, and when the above-mentioned winning upper limit counter PC is “15”, 18 seconds is set as the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a, and the above-mentioned winning upper limit counter PC is “20”. "Is set to 24 seconds as the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a. When the winning upper limit counter PC is" 25 ", 30 seconds is set as the opening continuing time of the big winning opening 222a. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to win a game ball in the big prize opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a elapses.

<Tenth Embodiment>
The configuration for determining the count number of each round game is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Configuration for determining the number of counts>
In the present embodiment, the count number of each round game is determined using the cron 350. The clown 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 210 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 65 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the holes 351, 352, 353 on the croon 350, and FIG. b) is a longitudinal sectional view in which the crune 350 is cut in the longitudinal direction so that the three holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350 have a section.

  As shown in FIG. 64, a crune area 340 is provided in a lower frame of the center frame 232 so as to bulge to the player side with respect to the display screen G. The clown area 340 is provided with a croon 350 for determining the count number of each round game. The said croon 350 is disk shape with thickness. The cleon 350 is fixed to an output shaft of a rotary motor (not shown), and rotates at a constant speed in a constant direction around the axis while the rotary motor is in a driving state. For example, it rotates so as to make one round in 10 seconds clockwise. The rotary motor is in a driving state while operating power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. The reason for rotating the clown 350 will be described later.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65A, the clune 350 includes a first hole 351, a second hole 352, and a third hole 353. Each of the holes 351, 352, and 353 penetrates the croon 350 in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, when the game ball 160 falls into one of the holes 351, 352, 353, the count numbers corresponding to the dropped holes 351, 352, 353 are provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. The first hole 351 corresponds to the count number “5”, the second hole 352 corresponds to the count number “10”, and the third hole 353 corresponds to the count number “20”. doing. That is, when the game ball 160 falls into the first hole 351, the count number becomes “5”, and when the game ball 160 falls into the second hole 352, the count number becomes “10”. When it falls into the third hole 353, the count number is “20”. The count number represents the number of game balls 160 that can be won in the special winning opening 222a.

  Adjacent to each hole 351, 352, 353, numbers are marked to make it easier for the player to understand the count. Specifically, “5” is marked adjacent to the first hole 351, “10” is marked adjacent to the second hole 352, and “20” is marked adjacent to the third hole 353. It is marked. Moreover, the shape of each hole 351,352,353 is the same, the magnitude | size of each hole 351,352,353 is equal, and each hole 351,352,353 is provided at equal intervals. However, the number of each of the holes 351, 352, 353 is arbitrary. For example, the total number of the respective holes 351, 352, 353 is set to 4 or more, or the number of the first holes 351 is set to the second hole 352 and the second hole 352. It is good also as a structure which increases more than the 3 holes 353.

  The place where each of the holes 351, 352, 353 is provided is the lowest on the upper surface of the crew 350. In addition, the upper surface of the crune 350 is provided with a downward slope of the same angle toward the holes 351, 352, and 353. Therefore, the game ball 160 released to the croon 350 surely falls into any of the holes 351, 352, 353. As described above, the shapes of the holes 351, 352, and 353 are the same, and the sizes of the holes 351, 352, and 353 are equal, and are provided toward the holes 351, 352, and 353. Since the downward inclination angles are the same, the probability of falling into any one of the holes 351, 352, 353 is equal. Therefore, the probability of falling into the first hole 351, the probability of falling into the second hole 352, and the probability of falling into the third hole 353 are all about 33%. Further, even if the game ball 160 enters the holes 351, 352, 353, the game ball 160 is not paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), substantially flat sensors 351a, 352a, and 353a are provided in the middle of the holes 351, 352, and 353, respectively. Specifically, a first hole corresponding sensor 351a is provided in the middle of the first hole 351, a second hole corresponding sensor 352a is provided in the middle of the second hole 352, and the third hole 353 is provided. A third hole corresponding sensor 353a is provided in the middle.

  Each of the sensors 351a, 352a, and 353a is configured by a well-known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and a magnetic field generated by the game ball 160 passing through the through holes 351c, 352c, and 353c of the detection units 351b, 352b, and 353b. Is converted into an electrical signal and output. The sensors 351a, 352a, and 353a are not limited to magnetic detection type proximity sensors, and may be any as long as the game ball 160 can be detected. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor is used. Also good. The sensors 351a, 352a, 353a output an electrical signal to the main controller 260. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the game ball 160 is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when the game ball 160 is detected. The output level relationship may be reversed. The MPU 262 of the main control device 260 can identify the holes 351, 352, and 353 where the game ball 160 has dropped by identifying the sensors 351a, 352a, and 353a from which the HI level signal has been output.

  Next, a configuration for releasing the game ball 160 on the clown 350 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 64, a croon winning device 360 is provided at the upper right portion of the front side of the center frame 232 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 231. The Kroon winning device 360 includes a Kroon winning port 360a that leads to a transportation passage 370, which will be described later, and a Kroon winning port opening / closing door 360b that opens and closes the Kroon winning port 360a. The croon prize opening opening / closing door 360b is connected to a croon prize opening driving unit 360c mounted on the back side of the game board 210, and is driven by the croon prize opening driving unit 360c to be in a closed state or an open state. Placed in. In the closed state of the Kroon prize opening / closing door 360b, the game ball 160 cannot enter the Kroon prize opening 360a, and in the opened state of the Kroon prize opening / closing door 360b, the game ball 160 can enter the Kroon prize opening 360a. Become. In addition, even if the game ball 160 enters the prize winning port 360a, the game ball 160 is not paid out.

  The game ball 160 that has entered the Kroon winning opening 360a reaches a transportation passage 370 for releasing the game ball 160 to the Kroon 350. The transport passage 370 is provided from the clune winning opening 360 a toward the upper surface of the croon 350, and the width of the transport passage 370 is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball 160. As shown in FIG. 65 (a), guide rails 371 for preventing the game ball 160 from falling are provided on the left and right sides of the transport passage 370. The height of the guide rail 371 is approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball 160. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball 160 from dropping from the transport passage 370 when passing through the transport passage 370. In addition, a discharge port 372 for discharging the game ball 160 onto the croon 350 is formed in the most downstream portion of the transport passage 370. The discharge port 372 is provided at a position higher than the upper surface on the cruiser 350 and at a position where the game ball 160 falls on the outer peripheral side of the cruiser 350. Therefore, the game ball 160 released onto the crune 350 does not fall directly into the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the crune 350.

  Here, the reason for rotating the cron 350 will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, when the game ball 160 falls into any of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350, the count number corresponding to the dropped holes 351, 352, 353 is obtained. Is set. In this case, if the crune 350 is not rotated, the position of the game ball 160 released onto the crune 350 is the same every time, so that the game ball 160 falls into the same hole 351, 352, 353 every time. . In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the clune 350 is rotating, there is a low possibility that the position of the game ball 160 released to the crune 350 is the same every time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball 160 released on the croon 350 from falling into the same hole 351, 352, 353 every time.

  The game balls 160 that have fallen into the respective holes 351, 352, and 353 are gathered below the game board 210 via the collection passage 229a shown in FIG. As described above, there is a discharge passage below the game board 210, and the game balls 160 gathered below the game board 210 are led out into the discharge passage via the collection passage 229a.

  Next, the configuration around the Kroon 350 will be described.

  First, the clown region 340 is provided with the clune 350 and a discharge port 372 provided at the most downstream portion of the transport passage 370. The croon area 340 is sealed from above the croon 350 and the discharge port 372 provided in the croon area 340 by a crean area cover (not shown). The croon area cover has a box shape opened downward, and has a size sufficient to seal the clown area 340. According to this configuration, since the cruising area 340 is sealed by the not-illustrated cruising area cover, the game ball 160 flowing down the gaming area PA is not released to the cruising area 340. The crune area 340 is sealed with a clown area cover (not shown). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a gap to the extent that the game ball 160 does not enter the crune area 340 is formed in the clune area cover. An open configuration may also be used.

  The clown area cover is screwed to the clown area 340 from above the pachinko machine 10. Such screwing is performed so as to be detachable using a fixing tool. FIG. 64 shows a state in which the clown area cover is removed.

  In addition, the center frame 232 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 231 is not provided with an entrance for allowing the clown 350 to release the game ball 160 other than the clune winning opening 360a. Therefore, the game ball 160 flowing down the game area PA is not released onto the cron 350 except from the cron prize winning opening 360a.

  In addition, a croon 350 is provided in the center of the croon area 340, and a discharge port 372 of the transport passage 370 is provided on the right side of the center of the croon area 340. Here, the clune area cover is formed of a transparent or translucent material. Therefore, the state in which the game ball 160 is discharged from the discharge port 372 through the clown area cover onto the crune 350 and the state in which the game ball 160 falls in the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the crune 350 are visually recognized. It becomes possible.

  According to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes the cron 350, and by using the cron 350 to perform lottery of the count number of each round game, physically perform the lottery of the count number of each round game. Making it possible. Further, since the player can directly look at the Kroon 350, it is possible to make the player know that the lottery is performed unintentionally and fairly.

  In addition, since the number of round games is determined by physical lottery, when the highest number of counts is selected, the player will be satisfied with the ability to grab the highest number of counts. It can be given to the player. Also, even if the smallest count number is selected, the player can be made to think that the reason why the smallest count number is selected, so that even if the smallest count number is selected, it should be convinced. Is possible.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 of the normal process (FIG. 57) in the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the Kroon winning opening closing flag is set in the RAM 264. Although the details of the Kroon winning opening closing flag will be described later, the MPU 262 specifies that the Kroon winning opening 360a is closed during the execution period of the process for determining the count number of round games. Flag.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3701, it is determined in step S3702 whether or not the Kroon winning opening release flag is set in the RAM 264. The Kroon winning port opening flag is a flag for the MPU 262 to specify that the Kroon winning port 360a is in an open state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3702, it is determined in step S3703 whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S3704, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S3705 whether or not the game result of the currently completed game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.
The game results set in this embodiment are a normal jackpot result and a probable change jackpot result. The various jackpot results are game results that are selected when the winning lottery is won.

  In the normal jackpot result and the probable change jackpot result, a transition is made to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the maximum number of times being 10 times, and in each round game, the big prize opening 222a is opened and closed once. Further, in the game times that normally result in jackpot results, the combination of even symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 231, and in the game times that result in probability variation jackpot results, the combination of odd symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 231.

  When the type of jackpot result is the normal jackpot result in the type determination process of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59), the normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  When the type of jackpot result is the probability change jackpot result in the type determination process of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59), the probability change jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the current jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  In step S3705, it is determined whether one of the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. If a negative determination is made in step S3705, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3705, “1000” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3706, and “round” RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set to “ 10 ”is set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is decremented by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 2 sec after the timer counter T is set to “1000”.

  In subsequent step S3707, a Kroon winning opening releasing process is executed. In the Kroon winning opening opening process, the Kroon winning opening driving unit 360c is driven and controlled so that the Kroon winning opening 360a is opened. Thereby, the Kroon winning opening 360a shifts from the closed state to the open state. In step S3708, a clone winning opening release flag is set in the RAM 264. The Kroon prize opening release flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the Kroon prize opening 360a is in an open state, as described above.

  In step S3709, a Kroon winning opening release command is set. The Kroon winning opening release command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). When the voice light emission control device 290 receives the Kroon prize opening opening command, the sound emission control device 290 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the opening of the Kroon prize opening 360a and the output control of the speaker unit 74. In addition, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the above Kroon winning port opening command to the display control device 300 as it is. When the display control device 300 receives the above-described Kroon prize opening opening command, the display screen G displays an effect (for example, “Aim at the Kroon prize opening 360a!”) That informs the player that the Kroon prize opening 360a is aimed. Display.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, or if the process of step S3709 is executed, it is determined in step S3710 whether or not the timer counter T is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3710, "3000" is set in the timer counter T in step S3711. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 6 sec after the timer counter T is set to “3000”. The value of the timer counter T is set assuming the longest time from when the game ball 160 enters the Kroon winning opening 360a until it falls into one of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the Kroon 350. Is. Therefore, the game ball 160 that has entered the Kroon winning opening 360a always falls into one of the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the Kroon 350 within 6 seconds.

  In subsequent step S3712, a Kroon winning opening closing process is executed. In the cruising winning port closing process, the driving control of the cruising winning port driving unit 360c is terminated so that the cruising winning port 360a is closed. According to this configuration, when the value of the timer counter T set in the process of step S3706 becomes “0”, the clune winning opening 360a is changed from the open state to the closed state. That is, the opening duration of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to 2 sec.

  Here, in the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 281 so that one game ball 160 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. Further, in the positional relationship between the Kroon winning port 360a and the nail 228 planted around the Kroon winning port 360a, the proportion of the game balls 160 that have rolled around the Kroon winning port 360a enter the Kroon winning port 360a Is approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that approximately one game ball 160 enters the Kroon winning opening 360a for 2 sec when the Kroon winning opening 360a is opened. Here, if the opening continuation time of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to be shorter than 2 sec, there is a high probability that no game ball 160 will enter the Kroon winning opening 360a. In this case, annoyance that the game ball 160 does not enter the Kroon winning opening 360a is accumulated. In addition, when the opening duration of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to be longer than 2 sec, there is a possibility that the number of game balls 160 entering the Kroon winning opening 360a becomes too large. Since the present embodiment is configured to set the count number corresponding to the holes 351, 352, and 353 that have dropped first, it is meaningless even if a plurality of game balls 160 enter the crone winning opening 360a. In a situation where a plurality of game balls 160 enter the Kroon winning opening 360a, after the game balls 160 fall into the first hole 351 corresponding to the count number “5”, the other game balls 160 have the count number “20”. Even if it falls into the third hole 353 corresponding to “5”, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. In this case, the player feels regrettable. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the opening duration of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to 2 sec, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball 160 from entering or not entering the Kroon winning opening 360a. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the player's irritation from being accumulated.

  When the process of step S3712 is executed, the cruising winning opening release flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in step S3713. In a succeeding step S3714, a Kroon winning opening closing flag is set in the RAM 264. The Kroon winning port closing flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the Kroon winning port 360a is closed in the execution period of the process for determining the count number of round games as described above. is there.

  In step S3715, a Kroon winning opening closing command is set. The Kroon winning port closing command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). When the sound emission control device 290 receives the Kroon prize opening closing command, the sound emission control apparatus 290 executes the light emission control of the display light emission unit 73 corresponding to the closing of the Kroon prize opening 360a and the output control of the speaker unit 74. In addition, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the above Kroon winning port closing command to the display control device 300 as it is. When the display control device 300 receives the Kroon winning port closing command, the display control device 300 causes the display screen G to display an effect of staring at the Kroon 350 (for example, “focus on Kroon 350!”).

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, or if the process of step S3715 is executed, a count number specifying process is executed in step S3716. The count number specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The count number specifying process is a process performed to specify the count number of each round game using the Kroon 350. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the count number specifying process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S3801, it is determined in step S3802 whether or not an HI level signal has been received from the first hole corresponding sensor 351a corresponding to the value of the winning upper limit counter PC “5”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3802, "5" is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3803. As a result, the round game count is “5”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3802, it is determined in step S3804 whether an HI level signal is received from the second hole corresponding sensor 352a corresponding to the value of the winning upper limit counter PC corresponding to “10”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3804, "10" is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3805. As a result, the round game count is “10”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3804, it is determined in step S3806 whether an HI level signal is received from the third hole corresponding sensor 353a corresponding to the value of the winning upper limit counter PC corresponding to “20”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3806, “20” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3807. Thereby, the count number of round games becomes “20”.

  On the other hand, if the timer counter T is “0” (step S3801: YES), “2” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3808. Thereby, the count number of round games becomes “2”. The situation in which an affirmative determination is made in step 3801 is a situation in which approximately 6 seconds have elapsed since the Kroon winning opening 360a is closed. As described above, the game ball 160 that has entered the Kroon winning opening 360a is configured to surely fall into one of the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the Kroon 350 within 6 seconds. That is, when the game ball 160 does not enter the Kroon winning opening 360a, “2” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. The count number set in step S3808 is smaller than the count number set when the game ball 160 falls into any of the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the croon 350. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to drop the game ball 160 into any of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player to a lottery for determining the number of counts using the Kroon 350.

  When the process of step S3803 is executed, when the process of step S3805 is executed, when the process of step S3807 is executed, or when the process of step S3808 is executed, a count number specifying command is set in step S3809. The count number specifying command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). When the sound emission control device 290 receives the count number specifying command, the sound emission control device 290 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 and the output control of the speaker unit 74 when the count number is determined. Further, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the count number specifying command to the display control device 300 as it is. When receiving the count number specifying command, the display control device 300 displays the determined count number on the display screen G.

  In the following step S3810, the Kroon winning port closing flag provided in the RAM 264 is erased, and this count number specifying process is ended. By executing the process, a negative determination is made in step S3701 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 66). As a result, it is possible to prevent the count number specifying process from being performed again when the count number corresponding to the winning upper limit counter PC is set.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 66), when an affirmative determination is made in step S3703, a big prize opening opening / closing process is executed in step S3717. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, the processing in steps S3901 to S3911 is the same as the processing in steps S3601 to S3611.

  After executing the process of step S3911, 1 is subtracted from the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3912. In a succeeding step S3913, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3913, “1000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S3914. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is decremented by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 2 sec after the timer counter T is set to “1000”.

  In subsequent step S3915, a Kroon winning opening releasing process is executed. In the Kroon winning opening opening process, the Kroon winning opening driving unit 360c is driven and controlled so that the Kroon winning opening 360a is opened.

  In step S3916, a Kroon winning opening release flag is set in the RAM 264. The Kroon prize opening release flag is a flag for specifying in the MPU 262 that the Kroon prize opening 360a is in an open state, as described above. When this process is executed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3702 of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 66), so that the count number specifying process can be executed again. According to this embodiment, the count number specifying process for specifying the count number of the next round game is performed every time each round game ends. The count number set in the count number specifying process is the number of game balls 160 that can be won in the big prize opening 222a. Here, for example, in the count number specifying process before the start of 1R, when the count number of each round game is all determined, the period during which the player's consciousness is directed to the count number specifying process is shortened. . Furthermore, if a small number of counts is selected in the count number specifying process before the start of 1R, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the count number specifying process is performed every time a round game is finished, so that it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's consciousness is directed to the count number specifying process. Become. Furthermore, even if a small count number is selected in one count number specifying process, it can be expected that a large count number is selected in the next count number specifying process.

  After executing the process of step S3916, a cruising winning opening release command is set in step S3917. The Kroon winning opening release command set here is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). When the voice light emission control device 290 receives the Kroon prize opening opening command, the sound emission control device 290 executes the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 73 corresponding to the opening of the Kroon prize opening 360a and the output control of the speaker unit 74. In addition, the sound emission control device 290 transmits the above Kroon winning port opening command to the display control device 300 as it is. When the display control device 300 receives the above-described Kroon prize opening opening command, the display screen G displays an effect (for example, “Aim at the Kroon prize opening 360a!”) That informs the player that the Kroon prize opening 360a is aimed. Display.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3913, processing in steps S3918 to S3919 is executed. The processing from Step S3918 to Step S3919 is the same as the processing from Step S3617 to Step S3618.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 66), after executing the process of step S3717, the processes of step S3718 to step S3721 are executed. The processing in steps S3718 to S3721 is the same as the processing in steps S3518 to S3521. In the present embodiment, only two types of jackpot results are provided: a normal jackpot result and a probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S3721, the normal jackpot result set in the RAM 264 is set. Of the jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag, the stored flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result. The probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes the cron 350, and by using the cron 350 to perform lottery of the count number of each round game, physically perform the lottery of the count number of each round game. Making it possible. Further, since the player can directly look at the Kroon 350, it is possible to make the player know that the lottery is performed unintentionally and fairly.

  In addition, since the number of round games is determined by physical lottery, when the highest number of counts is selected, the player will be satisfied with the ability to grab the highest number of counts. It can be given to the player. Also, even if the smallest count number is selected, the player can be made to think that the reason why the smallest count number is selected, so that even if the smallest count number is selected, it should be convinced. Is possible.

  The opening duration of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to 2 sec. In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 281 is driven and controlled so that one game ball 160 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. Further, in the positional relationship between the Kroon winning port 360a and the nail 228 planted around the Kroon winning port 360a, the proportion of the game balls 160 that have rolled around the Kroon winning port 360a enter the Kroon winning port 360a Is approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that approximately one game ball 160 enters the Kroon winning opening 360a for 2 sec when the Kroon winning opening 360a is opened. Here, if the opening continuation time of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to be shorter than 2 sec, there is a high probability that no game ball 160 will enter the Kroon winning opening 360a. In this case, annoyance that the game ball 160 does not enter the Kroon winning opening 360a is accumulated. In addition, when the opening duration of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to be longer than 2 sec, there is a possibility that the number of game balls 160 entering the Kroon winning opening 360a becomes too large. Since the present embodiment is configured to set the count number corresponding to the holes 351, 352, and 353 that have dropped first, it is meaningless even if a plurality of game balls 160 enter the crone winning opening 360a. In a situation where a plurality of game balls 160 enter the Kroon winning opening 360a, after the game balls 160 fall into the first hole 351 corresponding to the count number “5”, the other game balls 160 have the count number “20”. Even if it falls into the third hole 353 corresponding to “5”, “5” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. In this case, the player feels regrettable. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the opening duration of the Kroon winning opening 360a is set to 2 sec, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball 160 from entering or not entering the Kroon winning opening 360a. It becomes possible. This makes it possible to prevent the player's irritation from being accumulated.

  Further, when the opening continuation time of the Kroon winning opening 360a elapses, “3000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The value of the timer counter T is set assuming the longest time from when the game ball 160 enters the Kroon winning opening 360a until it falls into the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the Kroon 350. . Therefore, the game ball 160 can be reliably dropped into the holes 351, 352, and 353 provided on the croon 350 within 6 seconds after entering the croon winning opening 360a.

  In addition, a count number specifying process for specifying the count number of the next round game is performed every time each round game ends. The count number set in the count number specifying process is the number of game balls 160 that can be won in the big prize opening 222a. Here, for example, in the count number specifying process before the start of 1R, when the count number of each round game is all determined, the period during which the player's consciousness is directed to the count number specifying process is shortened. . Furthermore, if a small number of counts is selected in the count number specifying process before the start of 1R, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the count number specifying process is performed every time a round game is finished, so that it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's consciousness is directed to the count number specifying process. Become. Furthermore, even if a small count number is selected in one count number specifying process, it can be expected that a large count number is selected in the next count number specifying process.

  When the game ball 160 does not enter the Kroon winning opening 360a, “2” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the RAM 264. The count number is smaller than the count number set when the game ball 160 falls into any of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to drop the game ball 160 into any of the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player to a lottery for determining the number of counts using the Kroon 350.

<Another example of the tenth embodiment>
(1) In a situation where the grand prize winning opening 222a is in a closed state, when a plurality of game balls 160 are released onto the croon 350, and the plurality of game balls 160 drop into different holes 351, 352, 353, they are dropped. It is good also as a structure by which the largest count number is set in the hole 351,352,353. Specifically, in a situation where the special prize opening 222a is in a closed state, when receiving HI level signals from a plurality of sensors, information on the number of counts corresponding to the sensors is stored in the register of the MPU 262. Then, when the situation where the special winning opening 222a is closed is completed, the largest number of counts stored in the register is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. When the count number information is not stored in the register, the smallest count number is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. At the timing when the count number is set in the winning upper limit counter PC, the flag after closing the clown set in the RAM 264 is erased. By adopting such a configuration, it is meaningless that the game ball 160 has fallen into the hole 353 corresponding to the largest count number among the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the croon 350. It becomes possible to prevent this.

  (2) The configuration for determining the count number of round games is not limited to the croon 350. For example, the count number of round games is determined by passing through a through gate 225 provided on the right side of the variable display unit 226. The lottery process may be performed. Further, in this configuration, the ROM 263 may have a count number table in which the total number of game balls 160 that have passed through the through gate 225 and the count number of round games have a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, the total number of game balls 160 that have passed through the through gate 225 is grasped in a situation where the special winning opening 222a is closed. With reference to the count number table, the count number of the round game corresponding to the total number of the game balls 160 is specified. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect the game ball 160 to pass through the through gate 225 in a situation where the special winning opening 222a is closed. Further, in this configuration, the number of round games may be increased as the number of game balls 160 that have passed through the through gate 225 is increased.

  In addition, during one waiting period, a lottery process for determining the count number of round games may be performed every time the through gate 225 is passed. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that a player who has a large round game count is selected in the lottery process every time the user passes through the through gate 225. Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure from which the largest count number is selected among the count numbers acquired in the lottery process performed in multiple times.

  Further, the timing at which the player aims the through gate 225 is not limited to the closed winning opening 222a being in a closed state. For example, a configuration in which a round game is in progress may be adopted. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect not only that the game ball 160 wins the big prize opening 222a during the round game but also that the game ball 160 passes through the through gate 225.

  (3) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the Kroon winning opening 360a is provided. For example, the Kroon winning opening 360a is not provided, and the game ball 160 is released onto the Kroon 350 to release the game ball 160. A device for collecting and releasing the game ball 160 on the croon 350 again may be provided in the croon region 340. According to this configuration, since the game ball 160 is surely released onto the cron 350, it is possible to reduce the number of times a small count is selected as the count number of the round game. Moreover, it is good also as a structure where what is discharged | emitted on the clone 350 is a lottery ball | bowl different from the game ball | bath 160 which flows down the game area PA.

  (4) Although the one-stage cruising 350 is used, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of cruising may be combined, or the plurality of cruising may have different numbers of holes. Specifically, the game ball 160 discharged from the discharge port 372 provided in the most downstream portion of the transport passage 370 is discharged to the outer peripheral side of the third stage crune. The third-stage croon has five holes, and the number of counts corresponding to the dropped holes is selected by dropping into one of the holes. The game ball 160 that has fallen into one of the holes provided in the third-stage croon is released onto the second-stage crune. The second stage Kroon has four holes, and the number of counts corresponding to the dropped holes is selected by dropping into one of the holes. The game ball 160 that has fallen into one of the holes provided in the second-stage crune is released onto the first-stage crune. The first stage Kroon has three holes, and the number of counts corresponding to the dropped holes is selected by dropping into one of the holes. The total of the three selected count numbers may be set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. By setting it as the said structure, it becomes possible to heighten a feeling of elevation with respect to a player rather than the time of the 1st stage Kroon 350.

  (5) It is good also as a structure which a player himself sets the count number corresponding to the holes 351,352,353 provided on the croon 350. FIG. Specifically, a selection button is provided on the upper bulging portion 75, and the holes 351, 352, and 353 corresponding to the count numbers “5”, “10”, and “20” are determined using the selection button. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided with the touch panel instead of the selection button. The player may directly select the holes 351, 352, and 353 displayed on the touch panel. According to the said structure, since the player himself can set the number of counts corresponding to the holes 351, 352, 353 provided on the Kroon 350, attention should be paid to the processing for specifying the count number of each round game. Is possible.

  (6) The configuration may be such that the player can select whether the count number of each round game is determined in the lottery process or whether the count number of each round game is determined using the cron 350. Specifically, a selection button for selecting whether to determine the count number of each round game in the lottery process or to determine the count number of each round game using the cron 350 is provided on the upper bulge portion 75. ing. Before starting the first round game, a screen for selecting whether to determine the count number of each round game in the lottery process or to determine the count number of each round game using the Kroon 350 is displayed. Displayed on G. The player uses the selection button to select a method for determining the count number of each round game. Here, in the case of the method of determining the count number of each round game by dropping into the holes 351, 352, 353 on the croon 350, the holes 351, 352 on the croon 350 are performed after the player performs a launch operation. It takes time to fall to 353. In this case, the player who wants to digest the round game quickly may be frustrated. In that respect, according to the configuration, since the count number of each round game can be determined in the lottery process, it is prevented that the frustration of the player who wants to digest the round game quickly is accumulated. It becomes possible.

  (7) In the next round game, when the hole 351 having the smallest count number falls in the hole 351 provided on the croon 350, the hole having the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 351 may be configured to be closed. Here, when the game ball 160 enters the hole 351 having the smallest count continuously, there is a high possibility that the player's irritation will be accumulated. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the game ball 160 does not enter the hole 351 having the smallest count continuously, so that it is possible to suppress the accumulation of the player's irritation. In addition, with this configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the total number of payouts during a round game decreases.

  (8) In one lottery process using the Kroon 350, the count number of all round games may be determined. According to this configuration, since the number of counts of all round games is determined in one lottery process using the cron 350, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the lottery process using the cron 350.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which determines a count number using the cron 350 at the rate of once for a specific round game. Specifically, every time a round game is digested three times, the count number of the next three round games may be determined by one lottery process using the Kroon 350. According to the said structure, compared with the structure which determines the count number of each round game each time before each round game is started using the cron 350, it can reduce the frequency | count that the lottery process using the cron 350 is performed. It becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to shorten the time for the lottery process using the Kroon 350.

  (9) It is good also as a structure from which the execution mode of the lottery process performed in order to determine the count number of each round game differs according to the game state at the time of a jackpot result, and the kind of jackpot result. Specifically, when the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot winning is achieved, the hole 351 having the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 is not closed, whereas the winning lottery mode is high. In the situation of the probability mode, when a big win is won, the hole 351 having the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 may be closed. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to give a player the benefit with respect to having won the jackpot in the situation where the winning / losing lottery mode is the high probability mode. Further, in the configuration in which the normal jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result are set, when the normal jackpot result is obtained, the hole 351 having the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 is not closed, whereas the probability variation jackpot result In such a case, the hole 351 having the smallest count number provided on the croon 350 may be closed. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to give the player the benefit with respect to having become a probable big hit result.

<Eleventh embodiment>
The configuration for determining the count number of each round game is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the eleventh embodiment.

  First, in step S4001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S4003 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4003, a payout total lottery table specifying process is executed in step S4004. The payout total number lottery table specifying process will be described with reference to FIG. The payout total lottery table specifying process is a process for reading out a payout total lottery table A, B, C, and D, which will be described later, according to the type of the jackpot result from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing a payout total lottery table specifying process in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is a probability variation jackpot result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, "10" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4102. In subsequent step S4103, the payout total lottery table A corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The payout total number lottery table A will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4101, it is determined in step S4104 whether or not the current jackpot result is a probability variation jackpot result B. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4104, “5” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4105. In subsequent step S4106, the payout total lottery table B corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The payout total number lottery table B will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4104, it is determined in step S4107 whether the current jackpot result is a normal jackpot result A or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4107, “10” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4108. In subsequent step S4109, the payout total lottery table C corresponding to the normal jackpot result A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The payout total lottery table C will be described later.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4107, “5” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4110. In subsequent step S4111, the payout total lottery table D corresponding to the normal jackpot result B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264.

  Here, the various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D will be described with reference to FIG. The various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the total payout and the numerical range of the lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The total number of payouts is the total number of game balls to be paid out by winning a prize at the special winning opening 222a. 71 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 71, in the payout total lottery table A, the probability that the total payout is 1200 is 5%, the probability that the total payout is 1500 is 10%, and the total payout is 1800. The probability is 15%, the probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 30%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 40%. The payout total number lottery table A is set so that the probability that the payout number will be 2400 is the highest, and the probability that the payout number is 1200 is the lowest.

  In the payout total lottery table B, the probability that the total payout is 1200 is 30%, the probability that the total payout is 1500 is 65%, and the probability that the total payout is 1800 is 2%, The probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 2%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 1%. The payout total number lottery table B is set so that the probability that the payout number is 1500 is the highest, and the probability that the payout number is 2400 is the lowest.

  In the payout total lottery table C, the probability that the total payout is 1200 is 10%, the probability that the total payout is 1500 is 20%, and the probability that the total payout is 1800 is 30%, The probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 20%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 20%. The total payout lottery table C is set so that the probability that the number of payouts will be 1,800 is the highest, and the probability that the number of payouts is 1200 is the lowest.

  In the payout total lottery table D, the probability that the total payout is 1200 is 50%, the probability that the total payout is 1500 is 45%, and the probability that the total payout is 1800 is 2%, The probability that the total number of payouts is 2100 is 2%, and the probability that the total number of payouts is 2400 is 1%. The total payout lottery table D is set so that the probability that the number of payouts will be 1200 is the highest, and the probability that the number of payouts is 2400 is the lowest.

  When the various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D are compared, it is the payout total lottery table A that has the largest distribution of 2400 payout totals. The payout total number lottery table A is referred to only when the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the current game result is the probability variation jackpot result A.

  When the payout total number lottery table B and the payout total number lottery table D are compared, the distribution of the total payout number of 1800 or more is the same, but the total payout number lottery table B is more than the total payout number lottery table D. However, the distribution of 1,500 payouts is increasing. Thereby, it is possible to secure the advantage of the probability variation jackpot result A over the normal jackpot result B.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 69), when the process of step S4004 is executed, a lottery process is executed in step S4005. Specifically, the lottery counter value updated regularly (for example, 2 msec) in the RAM 264 is read, and the lottery counter values A, B, C, and D are read out to the RAM 264. Match against.

  In step S4006, information on the total number of payouts selected in step S4005 is stored in the register of MPU262. In the subsequent step S4007, each of the total number of payouts specified in step S4006, the number of rounds corresponding to the current jackpot result, and the number of game balls to be paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a (15). Specify the number of counts in the round game.

  In step S4007, the payout total specifically specified in step S4006 is the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 and the payout number of game balls to be paid out when winning in the big winning opening 222a. Divide by (15) to identify the count for each round game.

  In step S4008, the count number specified in step S4007 is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. In subsequent step S4009, numerical value information of the winning upper limit counter PC set in step S4008 is stored in a count number storage area provided in the RAM 264. The count number storage area is provided to grasp the count number specified in step S4007 in the MPU 262. Thus, every time the next round game is started, the count number specified in step S4007 can be set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264.

  When the process of step S4009 is executed, the processes of step S4010 to step S4011 are executed. The processing in steps S4010 to S4011 is the same as the processing in steps S3515 to S3516.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening execution mode (step S4001: YES), a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S4012. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 222a is closed, the round counter RC is “1” or more and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. As a condition, the prize winning opening 222a is opened by setting the variable prize winning device 222 to a driving state. In the timer counter T, numerical information for opening time of the big winning opening 222a, numerical information for opening waiting time until the variable winning device 222 is changed from the open state to the closed state, and then to the open state again, and the like. Set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started.

  Here, in this embodiment, the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a is set to 40 sec. As described above, in the situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launching mechanism 281 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big prize opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big prize opening 222a, the proportion of game balls that have rolled around the big prize opening 222a won the prize money 222a. Is approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that about 33 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 40 seconds, which is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a. The situation in which the number of counts is the largest in this embodiment is a situation in which the number of rounds in a round game is 5R and the total number of payouts is 2400. In this case, the count number of each round game is “32”. Therefore, by setting 40 sec as the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a, it is possible to reach the count number set for each round game.

  In addition, when the big prize opening 222a is being opened, it means that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special prize opening 222a (the timer counter T is “0”) or a predetermined number of game balls have won. On the condition that the winning prize upper limit counter PC is “0”, the driving state of the variable winning device 222 is stopped and the large winning opening 222a is closed. After executing the process of closing the special winning opening 222a, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1. When the round counter RC decremented by 1 is larger than “0”, the numerical information stored in the count number storage area of the RAM 264 is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The winning upper limit counter PC is decremented by 1 every time the game ball wins the big winning opening 222a.

  When the process of step S4012 is executed, the processes of step S4013 to step S4016 are executed. The processing in steps S4013 to S4016 is the same as the processing in steps S3518 to S3521. In the present embodiment, the count number storage area provided in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0” in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S4016.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the total number of payouts in the round game is determined by lottery, and the count number of each round game is determined by executing predetermined arithmetic processing on the total number of payouts. Here, when the total number of payouts and the count number of each round game corresponding to the number of rounds are set in advance, the ROM 263 must store the total number of payouts and the count number of each round game corresponding to the number of rounds. . In this case, the capacity of the ROM 263 increases. In that respect, according to this configuration, by executing the predetermined calculation processing, the count number of each round game corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of rounds can be set, so it is necessary to increase the capacity of the ROM 263. Absent. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  The total number of payouts in the round game is not set in advance, and the total number of payouts in the round game is determined by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to diversify the total number of payouts even with a predetermined jackpot result. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that the total number of payouts will increase.

  In addition, since the total number of payouts in the round game is determined by lottery, there is a possibility that the normal jackpot results A and B have a larger total payout number than the probability variation jackpot results A and B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from being reduced when the normal hit results A and B are obtained.

  In addition, there is a possibility that the total number of payouts increases when the number of rounds is smaller than when the number of rounds is large. As a result, even when the number of rounds is small, it is possible to cause the player to play a game while expecting the total number of payouts to increase.

  In addition, since the count number of each round game is specified from the total number of payouts, it is possible to diversify the count number of each round game even if it is a big hit result with the same number of rounds.

  Further, the total number of payouts is not proportional to the count number of each round game. Here, if the total number of payouts increases in proportion to the count number of each round game, it becomes impossible to expect that the total number of payouts will increase when the count number of each round game is small. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the total number of payouts is not proportional to the count number of each round game, it is possible to expect that the total number of payouts increases when the count number of each round game is small. .

  Further, when the various payout total lottery tables A, B, C, and D are compared, it is the payout total lottery table A that has the largest distribution of 2400 payout totals. The payout total number lottery table A is referred to only when the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the current game result is the probability variation jackpot result A.

  In addition, when the payout total number lottery table B and the payout total number lottery table D are compared, the distribution of the total payout number of 1800 or more is the same, but the total payout number lottery table B is more than the total payout number lottery table. Compared to D, the distribution with the total number of payouts of 1500 is larger. Thereby, it is possible to secure the advantage of the probability variation jackpot result A over the normal jackpot result B.

<Another example of the eleventh embodiment>
(1) The count number of each round game is not limited to be the same. For example, the count number of each round game may be different. Specifically, using the total number of payouts, the payout number (15) of game balls to be paid out when winning the big prize opening 222a, and the ratio of the count number set for each round game, Specify the count number. The total number of payouts is divided by the payout number of game balls to be paid out when winning the big winning opening 222a, and the count number set for each round game is multiplied to specify the count number of each round game. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to differ the count number of each round game by performing the said arithmetic processing.

  (2) It is not limited to the structure which determines the count number of each round game by arithmetic processing, It is good also as a structure which determines the number of rounds by arithmetic processing. The number of rounds is specified by dividing the total number of payouts specified in the lottery process by the count number of each round game and the number of payout game balls (15) to be paid out when winning in the big prize opening 222a. Here, when the number of rounds corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of counts is set in advance, the ROM 263 must store all the numbers of rounds corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of counts. In this case, the capacity of the ROM 263 increases. In this respect, according to the present configuration, the number of rounds corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of counts can be set by executing the predetermined calculation process, so that it is not necessary to increase the capacity of the ROM 263. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost when manufacturing the pachinko machine 10.

  (3) The payout total may not be 2400 only when the count number of each round game is “32”. As described above, when the count number of each round game is “32”, the count number is the largest. According to this configuration, when the count number of each round game is “32”, the player is simultaneously given the joy of having the highest round game count and the joy of having the highest payout total. It becomes possible to do. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of uplifting.

  (4) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the number of rounds differs according to the type of the jackpot result. For example, the configuration may have the same number of rounds even if the type of the jackpot result is different. According to this configuration, the total number of payouts can be reliably identified by grasping the count number of each round game.

  (5) It is good also as a structure from which the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a fluctuates according to the determined count number. In this case, it is good also as a structure which the opening continuation time of the said big winning opening 222a increases, so that count number increases. In addition, by continuously operating the firing handle 28 over the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a, the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is set so as to reach the determined count number. Also good. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to win a game ball in the big prize opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a elapses.

  (6) When the total number of payouts is determined by lottery, both the number of rounds and the number of counts may be determined from the total number of payouts. In this case, a plurality of combinations of round numbers and count numbers corresponding to the total number of count numbers may be set in advance. Specifically, the total number of counts is specified by dividing the total number of payouts specified in the lottery by the number of payout game balls (15) to be paid out when winning the big prize opening 222a. Then, a combination of the round number and the count number corresponding to the total number of the count numbers is specified by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the number of combinations of rounds and counts corresponding to the total number of payouts.

  (7) The total number of payouts may be determined by lottery instead of the lottery. Specifically, when a transition to the open / close execution mode occurs, a lottery is performed to determine the total number of counts, and each round is calculated by dividing the total number of counts selected in the lottery by the number of rounds. A count number of games is specified. According to this configuration, it is possible to set the count number of each round game without specifying the total number of payouts.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
The conditions for continuing the round game are different from those of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The game state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twelfth embodiment.

  First, in step S4201, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4202, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the display of the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S4203 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4203, the processing of step S4204 to step S4205 is executed. The processing in steps S4204 to S4205 is the same as the processing in steps S3515 to S3516.

  In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the round number of round games and the upper limit of the count number of round games are not provided, the round counter RC and the winning upper limit counter PC are not provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Therefore, no value is set in the round counter RC and the winning upper limit counter PC at the start of the transition to the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S4201: YES), a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S4206. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S4301, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 222a is being opened. If the big prize opening 222a is not open, it is determined in step S4302 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening releasing process from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4302, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4302, it is determined whether an ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4303. The ending flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 transmits an ending command. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where an effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231. .

  If a negative determination is made in step S4303, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S4304. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 222c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 222a is opened. In the present embodiment, the process of closing the special prize opening 222a is performed only in the situation where the open continuation non-winning is made in the lottery process described later. That is, it is not necessary to set the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a. Therefore, the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is not set in the special winning opening process.

  After executing the process of step S4304, the process of step S4305 is executed. The processing in step S4305 is the same as the processing in step S3605.

  On the other hand, if the special winning opening 222a is being opened (step S4301: YES), it is determined in step S4306 whether or not the closing flag is set in the RAM 264. Here, before describing the closing flag, the reading process executed in step S3001 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not a winning to any one of the operation ports 223 and 224 has occurred. If a winning is made to any one of the operation ports 223 and 224, 1 is added to the three prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4402. The counter for three prize balls is for counting the number of times a three prize ball command to instruct the payout control device 270 to pay out three game balls should be output. It should be noted that since the winning to the upper working port 223 and the winning to the lower working port 224 can occur simultaneously within the range of one processing time of the normal processing, in the processing of step S4401 to step S4402, three prize balls The process of incrementing the counter for 1 may be performed twice.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4401, or after the processing of step S4402 is executed, it is determined in step S4403 whether or not a prize for the general winning opening 221 has occurred. If a winning is made to the general winning opening 221, 1 is added to the counter for 10 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264 b of the RAM 264 in step S 4404. The 10-award ball counter is for counting the number of times a 10-award ball command to instruct the payout control device 270 to pay out 10 gaming balls should be output.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4403, or after the processing of step S4404 is executed, it is determined in step S4405 whether or not a winning to the variable winning device 222 has occurred. If a negative determination is made in step S4405, the main reading process is terminated as it is. Therefore, when a winning to the variable winning device 222 has not occurred, the processes of steps S4406 to S4412 described later are not executed.

  If a winning to the variable winning device 222 has occurred, 1 is added to the counter for 15 prize balls provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4406. The counter for 15 prize balls is for counting the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 15 game balls.

  When the process of step S4406 is executed, it is determined in subsequent step S4407 whether or not the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264. The open continuation lottery flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 is in a situation where a process for specifying whether or not to close the special prize opening 222a described later is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4407, 1 is added to the lottery opportunity counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4408. The lottery opportunity counter is a count for specifying the timing at which the MPU 262 sets the open continuation lottery flag in the RAM 264.

  In step S4409, it is determined whether the lottery opportunity counter is a predetermined value. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the lottery opportunity counter is “20”. The lottery opportunity counter is incremented by one every time a prize is entered into the big prize opening 222a, so that the lottery opportunity counter becomes “20” when the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a is 20.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4409, the main reading process is terminated. Therefore, until the lottery opportunity counter reaches a predetermined value, the process for specifying whether or not to close the special prize opening 222a described later is not executed. Here, if the process of specifying whether or not to close the big prize opening 222a, which will be described later, is executed before the value of the lottery opportunity counter reaches a predetermined value, in a situation where there are few prizes to the big prize opening 222a. There is a possibility that the big prize opening 222a will be closed. If the big prize opening 222a is closed in a situation where there are few winnings to the big prize opening 222a, the total number of payouts is reduced, and the player's irritation is accumulated. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the process of specifying whether or not to close the special prize opening 222a described later is not executed until the lottery opportunity counter reaches a predetermined value set in advance. Accordingly, the actual total number of payouts does not fall below the preset total number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frustration associated with the small number of payouts from being accumulated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4409, an open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4410.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4407, or if the process of step S4410 is executed, “600” is set in a predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4411. The predetermined time elapsed counter means that, in a situation where the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264, a predetermined time elapses from the current winning to the grand prize opening 222a until the next winning prize winning hole 222a. This is a counter for specifying whether or not the MPU 262 determines whether or not it has been performed. The numerical information set in the predetermined time elapsed counter is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the subtraction process is performed by 1 every 2 msec and becomes “0” about 1.2 sec after the predetermined time elapsed counter is set to “600”.

  Here, the reason why the predetermined time is set will be described. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the time from winning a prize to the next prize winning opening 222a until the next prize winning opening 222a occurs is equal to or less than a predetermined time and longer than the predetermined time. There is a difference in the probability of winning the winning continuation in the process of specifying whether or not to close the special prize opening 222a described later. In addition, the former is set to have a higher probability of winning the opening continuation than the latter. Here, if the predetermined time is not provided, there is a possibility that a period in which the special winning opening 222a is in an open state may occur for a long time. In this case, the round game may become unnecessarily long. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the time from the winning of the current winning award 222a until the winning of the next winning award 222a occurs for a predetermined time or less is less than the predetermined time. The probability that the winning continuation is won in the process of specifying whether or not to close the grand prize opening 222a, which will be described later, compared to the case where the time from winning the prize to the next big prize opening 222a is longer than the predetermined time Is set to be high. Therefore, the player performs a launch operation so that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a occurs before the predetermined time elapses. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the round game from becoming unnecessarily long by preventing the period in which the special winning opening 222a is in the open state from occurring for a long time.

  Next, the reason why the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec in the present embodiment will be described. As described above, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 281 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. . In addition, in the positional relationship between the grand prize winning port 222a and the nail 228 planted around the grand prize winning port 222a, a game ball rolling around the big prize winning port 222a wins the grand prize winning port 222a. The proportion is approximately 50%. In other words, when the launch operation is continued, a winning to the next big winning opening 222a occurs approximately 1.2 seconds after the winning of the current big winning opening 222a occurs. Therefore, if the launch operation is not continued, the possibility that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a will occur within the predetermined time from the winning to the big winning opening 222a this time becomes low. If the next prize winning opening 222a does not occur within the predetermined time from the winning of the current prize winning opening 222a, the open continuation non-winning in the process for specifying whether or not to close the prize winning opening 222a described later will be performed. The probability that it becomes becomes high. According to this configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, it is possible to cause the player to continue the launch operation.

  Further, when the predetermined time is longer than 1.2 seconds, there is a high possibility that a winning to the next big prize opening 222a will occur within the predetermined time even if the firing operation is temporarily interrupted. In this case, the player cannot be concentrated on the launching operation. In this respect, according to this configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, there is a low possibility that the launch operation is temporarily interrupted. Thereby, it becomes possible to concentrate a player on launch operation.

  Further, if the predetermined time is shorter than 1.2 seconds, the possibility that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a will occur within a predetermined time after the winning of the current big winning opening 222a is reduced. In this case, the frequency of occurrence of a situation where the winning continuation is not won in the process of specifying whether or not to close the special prize opening 222a described later is increased, so that the player is expected to continue the round game. It becomes impossible to do. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, there is a possibility that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a will occur within a predetermined time from the winning to the big winning opening 222a this time. Is expensive. As a result, in the process of specifying whether or not to close the special prize opening 222a, which will be described later, it is expected that the player will continue the round game by increasing the frequency of the situation where the open continuation non-winning situation occurs. It is possible to prevent it from disappearing.

  When the process of step S4411 is executed, a big winning opening opening continuous lottery process is executed in step S4412. The grand prize winning opening continuation lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. The special winning opening open continuation lottery process is performed to specify whether or not to close the special winning opening 222a. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening lottery process in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is a probabilistic jackpot result. In the present embodiment, two types of jackpot results are set: a normal jackpot result and a probability variable jackpot result. As a specific process in step S4501, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264 when a probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the type determination process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4501, it is determined in step S4502 whether or not a predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. As described above, the predetermined time elapsed counter is a period from the current winning prize 222a to the next winning prize 222a in the situation where the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264. This is a counter for specifying in the MPU 262 whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4502, the open continuation lottery table corresponding to a situation in which the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a probable jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not “0” in step S4503 A is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The opening continuation lottery table A will be described later.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4502, the open continuation lottery table corresponding to the situation in which the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is “0” in step S4504. B is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The opening continuation lottery table B will be described later.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode is the normal jackpot result (step S4501: NO), the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0” in step S4505. Is determined.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4505, the open continuation lottery table corresponding to the situation in which the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the normal jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not “0” in step S4506. C is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The open continuation lottery table C will be described later.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4505, the open continuation lottery table corresponding to the situation where the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode is the normal jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is “0” in step S4507. D is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264.

  Here, various open continuation lottery tables A, B, C, and D will be described with reference to FIG. In the various open continuation lottery tables A, B, C, and D, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the result of the open continuation winning or the open continuation non-winning and the numerical range of the lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Is provided. For example, the lottery counter is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The lottery counter is used to specify the lottery result. FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various open continuation lottery tables.

  As shown in FIG. 76, in the case of the open continuation lottery table A, the probability of being in the open continuation lottery is 99%, and in the case of the open continuation lottery table B, the probability of being in the open continuation lottery is 10%. In the case of Table C, the probability of winning the opening continuation is 95%, and in the case of the opening continuation lottery table D, the probability of winning the opening continuation is 5%.

  When the open continuation lottery tables A, B, C, and D are compared, the probability that the open continuation lottery table A will be the open continuation winner is set high. Here, the open continuation lottery table A is selected in a situation where the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode is the probability change jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not “0”. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the jackpot result that is the trigger for the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result and the predetermined time elapsed counter is not “0”.

  Further, the open continuation lottery table A and the open continuation lottery table C are selected because the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0” when the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264. Not a situation. On the other hand, the open continuation lottery table B and the open continuation lottery table D are selected because the predetermined time elapsed counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0” when the open continuation lottery flag is set in the RAM 264. This is the situation. When the open continuation lottery table A and the open continuation lottery table C are compared with the open continuation lottery table B and the open continuation lottery table D, the probability that the former will be the open continuation lottery is set higher than the latter. Therefore, the player feels that he / she wants to win a game ball to the big winning opening 222a before the predetermined time elapsed counter becomes “0”. This makes it possible to continue the launch operation during the round game.

  Further, when the open continuation lottery table A and the open continuation lottery table C are compared, the open continuation lottery table A is set to have a higher probability of being in the open continuation lottery table C than the open continuation lottery table C. Further, when the open continuation lottery table B and the open continuation lottery table D are compared, the open continuation lottery table B is set to have a higher probability of being in the open continuation lottery table D than the open continuation lottery table D. Here, the jackpot result in which the open continuation lottery tables A and B are selected is a probabilistic jackpot result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the jackpot result that is the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a probabilistic jackpot result.

  In addition, every time a game ball wins a prize winning opening 222a, a lottery process for opening a prize winning opening is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player throbbing whether or not the round game will continue each time a game ball wins a prize winning opening 222a.

  Returning to the description of the winning prize opening continuation lottery process (FIG. 75), when the process of step S4503 is executed, the process of step S4504 is executed, the process of step S4506 is executed, or the process of step S4507 is executed. If so, a lottery process is executed in step S4508. Specifically, the lottery counter value updated regularly (for example, 2 msec) in the RAM 264 is read, and the lottery counter value is read out to the RAM 264 in various open continuation lottery tables A, B, C, and D. Match against.

  If the open continuation winning is made (step S4509: YES), the main prize winning opening continuation lottery process is terminated. On the other hand, if the open continuation winning is not achieved (step S4509: NO), a closing flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4510. The closing flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 has not been elected to continue the opening. By providing the closing flag, it is possible to specify the timing at which the MPU 262 switches the special winning opening 222a from the open state to the closed state.

  In the present embodiment, the number of rounds is set to 1R. In this case, it is not determined by lottery whether or not the special winning opening 222a is opened again after the special winning opening 222a is closed, but whether or not the open state is continued is determined by lottery. If it is determined and the winning combination is continued, the open state is continued as it is. Thereby, in the configuration in which the lottery for determining whether or not to continue the open state is performed, no waiting time is generated until the open state is resumed.

  In subsequent step S4511, the open continuation lottery flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”, and the main prize winning opening continuation lottery process ends. In this process, when the open continuation lottery flag is cleared to “0”, a negative determination is made in step S4407 of the reading process (FIG. 74). As a result, in the next opening / closing execution mode, the lottery opportunity counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 reaches a predetermined value, so that the lottery opening continuous lottery process can be performed.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 73), when the closing flag is not set in the RAM 264 (step S4306: NO), the big winning prize opening / closing process is finished as it is. If the closing flag is set in the RAM 264 (step S4306: YES), a closing execution process is executed in step S4307. In the closing execution process, the drive control of the variable winning driving unit 222c is finished so that the special winning opening 222a is closed. In the subsequent step S4308, a close command is set. Here, the set close command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57).

  After executing the process of step S4308, the processes of step S4309 to step S4310 are executed. The processing in steps S4309 to S4310 is the same as the processing in steps S3617 to S3618.

  In subsequent step S4311, an ending flag is set in the RAM 264. The ending flag is a flag for specifying that the ending command is transmitted by the MPU 262 as described above.

  In step S4312, the closing flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”, and the lottery opportunity counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”, and the big prize opening opening / closing process is completed. . In the processing, when the lottery opportunity counter is cleared to “0”, it is possible to prevent an affirmative determination in step S4409 in the next opening / closing execution mode.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 72), after executing the process of step S4206, it is determined in step S4207 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. judge. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the processes in steps S4209 to S4210 from being executed in the situation where the big prize opening 222a is in the open state.

  In a succeeding step S4208, it is determined whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264. If a negative determination is made in step S4208, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing in steps S4209 to S4210 from being executed even though it is not notified on the display screen G that the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4208, the processing of step S4209 to step S4210 is executed. The processing in steps S4209 to S4210 is the same as the processing in steps S3520 to S3521. In this embodiment, only two types of jackpot results are provided: a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S4210, the normal jackpot result set in the RAM 264 is used. Of the jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag, the stored flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result. The probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result. Further, the ending flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S4210.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, every time a game ball wins the big prize opening 222a, the big prize opening open continuous lottery process is performed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to make the player throbbing whether or not the round game will continue each time a game ball wins a prize winning opening 222a.

  Also, the opening of the big prize opening is continued depending on whether the time from winning the current big prize opening 222a to winning the next big prize opening 222a is less than a predetermined time or longer than the predetermined time. In the lottery process, the probability of winning the open continuation is different. In addition, the former is set to have a higher probability of winning the opening continuation than the latter. Here, if the predetermined time is not provided, there is a possibility that a period in which the special winning opening 222a is in an open state may occur for a long time. In this case, the round game may become unnecessarily long. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the time from the winning of the current winning award 222a until the winning of the next winning award 222a occurs for a predetermined time or less is less than the predetermined time. It is set to increase the probability of winning the winning continuation in the large winning opening continuation lottery process as compared to the case where the time from winning a prize to the next big winning opening 222a is longer than a predetermined time. . Therefore, the player performs a launch operation so that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a occurs before the predetermined time elapses. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the round game from becoming unnecessarily long by preventing the period in which the special winning opening 222a is in the open state from occurring for a long time.

  The predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec. As described above, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 281 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. . In addition, in the positional relationship between the grand prize winning port 222a and the nail 228 planted around the grand prize winning port 222a, a game ball rolling around the big prize winning port 222a wins the grand prize winning port 222a. The proportion is approximately 50%. In other words, when the launch operation is continued, a winning to the next big winning opening 222a occurs approximately 1.2 seconds after the winning of the current big winning opening 222a occurs. Therefore, if the launch operation is not continued, the possibility that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a will occur within the predetermined time from the winning to the big winning opening 222a this time becomes low. If a winning to the next big winning opening 222a does not occur within the predetermined time from the winning to the big winning opening 222a this time, the probability that the continuous winning non-winning will be increased in the big winning opening continuous lottery process. According to this configuration, since the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec, it is possible to cause the player to continue the launch operation.

  Further, the lottery opening opening lottery process is not executed until the lottery opportunity counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 reaches a predetermined value set in advance. Here, if the lottery opening opening lottery process is executed before the value of the lottery opportunity counter reaches a predetermined value, the big prize opening 222a is closed in a situation where there are few winnings to the big prize opening 222a. There is a possibility. If the big prize opening 222a is closed in a situation where there are few winnings to the big prize opening 222a, the total number of payouts is reduced, and the player's irritation is accumulated. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the lottery opening continuation lottery process is not executed until the lottery opportunity counter reaches a predetermined value set in advance. Accordingly, the actual total number of payouts does not fall below the preset total number of payouts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frustration associated with the small number of payouts from being accumulated.

  In addition, the number of rounds of the round game is set to 1R. In this case, it is not determined by lottery whether or not the special winning opening 222a is opened again after the special winning opening 222a is closed, but whether or not the open state is continued is determined by lottery. If it is determined and the winning combination is continued, the open state is continued as it is. Thereby, in the configuration in which the lottery for determining whether or not to continue the open state is performed, no waiting time is generated until the open state is resumed.

  Further, when the open continuation lottery table A and the open continuation lottery table C are compared, the open continuation lottery table A is set to have a higher probability of being in the open continuation lottery table C than the open continuation lottery table C. Further, when the open continuation lottery table B and the open continuation lottery table D are compared, the open continuation lottery table B is set to have a higher probability of being in the open continuation lottery table D than the open continuation lottery table D. Here, the jackpot result in which the open continuation lottery tables A and B are selected is a probabilistic jackpot result. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the jackpot result that is the trigger for the transition to the current open / close execution mode is a probabilistic jackpot result.

<Another example of the twelfth embodiment>
(1) It is not limited to the configuration in which the open continuation winning probability is constant, and for example, the open continuation winning probability may be different depending on the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 222a. Specifically, an open continuation lottery table corresponding to the total number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 222a is set. In the big winning opening release continuous lottery process, the lottery process is performed with reference to the open continuous lottery table corresponding to the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 222a. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the winning continuation winning probability increases as the total number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 222a increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage in a situation where there are a large number of winning game balls in the special winning opening 222a.

  (2) If the time from winning the current winning prize 222a to winning the next winning prize 222a becomes longer than a predetermined time, It is good also as a structure by which the screen which alert | reports that the probability which becomes will be displayed on the display screen G immediately before a round game is started. According to this configuration, when the time from winning the current winning prize opening 222a to winning the next winning prize opening 222a becomes longer than a predetermined time, It is possible to easily notify the player who has not grasped that the probability of winning the opening continuation is reduced. As a result, when the time from winning the current winning prize opening 222a until the winning of the next winning prize opening 222a is longer than a predetermined time, the winning opening continuation lottery process is performed. It becomes possible to prevent the player who has not grasped that the probability of becoming lower becomes disadvantageous.

  (3) The lottery opportunity counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery opportunity opening continuous lottery process is performed after reaching a predetermined value. Even in a situation where it has not yet reached, it may be configured such that the lottery process for continuous opening of the big prize opening is performed. In this configuration, if the lottery opportunity counter reaches the predetermined value when the lottery opportunity counter reaches the predetermined value when the lottery opportunity counter continues to be non-winning in the lottery opening opening lottery process performed before the lottery opportunity counter reaches the predetermined value. The configuration may be such that 222a is closed. According to this configuration, the game balls for the minimum guarantee set in advance by the player are paid out, and in the period until the lottery trigger counter reaches a predetermined value, the lottery continues to be opened in the big prize opening opening lottery process. It will be possible to expect to win.

  (4) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec. For example, the predetermined time may be longer than 1.2 sec. Here, in a situation where the firing operation is continuously performed, when comparing a configuration in which the predetermined time is set to 1.2 sec and a configuration in which the predetermined time is longer than 1.2 sec, the latter is more preferable. There is a high possibility that the frequency of winning the big prize opening 222a within a predetermined time will increase. In the situation where the firing operation is continued, the frustration of the player is accumulated when the frequency of the open continuation non-winning in the big prize opening continuation lottery process increases. In this regard, according to the present configuration, a configuration in which the predetermined time is longer than 1.2 sec causes a winning to the big prize opening 222a within a predetermined time than the configuration in which the predetermined time is 1.2 sec. The frequency is likely to be high. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration with respect to the fact that the open continuation non-winning is made in the big prize opening continuation lottery process even though the firing operation is continuously performed.

  (5) When a predetermined time has passed in a situation where no winning to the next big prize opening 222a occurs, the big prize opening 222a is not opened at the timing when the predetermined time has passed without performing the big prize opening opening lottery process. It is good also as a structure used as a closed state. According to this configuration, the player performs a launch operation so that a prize for the big prize opening 222a is generated within a predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game.

  (6) Configuration in which the probability of winning the winning continuation in the big winning opening continuation lottery process is different depending on the time from winning the current winning prize opening 222a until the winning of the next winning prize opening 222a occurs. It is good. Specifically, for example, if the time from winning a prize to the next big prize opening 222a until the next big prize opening 222a is generated is less than 0 sec to less than 2 sec, the probability of winning the open continuation is 99%. Yes, if it is 2 sec to less than 4 sec, the probability of winning the open continuation is 95%, if it is 4 sec to less than 6 sec, the probability of winning the open continuation is 90%, if it is less than 6 sec to 8 sec, If the probability of winning the open continuation is 80%, if it is less than 8 sec to 10 sec, the probability of winning the open continuation is 50%, and if it is 10 seconds or more, the probability of winning the open continuation win is 10% It is good. According to the configuration, it is possible to continuously perform the launch operation and to increase the degree of attention to the time from winning the current prize winning opening 222a until winning the next prize winning opening 222a. Become.

  (7) If the winning continuation lottery process for winning the winning a prize opening is a continuation non-winning process, an opening / returning lottery process is performed to determine whether or not the winning prize opening 222a is changed from the closed state to the opened state. When a return winning is made in the lottery process, the special winning opening 222a may be changed from a closed state to an open state. Specifically, when the open continuation non-winning process is selected in the big prize opening continuation lottery process, the open / return lottery process is performed. When a return winning is made in the open / return lottery process, a return flag is set in the RAM 264. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which a closing execution process is performed even when it is a return winning in the said open return lottery process. When the return flag is set in the RAM 264, a special winning opening release process is performed, and the special winning opening 222a is changed from the closed state to the opened state. According to this configuration, even if the special winning opening 222a is changed from the open state to the closed state, it can be expected that the special winning opening 222a is changed from the closed state to the opened state again.

  (8) A plurality of rounds may be set, and the winning prize opening continuation lottery process may be executed for some rounds. According to this configuration, in a round game in which the grand prize opening continuation lottery process is not executed, it is possible to give a sense of security that the round game will continue reliably, and the round in which the big prize opening continuation lottery process is executed. In the game, it is possible to give a feeling of thrill to whether or not the round game is continued.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of rounds are set and the big prize opening opening lottery process is executed in some rounds, the number of rounds in which the big winning opening opening lottery process is executed and the big prize opening The number of times the opening continuation lottery process is executed may be set in advance. According to this configuration, it is possible to cause a player to perform a round game in a state in which the number of rounds in which the big prize opening opening continuous lottery process is executed and the number of times in which the big winning opening opening continuous lottery process is executed are grasped. It becomes. Therefore, even if the big prize opening 222a is suddenly closed in the middle of the round game, it is not caused by the failure of the pachinko machine 10, and the winning prize opening 222a is not made in the big prize opening continuous lottery process. It is possible to understand that has been closed.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of rounds are set and the big prize opening opening lottery process is executed in some rounds, the number of rounds in which the big winning opening opening lottery process is executed and the big prize opening It is good also as a structure which determines the frequency | count that an open continuation lottery process is performed by lottery. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of rounds in which the winning lot opening continuous lottery process is executed and the number of times in which the winning lot opening continuous lottery process is executed.

  (9) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which the lottery opening continuous lottery process is performed every time a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 222a. For example, each time a plurality of prizes are given to the big prize opening 222a. It is good also as a structure by which a big prize opening open | release continuous lottery process is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase interest in the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a. Further, in this configuration, the probability that the winning continuation winning is increased in the large winning opening continuation lottery process may be increased as the number of times a plurality of winnings are generated at the winning pit 222a is increased. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many frequency | counts where several winnings generate | occur | produced to the big winning opening.

  (10) When the firing operation has not been performed for a certain period of time, the grand prize opening 222a is temporarily closed, and when the firing operation is performed again, the grand prize opening 222a is opened and the round game is resumed. Also good. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a state in which the special winning opening 222a is opened for a long period of time in a situation where no round game is performed.

  (11) Every time a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 222a, an opportunity lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an upper limit lottery for determining the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a. In the case of winning, the above upper limit lottery may be performed. In this case, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222 reaches the upper limit determined in the upper limit lottery, the big winning opening 222a is closed. Specifically, the upper limit value determined in the upper limit value lottery is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. Each time a prize is awarded to the big prize opening 222a, the prize upper limit counter PC is decremented by “1”. When the winning upper limit counter PC becomes “0”, the special winning opening 222a is closed. Whenever the winning lottery 222a is won and the winning lottery is performed and the winning lottery is won, according to the configuration in which the upper limit lottery is performed, only whether or not the round game is continued. In addition, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a. In addition, since the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222 is determined, it is possible to prevent the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a from being excessively larger than the number of winnings that is assumed in advance. .

  In addition, when the winning lottery is performed every time the winning prize opening 222a is generated and the winning lottery is won, the upper limit lottery is performed. Even if a plurality of upper limit values are set and the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is determined in the upper limit value lottery, the opportunity lottery is performed every time a prize is given to the big prize opening 222a. If the winning lottery is won, the upper limit lottery may be performed. In this case, the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the current big winning opening 222a is changed to the upper limit value determined in the upper limit lottery performed again. Specifically, the upper limit value determined in the upper limit lottery is set again in the current top entry award upper counter PC. Further, in the configuration in which the upper limit value of the number of winning prizes to the current big winning opening 222a is changed to the upper limit value determined in the upper limit lottery performed again, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is displayed on the display screen G. The upper limit value may be displayed. According to this configuration, until the player wins the opportunity lottery, the player thinks that he / she does not want to win the opportunity lottery, and the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is displayed on the display screen G. In the case where it is determined (when the upper limit value of the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is determined by the upper limit value lottery), it is possible to make the player think that it is desired to win the opportunity lottery. Therefore, it becomes possible to change a player's emotion according to a condition.

<13th Embodiment>
The configuration for determining the count number of round games is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the thirteenth embodiment.

  First, in step S4601, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4602, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the display of the variation of the pattern on the main display unit 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S4603 whether or not the game result of the game times that have been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S4604 whether or not the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The first probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result A.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4604, "1" is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4605 and the prize upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Set “160”. As a result, the round game count is “160”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4604, it is determined in step S4606 whether or not the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result B. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The second probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result B.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4606, “1” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4607, and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Set “50”. Thereby, the count number of round games becomes “50”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4606, it is determined in step S4608 whether or not the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode is the normal jackpot result A. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264. The first normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result A.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4608, “1” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4609, and the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Set “120”. Thereby, the count number of round games becomes “120”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4608, “1” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4610, and the prize upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. Set “80”. Thereby, the count number of round games becomes “80”. The count number set in step S4605, step S4607, step S4609, and step S4610 represents the number of game balls that can be won in the big winning opening 222a.

  When the number of counts corresponding to the type of jackpot result is compared, when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A, the largest number of counts is set. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the type of jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A.

  Further, when the number of counts according to the type of jackpot result is compared, when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B, the smallest count number is set. Here, when the type of jackpot result is the normal jackpot result B, and the configuration is such that the smallest number of counts is set, the disappointment with respect to determining that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result This may give the player a feeling of disappointment that the number of rounds in the round game is the smallest. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B, the smallest count number is set. Therefore, even if the number of counts is the smallest, the type of jackpot result is the probabilistic jackpot result B, and it is possible to suppress disappointment with respect to the smallest number of counts.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of rounds in the round game is set to 1R regardless of the type of the jackpot result. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a waiting period until the special winning opening 222a is changed from the closed state to the open state. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player play a round game smoothly. Further, the type of jackpot result cannot be specified by the upper limit of the number of rounds of the round game. As described above, since the round game count number differs depending on the type of the jackpot result, the type of jackpot result can be specified from the round game count number. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player to the count number of round games.

  When the process of step S4605 is executed, when the process of step S4607 is executed, when the process of step S4609 is executed, or when the process of step S4610 is executed, the processes of steps S4611 to S4612 are executed. The processing in steps S4611 to S4612 is the same as the processing in steps S3515 to S3516.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S4601: YES), in step S4613, a big prize opening opening / closing process is executed. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 222a is closed, the round counter RC is “1” or more and the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. As a condition, the prize winning opening 222a is opened by setting the variable prize winning device 222 to a driving state. In the timer counter T, numerical information for the waiting period for the opening and numerical information for the opening time of the special winning opening 222a are set. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started.

  Further, “96000” is set in the timer counter T as numerical information for the opening time of the special winning opening 222a. As described above, the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so as to be decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started, so that the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is 192 sec. It has become.

  Here, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the largest number of counts set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “160”. As described above, in the situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player in the pachinko machine 10, the game ball launching mechanism 281 so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is driven and controlled. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big prize opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big prize opening 222a, the proportion of game balls that have rolled around the big prize opening 222a won the prize money 222a. Is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 160 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a during the 192 seconds that is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a. In the present embodiment, when the type of the jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A, “160” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. As described above, when the probability variation jackpot result type is the probability variation jackpot result A, the largest number of counts is set. Therefore, by setting 192 sec as the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a, it becomes possible to reach the upper limit of the count number set for each round game.

  In addition, when the big prize opening 222a is being opened, it means that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special prize opening 222a (the timer counter T is “0”) or a predetermined number of game balls have won. On the condition that the winning prize upper limit counter PC is “0”, the driving state of the variable winning device 222 is stopped and the large winning opening 222a is closed. After executing the process of closing the special winning opening 222a, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1. The winning upper limit counter PC is decremented by 1 every time the game ball wins the big winning opening 222a. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of rounds in a round game is 1R, when the round counter RC is decremented by 1, the round counter RC is “0”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the process of subtracting 1 from the round counter RC is performed only once.

  When the process of step S4613 is executed, the processes of step S4614 to step S4617 are executed. The processing from Step S4614 to Step S4617 is the same as the processing from Step S3518 to Step S3521.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the values set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are different depending on the type of the jackpot result. Therefore, it is possible to specify the type of jackpot result by grasping the count number of round games. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the count number of a round game.

  Further, when the number of counts according to the type of jackpot result is compared, when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A, the largest count number is set. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the type of jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A.

  Further, when the number of counts according to the type of jackpot result is compared, when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B, the smallest count number is set. Here, when the type of jackpot result is the normal jackpot result B, and the configuration is such that the smallest number of counts is set, the disappointment with respect to determining that the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result This may give the player a feeling of disappointment that the number of rounds in the round game is the smallest. In this regard, according to this configuration, when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B, the smallest count number is set. Therefore, even if the number of counts is the smallest, the type of jackpot result is the probabilistic jackpot result B, and it is possible to suppress disappointment with respect to the smallest number of counts.

  In addition, the upper limit of the number of round games is set to 1R regardless of the type of jackpot result. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a waiting period until the special winning opening 222a is changed from the closed state to the open state. Thereby, it becomes possible to make a player play a round game smoothly. Further, the type of jackpot result cannot be specified by the upper limit of the number of rounds of the round game. As described above, since the round game count number differs depending on the type of the jackpot result, the type of jackpot result can be specified from the round game count number. Therefore, it becomes possible to attract the player to the count number of round games.

<Another example of the thirteenth embodiment>
(1) The value set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 may be different depending on the gaming state when the big win is won. In this case, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, when the probability variation jackpot results A and B are obtained, the above winning is obtained more than when the lottery mode is the low probability mode when the probability variation jackpot results A and B are achieved. The value set in the upper limit counter PC may be increased. Specifically, in the situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, when the probability variation jackpot result A is reached, “200” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC, and the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264. If the probability variation jackpot result is A in a situation where the winning is not, “160” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. Also, in the situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, when the probability variation jackpot result B is reached, “80” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC, and the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 264. When the probability variation jackpot result B is reached, “50” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. According to this configuration, in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the probability variation jackpot results A and B are obtained.

  In the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the normal jackpot results A and B are won as compared to the case where the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the normal jackpot results A and B are won. The value set in the upper limit counter PC may be increased. Specifically, in the situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, when the normal jackpot result is A, “150” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC, and the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264. In a situation where the result is a normal jackpot result A, “120” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. In the situation where the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 264, when the normal jackpot result is B, the winning upper limit counter PC is set to “100” and the high probability mode flag is not set in the RAM 264. When the normal jackpot result B is reached, “80” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC. Here, in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, when the normal jackpot results are A and B, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In this case, the player's motivation may be reduced. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the normal jackpot results A and B are more than the normal jackpot results A and B when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Also, the value set in the winning upper limit counter PC increases. Thereby, it becomes possible to suppress the stress that the lottery mode becomes from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

  (2) The value set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is not determined according to the type of the jackpot result, but the RAM 264 is determined according to the gaming state when the jackpot is won, for example. The values set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b may be different. Specifically, when the lottery mode is a high probability mode and a big win is won, “160” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC, and the lottery mode is a low probability mode and a big win is won. In this case, the winning upper limit counter PC may be set to “120”. According to this configuration, since the types of count numbers are reduced, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the count number of the current round game. In this configuration, the round game count is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result. In addition, in the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the value set in the winning upper limit counter PC is larger than the case where the lottery mode is the jackpot winning in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Good. Accordingly, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the lottery mode is the high probability mode in the situation where the big win is won.

  In addition, when the big win is won in the high frequency support mode regardless of the type of the lottery mode, “160” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC, and the big win is won in the low frequency support mode. In this case, the winning upper limit counter PC may be set to “120”. In this configuration, the round game count is the same regardless of the type of jackpot result.

  (3) Regardless of the type of jackpot result, the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is not limited to the same configuration. For example, the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a differs depending on the jackpot result. It is good also as composition which has. In this case, by continuing to operate the launch handle 28 for the duration of the opening of the big prize opening 222a, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a reaches the respective counts so that the number of the prize winning holes 222a is reached. It is good also as a structure by which the open duration is set. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player want to win a game ball in the big prize opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a elapses.

  (4) The count may be changed during the round game. In this case, it is good also as a structure by which the count number increase lottery process for determining whether to increase a count number during a round game is performed. In the case where the winning win in the count number increasing lottery process is won, the count number is changed. According to this configuration, since the count number may increase in the middle, it is possible to allow the player to play a game while expecting the count number to increase during the round game.

  (5) It is good also as a structure by which the count number of a round game is displayed on the display screen G. Specifically, a display area for displaying the count number is provided at the upper center of the display screen G, and the count number of the round game is displayed in the display area at the start of the round game. Further, the remaining count is displayed in the display area every time a prize is entered into the special winning opening 222a. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the remaining count number by visually recognizing the said display area. This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp the remaining count number in a situation where the count number of the loud game is large.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
The configuration of whether or not to continue the round game is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Configuration of variable winning device 222>
First, the configuration of the variable winning device 222 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78A is a longitudinal sectional view in which the variable winning device 222 is cut in the longitudinal direction so that the count hole 222l and the counting passage portion 400 in the fourteenth embodiment have a section, and FIG. 78B is continued. FIG. 78 (c) is a longitudinal sectional view of the variable prize winning device 222 cut in the longitudinal direction so that the hole 222m and the continuation passage portion 401 have a cross section, and FIG. 78 (c) continues in a state where the opening / closing door 222b and the front wall portion 222h are removed. FIG. 78 (d) is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining a situation in which the movable member 392 is inclined toward the hole 222m, and FIG. 78 (d) shows the movable member 392 on the count hole 222l side in a state where the opening / closing door 222b and the front wall portion 222h are removed. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the inclined condition.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), the variable winning device 222 is formed in a box shape, and includes a bottom plate portion 222e, a back wall portion 222f, a ceiling plate portion 222g, a front wall portion 222h, and a partition plate. The part 222i, the left side wall part 222j, and the right side wall part 222k are integrally formed.

  The variable winning device 222 includes the bottom plate portion 222e, the back wall portion 222f, the ceiling plate portion 222g, the front wall portion 222h, the partition plate portion 222i, the left side wall portion 222j, and the right side wall portion. 222k, and a predetermined internal space surrounded by 222k, and the internal space is divided into two front and rear portions by the partition plate portion 222i.

  The partition plate portion 222i is provided with two holes 222l and 222m that penetrate the partition plate portion 222i in the front-rear direction. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 78 (c) and 78 (d), a count hole 222l is provided on the left side of the partition plate portion 222i when viewed from the front, and a continuation hole 222m is formed on the right side of the partition plate portion 222i. Is provided. The shape and size of the count hole 222l and the continuation hole 222m are the same. Since the count hole 222l and the width and height of the continuation hole 222m are larger than the diameter of the game ball 160, the game ball 160 can win the count hole 222l and the continuation hole 222m.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), in the internal space provided in front of the partition plate portion 222i, the game ball 160 that has won the big prize opening 222a is placed in the count hole 222l and the continuation hole 222m. A seesaw 390 is provided for distribution to each other.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (c) and 78 (d), the seesaw 390 includes a support column 391 and a movable member 392. The support column 391 has a substantially rectangular shape and is provided on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 222e.

  A movable member 392 is provided at the upper center of the support column 391. The movable member 392 is formed of a member that is long in the lateral width direction of the special winning opening 222a. The upper surface of the movable member 392 is inclined downward toward the count hole 2221l and the continuation hole 222m with respect to the depth direction of the special winning opening 222a.

  The horizontal width of the movable member 392 is shorter than the horizontal width of the special winning opening 222a. Further, the width of the gap formed between the longitudinal ends of the movable member 392 and the left and right side wall portions 222j and 222k is shorter than the radius of the game ball 160. Therefore, the game ball 160 does not fall from the gap formed between the longitudinal ends of the movable member 392 and the left side wall part 222j and the right side wall part 222k.

  The depth of the movable member 392 is shorter than the length from the front wall portion 222h to the partition plate portion 222i. Further, the width of the gap formed between both ends of the movable member 392 in the width direction and the front wall portion 222h and the partition plate portion 222i is shorter than the radius of the game ball 160. Therefore, the game ball 160 does not fall from the gap formed between the width direction ends of the movable member 392 and the front wall portion 222h and the partition plate portion 222i.

  As described above, the upper surface of the movable member 392 is inclined downward toward the count hole 222l and the continuation hole 222m. Further, as described above, the game ball 160 may drop from the gap formed between the longitudinal ends of the movable member 392 and the left side wall portion 222j and the right side wall portion 222k, or the width direction of the movable member 392 may be reduced. The game ball 160 does not fall from a gap generated between both ends and the front wall portion 222h and the partition plate portion 222i. As a result, the game ball 160 released onto the movable member 392 can be awarded to either the count hole 222l or the continuation hole 222m.

  A rotating shaft 393 for rotating the movable member 392 is provided near the center of the vertical width of the movable member 392. The rotation shaft 393 is provided across the depth direction of the special winning opening 222a. The rotating shaft 393 is rotatably supported by a bearing 394 provided at the center upper portion of the support column 391.

  A rotation motor 395 as a drive source for rotating the rotation shaft 393 is provided at a position adjacent to the rotation shaft 393. By transmitting a drive signal from the main controller 260 to the rotary motor 395, the rotational force of the rotary motor 395 is transmitted to the rotary shaft 393.

  The movable member 392 is driven by a rotary motor 395 coupled to the rotary shaft 393, and is controlled to a left inclination as shown in FIG. 78 (d) after having a right inclination as shown in FIG. 78 (c). Thereafter, the operation is performed so as to incline alternately as shown in FIG. 78 (c) → FIG. 78 (d) → FIG. 78 (c) → FIG. 78 (d). The inclination angle of the movable member 392 is about 5 degrees from the horizontal state.

  Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, the height from the left end of the movable member 392 to the bottom plate portion 222e is lower than the height of the front wall portion 222h. Further, the height from the right end of the movable member 392 to the bottom plate portion 222e in the situation where the movable member 392 is inclined to the left is lower than the height of the front wall portion 222h. A large winning opening 222a is provided above the front wall portion 222h. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball 160 released onto the movable member 392 from rolling forward from the special winning opening 222a.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), when the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, the game ball 160 is likely to win the continuation hole 222m. Even when the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, the count hole 222l is not completely blocked by the movable member 392. Therefore, even when the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, the count hole 222l There is a possibility that the game ball 160 wins. Specifically, in the situation where the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the game ball 160 that has won the grand prize opening 222a rolls toward the count hole 222l at a speed that is not affected by the right inclination, There is a possibility that the game ball 160 will win the count hole 222l.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (d), when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 is likely to win the count hole 222l. Even when the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, the continuous hole 222m is not completely blocked by the movable member 392. Therefore, even in a situation where the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, the continuous hole 222m There is a possibility that the game ball 160 wins. Specifically, when the game ball 160 won in the grand prize opening 222a rolls at a speed not affected by the left inclination toward the continuous hole 222m, even in the situation where the movable member 392 is inclined left, There is a possibility that the game ball 160 will win the continuation hole 222m.

  The game ball 160 that has won a prize in any one of the holes 222l and 222m provided in the partition plate portion 222i is discharged into an internal space provided behind the partition plate portion 222i. The game ball 160 released into the internal space falls to the counting passage portion 400 or the continuing passage portion 401 that penetrates the bottom plate portion 222e in the vertical direction. Specifically, the game ball 160 won in the count hole 222l falls to the count passage portion 400, and the game ball 160 won in the continuation hole 222m falls to the continuation passage portion 401.

  As shown in FIGS. 78 (a) and 78 (b), a substantially flat sensor 400a for detecting that the game ball 160 has passed through the counting passage section 400 and the continuing passage section 401. , 401a are provided. Specifically, a counting sensor 400 a is provided in the middle of the counting passage portion 400, and a continuation sensor 401 a is provided in the middle of the continuing passage portion 401.

  Each of the sensors 400a and 401a is configured by a known magnetic detection type proximity sensor, and changes in the magnetic field caused by the game ball 160 passing through the through holes 400c and 401c of the detection units 400b and 401b are converted into electrical signals. Convert and output. The sensors 400a and 401a are not limited to magnetic detection type proximity sensors, and any sensor can be used as long as it can detect the game ball 160. For example, a photo sensor or a limit sensor may be used. . The sensors 400a and 401a output electrical signals to the main controller 260. Specifically, a LOW level signal is output when the game ball 160 is not detected, and an HI level signal is output when the game ball 160 is detected. The output level relationship may be reversed. The MPU 262 of the main controller 260 can specify the holes 222l and 222m in which the game ball 160 has won by specifying the sensors 400a and 401a from which the HI level signal is output.

  The game balls 160 that have fallen into any one of the passage portions 400 and 401 gather below the game board 210 via the collection passage 229a shown in FIG. As described above, there is a discharge passage below the game board 210, and the game balls 160 gathered below the game board 210 are led out into the discharge passage via the collection passage 229a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed, and the number of game balls 160 that have won the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 is large. As a result, the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the joy that the game ball 160 has won the grand prize opening 222 a and the expectation that the game ball 160 will win the continuation passage portion 401. Become.

  In addition, the more the game ball 160 launched by the player wins the continuation passage section 401 provided in the variable winning device 222, the higher the probability that the lottery process determines whether or not to continue the round game. . According to this configuration, when the round game is continued, it is possible to give the player joy that the player has been continuously elected with his own ability.

  Further, the game ball 160 falls into the continuation passage portion 401 by winning the continuation hole 222m provided in the partition plate portion 222i. Here, the continuation hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222 is visible to the player. That is, the player can grasp the probability of winning continuously by grasping the number of game balls 160 winning in the continuation hole 222m. Since it is possible to grasp the probability of a continuous winning, it is possible to make the player feel excited about the probability of the continuous winning. Specifically, if the player has a high probability of winning continuously, he / she feels secure that the player has a high probability of continuous winning, and if the player has a low probability of winning continuously, whether or not the player will continue to win. It is possible to give such a feeling of pounding to the player.

  In addition, as described above, there is a possibility that the game ball 160 will win any of the holes 222l and 222m regardless of the inclination direction of the movable member 392. Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the left (when the movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l), the movable member 392 is configured such that the game ball 160 wins only the count hole 222l. If the ball is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 cannot be expected to win the continuation hole 222m. In this regard, according to this configuration, even when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 may win the continuation hole 222m. Therefore, the game ball 160 wins the continuation hole 222m in any situation. It is possible to expect.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S4701, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4702, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is completed, it is determined in step S4703 whether or not the game result of the game times ended this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, “10” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4704. In the subsequent step S4705, seesaw driving start processing is executed. Specifically, output of a drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 operates. Thereby, the rotating shaft 393 rotates, and the movable member 392 moves to the left and right as shown in FIGS. 78 (c) and 78 (d).

  After executing the process of step S4705, the processes of step S4706 to step S4707 are executed. The processing from Step S4706 to Step S4707 is the same as the processing from Step S3515 to Step S3516.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S4701: YES), in step S4608, the big prize opening opening / closing process is executed. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 222a is open. If the big prize opening 222a is not open, it is determined in step S4802 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening releasing process from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S4802, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4802, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the round non-continuation flag is set in the RAM 264. The round non-continuation flag is a flag for specifying that the continuous non-winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game described later in the MPU 262. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where an effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4803, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4803, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S4804. In the special prize opening process, “6000” is set in the timer counter T, and the variable prize driving unit 222c is driven and controlled so that the special prize opening 222a is opened. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 12 sec after the timer counter T is set to “6000”.

  After executing the process of step S4804, the process of step S4805 is executed. The processing in step S4805 is the same as the processing in step S3605.

  On the other hand, if the special winning opening 222a is being opened (step S4801: YES), it is determined in step S4806 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4806, it is determined in step S4807 whether or not the game ball 160 has won a prize winning opening 222a. Specifically, it is determined whether the HI level signal is received from the counting sensor 400a or the continuation sensor 401a. When the game ball 160 has not won the big prize opening 222a, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  Here, the reading process executed in step S3001 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, the processing from step S4901 to step S4904 is the same as the processing from step S4401 to step S4404.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4903, or if the process of step S4904 is executed, it is determined in step S4905 whether an HI level signal is received from the counting sensor 400a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4905, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4906.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4905, or if the process of step S4906 is executed, it is determined in step S4907 whether an HI level signal is received from the continuation sensor 401a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4907, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4908, and the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is added. Add one. The continuous lottery counter is a counter for specifying the number of game balls 160 winning in the continuation hole 222m by the MPU 262.

  Returning to the description of the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 80), when an affirmative determination is made in step S4807, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1 in step S4808. In subsequent step S4809, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4806 or an affirmative determination is made in step S4809, the processing of step S4810 to step S4811 is executed. The processing in steps S4810 to S4811 is the same as the processing in steps S3610 to S3611.

  After executing the processing of step S4811, the value of the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is grasped in step S4812. In subsequent step S4813, the continuous lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuous lottery counter is read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264. The continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. In the continuous lottery table, the result of continuous winning or continuous non-winning and the numerical range of the lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 are set in a one-to-one correspondence. The lottery counter is configured so that, for example, one by one is added in the range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, the lottery counter returns to zero. The lottery counter is used to specify the lottery result. FIG. 82 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various continuous lottery tables.

  As shown in FIG. 82, when the continuous lottery counter is “0”, the probability of continuous winning is 1%, and when the continuous lottery counter is “1”, the probability of continuous winning is 10%. When the continuous lottery counter is “2”, the probability of continuous winning is 20%. When the continuous lottery counter is “3”, the probability of continuous winning is 30%. When the continuous lottery counter is “4”, the probability of continuous winning is 40%. When the continuous lottery counter is “5”, the probability of continuous winning is 50%. Is “6”, the probability of continuous winning is 60%. If the counter for continuous lottery is “7”, the probability of continuous winning is 70%, and the counter for continuous lottery is “8”. , The probability of winning continuously is 80%, If the serial continuation lottery for the counter is "9", the probability of continued winning is 90%, if the continuation lottery for the counter is equal to or greater than "10", the probability of continued winning is 99%.

  The larger the value of the continuous lottery counter is, the higher the probability of continuous winning is set. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the number of game balls 160 that have won a prize in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 is large.

  When the continuous lottery counter is “0”, the probability of continuous winning is set to 1%. Here, when the continuous lottery counter is set to “0”, when the probability of continuous winning is set to 0%, no game ball 160 has won a prize in the continuous hole 222m. When the player specifies, the player knows that the round game does not continue. In this case, it becomes impossible to attract a player whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to this configuration, there is a possibility that even if the continuous lottery counter is “0”, the continuous winning is achieved. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to attract players to whether or not the round game will continue even in a situation where the continuous lottery counter is “0”.

  Further, when the continuous lottery counter is “10” or more, the probability of continuous winning is set to 99%. Here, when the continuous lottery counter is equal to or greater than “10”, and the probability that the winning is continued is set to 100%, it means that ten game balls 160 have won the continuation hole 222m. At the stage specified by the player, the player knows that the round game will continue. In this case, it becomes impossible to attract a player whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to the present configuration, there is a possibility that a continuous non-winning may occur even when the continuous lottery counter is “10” or more. With this configuration, it is possible to attract a player to whether or not the round game will continue even in a situation where the continuous lottery counter is “10” or more.

  Further, as described above, according to the present embodiment, the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a is set to 12 sec. As described above, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball 160 is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, in the positional relationship between the big prize opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big prize opening 222a, the game ball 160 rolling around the big prize opening 222a wins the big prize opening 222a. The proportion is approximately 50%. In other words, if the firing handle 28 is not operated for 12 seconds, which is the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a, it is unlikely that the continuous lottery counter becomes “10” or more. Since the player wants to refer to the lottery table with the highest probability of continuous winning, there is a high possibility that the firing handle 28 will continue to be operated until the opening time of the big prize opening 222a elapses. According to this configuration, the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds, so that the player can win the game ball 160 to the big winning opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a elapses. It makes it possible to make you want.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 80), after the process of step S4813 is executed, a lottery process is executed in step S4814. Specifically, the value of the lottery counter that is periodically updated (for example, 2 msec) in the RAM 264 is read out, and the value of the lottery counter is checked against the continuous lottery table read out in the RAM 264.

  When the round is continuously won (step S4815: YES), “10” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S4816 and provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The timer counter T is set to “500”, and the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4815, a round non-continuation flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S4817. The round non-continuation flag is a flag for the MPU 262 to specify that the round has not been continued in the lottery process executed in step S4814.

  After executing the process of step S4817, the processes of step S4818 to step S4819 are executed. The processing in steps S4818 to S4819 is the same as the processing in steps S3617 to S3618.

  After executing the processing of step S4819, the counter for continuous lottery provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to “0” in step S4820. Thereafter, a seesaw drive end process is executed in step S4821. Specifically, in order to stop the operation of the movable member 392, the output of the drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is stopped.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 79), after the process of step S4708 is executed, it is determined in step S4709 whether or not the timer counter T is “0”. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing from step S47111 to step S4712 from being executed in a situation where the special winning opening 222a is in an open state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4709, it is determined in step S4710 whether or not the round non-continuation flag is set in the RAM 264. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing from step S47111 to step S4712 from being performed in a situation where the round non-continuation flag is not set in the RAM 264.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4710, the processing in steps S4711 to S4712 is executed. The processing in steps S4711 to S4712 is the same as the processing in steps S3520 to S3521. In the present embodiment, there are only two types of jackpot results, the normal jackpot result and the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S4712, the normal jackpot result set in the RAM 264 is set. Of the jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag, the stored flag is erased. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result. The probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result. Further, the round non-continuation flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S4712.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed, and the number of game balls 160 that have won the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 is large. As a result, the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the joy that the game ball 160 has won the grand prize opening 222 a and the expectation that the game ball 160 will win the continuation passage portion 401. Become.

  In addition, the more the game ball 160 launched by the player wins the continuation passage section 401 provided in the variable winning device 222, the higher the probability that the lottery process determines whether or not to continue the round game. . According to this configuration, when the round game is continued, it is possible to give the player joy that the player has been continuously elected with his own ability.

  Further, the game ball 160 falls into the continuation passage portion 401 by winning the continuation hole 222m provided in the partition plate portion 222i. Here, the continuation hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222 is visible to the player. That is, the player can grasp the probability of winning continuously by grasping the number of game balls 160 winning in the continuation hole 222m. Since it is possible to grasp the probability of a continuous winning, it is possible to make the player feel excited about the probability of the continuous winning. Specifically, if the player has a high probability of winning continuously, he / she feels secure that the player has a high probability of continuous winning, and if the player has a low probability of winning continuously, whether or not the player will continue to win. It is possible to give such a feeling of pounding to the player.

  Further, there is a possibility that the game ball 160 will win any of the holes 222l and 222m regardless of the inclination direction of the movable member 392. Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the left (when the movable member 392 is inclined toward the count hole 222l), the movable member 392 is configured such that the game ball 160 wins only the count hole 222l. If the ball is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 cannot be expected to win the continuation hole 222m. In this regard, according to this configuration, even when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left, the game ball 160 may win the continuation hole 222m. Therefore, the game ball 160 wins the continuation hole 222m in any situation. It is possible to expect.

  Also, when there is no number of winnings in the continuing passage section 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 (when the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”), the round game A lottery process for determining whether or not to continue is performed. Here, when the continuous lottery counter is set to “0”, when the probability of continuous winning is set to 0%, no game ball 160 has won a prize in the continuous hole 222m. When the player specifies, the player knows that the round game does not continue. In this case, it becomes impossible to attract a player whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the round game may continue even when the continuous lottery counter is “0”. Thereby, even in a situation where the continuous lottery counter is “0”, it is possible to attract the player to whether or not the round game is continued.

  Further, when the continuous lottery counter is “10” or more, the probability of continuous winning is set to 99%. Here, when the continuous lottery counter is equal to or greater than “10”, and the probability that the winning is continued is set to 100%, it means that ten game balls 160 have won the continuation hole 222m. At the stage specified by the player, the player knows that the round game will continue. In this case, it becomes impossible to attract a player whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to the present configuration, there is a possibility that a continuous non-winning may occur even when the continuous lottery counter is “10” or more. With this configuration, it is possible to attract a player to whether or not the round game will continue even in a situation where the continuous lottery counter is “10” or more.

<Another example of the fourteenth embodiment>
(1) The movable member 392 is not limited to performing a certain operation. For example, the movable member 392 may be configured to operate irregularly. Accordingly, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the movable member 392 as compared to the case where the movable member 392 performs a certain operation.

(2) The continuous winning probability is not limited to the configuration in which the value of the continuous lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is changed. For example, the total number (the count) of the game balls 160 that have won the big winning opening 222a. The number of game balls 160 won in the aisle section 400,
The continuous winning probability may be changed according to the ratio of the number of game balls 160 won in the continuation passage portion 401 to the total number of game balls 160 won in the continuation passage portion 401). In this case, it is good also as a structure where a continuous winning probability becomes high, so that the said ratio is large. Here, even if the firing handle 28 is continuously operated, the prize winning to the prize winning opening 222a is determined by the positional relationship between the prize winning opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the prize winning opening 222a. There is a possibility that the number will decrease. In this regard, according to the present configuration, since the continuous winning probability varies depending on the ratio between the total number of winning prizes at the prize winning opening 222a and the number of winning prizes at the continuing passage section 401, winning at the big winning prize opening 222a is possible. Even in situations where the total number is small, it can be expected to continue winning.

  (3) When the number of winnings in the continuation passage portion 401 exceeds 10, the configuration may be such that the round game is always continued. By setting the number of winnings that will determine that the round game will continue, the player may specify that the round game will continue when the number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 exceeds 10. It becomes possible. Thereby, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the continuing round game.

  (4) Even when the number of winning prizes in the continuation passage section 401 exceeds 10, the continuation winning probability may be increased as the number of winning prizes in the continuation passage section 401 increases. In this case, a lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game in a situation where the special winning opening 222a is closed. According to this configuration, the greater the number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401, the higher the probability of continued winning. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 is large. It becomes.

  (5) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed even if the game ball 160 does not win the continuation passage portion 401. When 160 does not win, it is good also as a structure by which the lottery process of whether to continue a round game is not performed. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to heighten a sense of excitement when the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401.

  (6) Even if the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 may not be subtracted. In this configuration, when the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401, the game ball 160 may be paid out. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the advantage of the situation where the game ball 160 wins the continuation passage portion 401.

  (7) It is good also as a structure where the lottery process of whether to continue a round game is performed whenever the winning to the passage part 401 for continuation generate | occur | produces. In the case that the lottery process is a continuous non-winning, the round game is ended. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to make a player throbbing whether a round game continues whenever a prize to the passage part 401 for continuation generate | occur | produces. Further, in this configuration, the probability that a continuous winning is increased in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game may be increased as winnings to the continuation passage unit 401 are continuously generated. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where the winning to the passage part 401 for continuation generate | occur | produced continuously.

  Further, in the configuration in which a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is performed every time a winning in the continuation passage part 401 occurs, the more the total number of winnings in the continuation passage part 401 increases, It is good also as a structure with a high probability of winning continuously. Specifically, when the total number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 is one, the probability of continuation winning in the lottery process is 10%, and the total number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 is two. In this case, the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process is 20%, and if the total number of winnings in the continuing passage unit 401 is 3 or more, the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process is 30%. Also good. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many winnings total to the passage part 401 for continuation.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the lottery process of whether to continue a round game is performed, whenever a some winning is produced | generated to the channel | path part 401 for continuation. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise interest with respect to the number of winnings to the passage part 401 for continuation. Further, in this configuration, the probability that the continuous winning is increased in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game may be increased as the number of times a plurality of winnings are generated in the continuation passage portion 401 is increased. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many frequency | counts where several winnings generate | occur | produced to the passage part 401 for continuation.

  (8) Whether or not to continue the round game with the number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 before the start of the round game, or the lottery processing based on the number of winnings into the counting passage unit 400 The player may select whether or not to perform. Specifically, before the round game is started, a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game with the number of winnings in the continuing passage unit 401 is performed, or the number of winnings in the counting passage unit 400 is rounded. A screen for selecting whether to perform a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the game is displayed on the display screen G. The player uses the selection button provided on the upper bulging portion 75 to select the lottery process target. According to this configuration, the player can select a lottery process target to determine whether or not to continue the round game. Therefore, when the round game continues, the round game continues with the player's own power. It will be possible to give joy to what you did. If the round game is not continued, it can be convinced that the round game has not been continued.

  (9) The configuration for distributing the game balls won to the big prize opening 222a to either the count hole 222l or the continuation hole 222m is not limited to the seesaw 390, and the game balls won to the big prize opening 222a are counted. Any structure can be used as long as it can be distributed to either 222l or continuation hole 222m. Specifically, for example, the variable winning device 222 may be configured to include a croon. The croon may include a continuation hole and a count hole, and a lottery process may be performed to determine whether or not to continue the round game when a winning in the continuation hole occurs. Further, in this case, as the number of winning prizes in the continuation hole is larger, the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game may increase the probability of continuation winning. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many winning prizes to the said continuing hole.

  (10) The variable winning device 222 is not provided with the continuation hole 222m and the continuation passage portion 401, and a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game in accordance with the number of game balls 160 won in the big winning opening 222a. It is good also as a structure from which the probability which becomes a continuous winning in differs. Here, if the probability of continuation winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the number of winnings in the continuation passage portion 401 is different, the location where the continuation hole 222m is provided is accurately set. Otherwise, it is impossible to accurately grasp the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process. In this regard, according to the present configuration, it is possible to specify the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game only by specifying the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process.

  In addition, the variable winning device 222 is not provided with the continuation hole 222m and the continuation passage portion 401, and in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the number of game balls 160 won in the big winning opening 222a. In the configuration in which the probability of continuous winning is different, the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process may be higher as the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is larger. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a.

  (11) The probabilities of continuous winning may be different in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the total number of winning prizes in the continuation passage section 401 in a plurality of round games. In this case, unless the total number of winning prizes in the continuation passage section 401 is constantly grasped, it is not possible to specify the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the total number of winning prizes in the continuation passage portion 401. Further, in the configuration in which the probability of continuation winning is different in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the total number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 in a plurality of round games, the winning of the continuation passage unit 401 is made. The larger the total number, the higher the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where the total number of winning prizes to the said continuing passage part 401 is large.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
The configuration of whether or not to continue the round game is different from that of the fourteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the fourteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fifteenth embodiment.

  First, in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S5002, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern on the main display portion 233 of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S5003 whether or not the game result of the game time that has been finished this time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the current game result is any jackpot result. If it does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, “10” is set in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5004, and provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. “10” is set in the winning upper limit counter PC.

  If the count hole control flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5005, the count hole control flag is cleared to “0”. The count hole control flag is a flag for specifying that the movable member 392 is inclined to the left in the MPU 262.

  In the subsequent step S5006, the seesaw 390 is driven and controlled so that it is easy to win a continuation hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222. Specifically, output of the first drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. In the present embodiment, the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left and the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the left to the right is set to about 0.5 sec. Further, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In other words, there is a possibility that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a may occur 0.6 seconds after the winning to the current big winning opening 222a. Here, when the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left and the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the left to the right is set to be longer than 0.5 sec, In a situation where the firing handle 28 is being operated by the player, winning in the grand prize winning port 222a may occur while the movable member 392 is tilted in the tilt direction corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big winning hole 222a. There is sex. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left and the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the left to the right is set to 0.5 sec. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning of the big winning opening 222a from occurring while the movable member 392 is tilted in the inclination direction corresponding to the number of winning winning openings 222a. Even if the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the count hole 222l.

  In step S5007, a continuous hole control flag is set in the RAM 264. The continuation hole control flag is a flag for specifying that the movable member 392 is inclined rightward in the MPU 262.

  The subsequent processes in steps S5008 to S5009 are the same as the processes in steps S4706 to S4707.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress (step S5001: YES), the process proceeds to step S5010. In step S5010, a special winning opening / closing process is executed. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, the processing in steps S5101 to S5102 is the same as the processing in steps S4801 to S4802.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5102, it is determined whether an ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5103. The ending flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 transmits an ending command. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where an effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231. .

  After executing the process of step S5103, the processes of steps S5104 to S5105 are executed. The processing from Step S5104 to Step S5105 is the same as the processing from Step S4804 to Step S4805.

  If it is determined that the big prize opening 222a is open (step S5101: YES), it is determined in step S5106 whether the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5106, it is determined in step S5107 whether or not a game ball has won a prize winning opening 222a. Specifically, it is determined whether the HI level signal is received from the counting sensor 400a or the continuation sensor 401a. When the game ball has not won the big prize opening 222a, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5107, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1 in step S5108. In subsequent step S5109, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5109, a special winning opening control process is executed in step S5110. The special winning opening control process will be described with reference to FIG. The special winning opening control process is a process for controlling the seesaw 390 provided in the variable winning device 222. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening control process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S5201, the round counter RC is “10” and the winning upper limit counter PC is “9” or less, the round counter RC is “9” and the winning upper limit counter PC is “8” or less, and the round counter RC Is “8” and the winning upper limit counter PC is “7” or less, the round counter RC is “7” and the winning upper limit counter PC is “6” or less, the round counter RC is “6” and the winning upper limit counter PC. Is “5” or less, the round counter RC is “5” and the winning upper limit counter PC is “4” or less, the round counter RC is “4” and the winning upper limit counter PC is “3” or less, and the round counter RC is Is "3" and the winning upper limit counter PC is "2" or less, the round counter RC is "2" and the winning is Limit counter PC is "1", or determining whether the round counter RC is "1".

  In the present embodiment, the inclination direction of the movable member 392 is different according to the number of rounds and the number of counts. The inclination direction of the movable member 392 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the inclination direction of the movable member 392 according to the number of rounds and the number of counts.

  First, when the number of rounds is 1R (round counter RC is “10”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 (the upper limit of the winning prize counter PC is “10”), the movable member 392 tilts to the right (movable) When the member 392 is inclined toward the continuation hole 222m) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 1 or more (the winning upper limit counter PC is “9” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left (movable member). 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 1R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is one.

  Further, when the number of rounds is 2R (round counter RC is “9”) and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 1 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “9” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. When the movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 2 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “8” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 2R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is two.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is 3R (round counter RC is “8”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 2 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “8” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. When the movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 3 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “7” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 3R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is three.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is 4R (round counter RC is “7”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 3 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “7” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. (The movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side), and when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 4 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “6” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 4R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is four.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is 5R (round counter RC is “6”) and the number of winning a prize winning opening 222a is 4 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “6” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. When the movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 5 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “5” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 5R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is 5 times.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is 6R (round counter RC is “5”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 5 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “5” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. (The movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side), and when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 6 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “4” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 6R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is six.

  In addition, when the number of rounds is 7R (round counter RC is “4”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 6 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “4” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. (The movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side), and when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 7 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “3” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 7R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is seven.

  Further, when the number of rounds is 8R (round counter RC is “3”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 7 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “3” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. When the movable member 392 is inclined toward the continuation hole 222m and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 8 or more (the prize upper limit counter PC is “2” or less), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left ( The movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 8R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is eight.

  Further, when the number of rounds is 9R (round counter RC is “2”) and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 8 or less (the winning upper limit counter PC is “2” or more), the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. When the movable member 392 is inclined to the continuation hole 222m side and the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is nine (the prize upper limit counter PC is “1”), the movable member 392 is inclined to the left (movable member 392 is inclined to the count hole 222l side). When the number of rounds is 9R, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is nine. Further, when the number of rounds is 10R (round counter RC is “1”), since the round game does not continue to the next round game, the movable member 392 always tilts to the left.

  According to this configuration, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right increases as the number of rounds progresses. Therefore, as the round game progresses, the possibility that a game ball will win the continuation hole 222m increases. Therefore, the round game is easily continued as the round game progresses. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation where the number of times that the round game has continued is large.

  In addition, the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is not generated a plurality of times across the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, but the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated in a collective manner. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, the game ball can be expected to win the continuation hole 222m more than when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left. If it is tilted, the player feels frustrated. In this configuration, the number of times the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left is one, and therefore the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated a plurality of times with the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left. Compared to the configuration, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left is small. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the player from getting frustrated.

  In addition, the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is not generated a plurality of times with the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, but the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated collectively. Therefore, a state where a game ball is likely to win a prize continuously occurs in the continuation hole 222m. Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, it cannot be expected that the game ball wins the continuation hole 222m. Therefore, every time the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left, the feeling of expecting the game ball to win the continuation hole 222m is weakened. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the periods in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right are gathered, it is possible to maintain a state in which a sense of expectation for winning in the continuation hole 222m is enhanced for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of uplifting.

  In addition, a state in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right continuously occurs from the state where the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is zero. Here, the player decides that the round game will continue at an early stage, and wants to play the remaining round games with peace of mind. According to this configuration, a state in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right continuously occurs from the state where the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is zero. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a winning in the continuation hole 222m will occur in a situation where the number of winnings in the large winning opening 222a is small. Therefore, it becomes possible to meet the needs of the player.

  Further, when the number of rounds is 10R, the directions of the movable members 392 are all set to the left slope. In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of rounds is set to 10R, when the number of rounds is 10R, the round game does not continue. The movable member 392 is set to be inclined at least once until the number of rounds is 1R to 9R. When the number of rounds is 1R to 9R, the round game may continue. Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the right in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R, the player may mistakenly think that the round game may still continue. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the number of rounds is 10R, the directions of the movable members 392 are all set to the left inclination, and therefore do not become the right inclination. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the round game will not continue any longer in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5202 whether or not the continuous hole control flag is set in the RAM 264. The continuation hole control flag is a flag for specifying that the movable member 392 is inclined rightward in the MPU 262 as described above. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5202, the main prize winning opening control process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5202, the count hole control flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0” in step S5203. In subsequent step S5204, the seesaw 390 is driven and controlled so that the game ball can easily win a continuation hole 222m provided in the variable winning device 222. Specifically, as described above, the output of the first drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right. In subsequent step S5205, the continuation hole control flag is set in the RAM 264, and the main prize winning opening control process is ended.

  On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, it is determined in step S5206 whether or not the count hole control flag is set in the RAM 264. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5206, the main prize winning opening control process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5206, the continuation hole control flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0” in step S5207, and the game ball wins the count hole 222l provided in the variable winning device 222 in step S5208. The seesaw 390 is driven and controlled so as to be easy. Specifically, the output of the second drive signal to the rotary motor 395 is started so that the movable member 392 is inclined to the left. Even if the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, there is a possibility that a game ball will win the continuation hole 222m. In the subsequent step S5209, the count hole control flag is set in the RAM 264, and the main prize winning opening control process is ended.

  Here, the reading process executed in step S3001 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, the processing in steps S5301 to S5304 is the same as the processing in steps S4401 to S4404.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5303, or if the process of step S5304 is executed, it is determined in step S5305 whether an HI level signal is received from the counting sensor 400a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5305, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5306.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5305, or if the process of step S5306 is executed, it is determined in step S5307 whether an HI level signal is received from the continuation sensor 401a. If a negative determination is made in step S5307, the main reading process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5307, it is determined in step S5308 whether or not the continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264. The continuation winning flag is a flag for specifying that a game ball has entered the continuation hole 222m in the current round game at the MPU 262. If a negative determination is made in step S5308, a continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5309, and 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. In the present embodiment, the winning in the continuing hole 222m occurs, the winning in the continuing passage portion 401 is generated, and it is determined that the round game is continued. The continuation hole 222m is visible to the player. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to heighten a player's sense of excitement by making a player visually recognize the moment when it is decided that a round game will continue.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5308, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5310. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5308, the continuous winning flag is not set in the RAM 264 in step S5310. Therefore, by providing step S5308, it is possible to prevent the continuous winning flag from being set again in a situation where the continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264.

  Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process (FIG. 84), when the process of step S5110 is executed, the big prize opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5106 or an affirmative determination is made in step S5109, the processes in steps S5111 to S5112 are executed. The processing in steps S5111 to S5112 is the same as the processing in steps S4810 to S4811.

  After the processing of step S5112, the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1 in step S5113. In step S5114, it is determined whether or not the round counter RC is “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5114, it is determined in step S5115 whether or not a continuous winning is made in the current round game. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the continuous winning flag is set in the RAM 264.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5115, “500” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5116, and the prize upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is set. “10” is set, and the continuous winning flag set in the RAM 264 is erased.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5114 or a negative determination is made in step S5115, the processing in steps S5117 to S5118 is executed. The processing from Step S5117 to Step S5118 is the same as the processing from Step S4818 to Step S4819.

  When the process of step S5118 is executed, an ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5119, and the main prize winning opening / closing process ends. The ending flag is a flag for specifying that the ending command is transmitted by the MPU 262 as described above.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 83), when the process of step S5010 is executed, it is determined in step S5011 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. To do. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the processes in steps S5013 to S5014 from being executed in the situation where the special winning opening 222a is in the open state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5011, it is determined in step S5012 whether or not the ending flag is set in the RAM 264. If the ending flag is not set in the RAM 264, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing in steps S5013 to S5014 from being executed even though the display screen G has not been notified that the opening / closing execution mode has ended. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5012, the processing of step S5013 to step S5014 is executed. The processing in steps S5013 to S5014 is the same as the processing in steps S4711 to S4712. In the present embodiment, the ending flag set in the RAM 264 is deleted in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S5014.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, the number of times that the movable member 392 tilts to the right increases as the number of rounds progresses. Therefore, as the round game progresses, the possibility that a game ball will win the continuation hole 222m increases. Therefore, the round game is easily continued as the round game progresses. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation where the number of times that the round game has continued is large.

  In addition, the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is not generated a plurality of times across the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, but the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated in a collective manner. Here, when the movable member 392 is tilted to the right, the game ball can be expected to win the continuation hole 222m more than when the movable member 392 is tilted to the left. If it is tilted, the player feels frustrated. In this configuration, the number of times the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left is one, and therefore the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated a plurality of times with the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left. Compared to the configuration, the number of times that the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left is small. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent the player from getting frustrated.

  In addition, the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is not generated a plurality of times with the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, but the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated collectively. Therefore, a state where a game ball is likely to win a prize continuously occurs in the continuation hole 222m. Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the left, it cannot be expected that the game ball wins the continuation hole 222m. Therefore, every time the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left, the feeling of expecting the game ball to win the continuation hole 222m is weakened. In this respect, according to the present configuration, since the periods in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right are gathered, it is possible to maintain a state in which a sense of expectation for winning in the continuation hole 222m is enhanced for a long period of time. As a result, it is possible to enhance the player's feeling of uplifting.

  In addition, a state in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right continuously occurs from the state where the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a is zero. Here, the player decides that the round game will continue at an early stage, and wants to play the remaining round games with peace of mind. According to this configuration, a state in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right continuously occurs from the state where the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is zero. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a winning in the continuation hole 222m will occur in a situation where the number of winnings in the large winning opening 222a is small. Therefore, it becomes possible to meet the needs of the player.

  Further, when the number of rounds is 10R, the directions of the movable members 392 are all set to the left slope. In this embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of rounds is set to 10R, when the number of rounds is 10R, the round game does not continue. The movable member 392 is set to be inclined at least once until the number of rounds is 1R to 9R. When the number of rounds is 1R to 9R, the round game may continue. Here, when the movable member 392 is inclined to the right in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R, the player may mistakenly think that the round game may still continue. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the number of rounds is 10R, the directions of the movable members 392 are all set to the left inclination, and therefore do not become the right inclination. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that the round game will not continue any longer in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R.

  The time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left and the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the left to the right is set to about 0.5 sec. Further, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In other words, there is a possibility that a winning to the next big winning opening 222a may occur 0.6 seconds after the winning to the current big winning opening 222a. Here, when the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left and the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the left to the right is set to be longer than 0.5 sec, In a situation where the firing handle 28 is being operated by the player, winning in the grand prize winning port 222a may occur while the movable member 392 is tilted in the tilt direction corresponding to the number of winning prizes in the big winning hole 222a. There is sex. In that respect, according to the present configuration, the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left and the time until the movable member 392 is inclined from the left to the right is set to 0.5 sec. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning of the big winning opening 222a from occurring while the movable member 392 is tilted in the inclination direction corresponding to the number of winning winning openings 222a.

  In addition, the variable winning device 222 is provided with a count hole 222l and a continuation hole 222m. When a winning is generated in the continuation hole 222m, a winning is generated in the continuation passage portion 401, and the round game is performed. It is decided to continue. The continuation hole 222m is visible to the player. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to heighten a player's sense of excitement by making a player visually recognize the moment when it is decided that a round game will continue.

<Another example of the fifteenth embodiment>
(1) The inclination angle of the movable member 392 may be not constant. Specifically, as the round game progresses, the inclination angle of the movable member 392 may be steep with respect to the continuation hole 222m. By setting it as the said structure, the probability that a game ball will win in continuation hole 222m will become high as a round game progresses. Therefore, it is possible to expect the round game to continue each time the round game continues.

  (2) Depending on the type of the jackpot result, the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a that is an opportunity to change the movable member 392 in each round game from the right inclination to the left inclination may be different. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result may be configured to have a larger number of winnings at the big winning opening 222a that triggers the change of the movable member 392 from the right tilt to the left tilt than the normal jackpot result. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of being a probable big hit result.

  (3) When a plurality of game balls are won in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222, the round game may be continued, and another specification may be given. Specifically, for example, in the next round game, the movable member 392 may have a configuration in which the number of winnings in which the movable member 392 is inclined from the right to the left increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where a plurality of game balls are won in the continuation passage portion 401.

  (4) In a situation where the actual winning number to the big winning opening 222a has not reached the winning number to the big winning opening 222a that triggers the movable member 392 to change from the right inclination to the left inclination, In the case where a winning in the provided continuation passage 401 occurs, the movable member 392 may be changed from the right inclination to the left inclination. According to this configuration, in a situation where the actual number of winnings at the big winning opening 222a has not reached the winning number at the large winning opening 222a, which is an opportunity to change the movable member 392 from the right inclination to the left inclination, the movable member If 392 is tilted to the left, the round game will continue. As a result, it is possible to specify whether or not the round game will continue by specifying not only the winning in the continuation hole 222m but also the inclination direction of the movable member 392.

  (5) The continuation passage provided in the variable winning device 222 is not limited to the configuration in which the round game continues by winning the game ball in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222. It is good also as a structure where the lottery process of whether to perform a next round game is performed whenever a game ball wins the part 401. FIG. According to this configuration, the round game does not always continue even if a winning in the continuation passage portion 401 occurs. Therefore, when a winning in the continuation passage portion 401 occurs, the continuous winning is performed in the lottery process. The player can be thrilled by whether or not. Moreover, in the said structure, when the winning to the said continuing channel | path part 401 generate | occur | produces in the condition where it was a continuous winning in the said lottery process, it is good also as a structure which gives a privilege to a player. Specifically, for example, in the next round game, it may be configured such that the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a that becomes an opportunity to change the movable member 392 from the right inclination to the left inclination increases. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the game ball 160 has won the continuation passage section 401 in the situation where the continuous winning is made in the lottery process.

  Further, in a configuration in which a lottery process for determining whether or not to play the next round game is performed every time a game ball wins in the continuation passage section 401 provided in the variable winning device 222, the total number of winnings in the continuation passage section 401 is performed. It is good also as a structure where the probability which becomes a continuous winning in the said lottery process becomes high, so that it increases. Specifically, when the total number of winnings in the continuation passage section 401 in one round game is one, the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process is 10%, and the total number of winnings in the big winning opening 222a is If there are two, the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process is 20%, and if the total number of winnings to the big prize opening 222a is three or more, the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process is 30%. It is good also as a certain structure. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where there are many winnings total to the passage part 401 for continuation.

  (6) In a situation where the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is greater than 0, a state in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right may be continuously generated. Specifically, in 1R, the number of prizes received in the grand prize opening 222a is nine, so that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, and in 2R, the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a is eight or more. The movable member 392 is inclined to the right, and in 3R, the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a is 7 or more, so that the movable member 392 is inclined in the right direction, and in 4R, the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a is 6 or more. As a result, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, and in 5R, the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a is 5 or more, so that the movable member 392 is inclined in the right direction, and in 6R, the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a. 4 or more, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, and in 7R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 3 or more. In R, the movable member 392 tilts to the right when the number of prizes received at the big prize opening 222a is two or more, and in 9R, the movable member 392 becomes one when the number of prizes received at the big prize opening 222a is one or more. It is good also as a structure which becomes right inclination. According to the configuration, the winning in the continuation hole 222m is delayed as compared to the configuration in which the state in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is continuously generated from the state where the number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a is zero. Probability is high. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled for a long time whether or not the round game is continued.

  (7) A lottery process for determining the direction in which the movable member 392 tilts may be performed each time a game ball wins the counting passage section 400 and the continuation passage section 401. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the direction in which the movable member 392 is inclined, as compared with the configuration in which the direction in which the movable member 392 is inclined is determined according to the number of winning prizes in the special winning opening 222a. It becomes possible. Further, as the round game progresses in the configuration, in the lottery process for determining the direction in which the movable member 392 is inclined, the probability that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right may be increased.

  (8) Even if a game ball is won in the continuation passage 401, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 may not be subtracted. In this configuration, when a game ball wins the continuation passage portion 401, the game ball may be paid out. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where the game ball won the said passage part 401 for continuation.

  (9) Even when the number of rounds is 10R, the movable member 392 may be inclined rightward. In this configuration, a special image may be displayed on the display screen G when a winning in the continuation passage portion 401 occurs. The special image is displayed on the display screen G only when a winning in the continuation passage section 401 occurs in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R. According to this configuration, even in a situation where the number of rounds is 10R, it is possible to expect a winning to the continuation passage portion 401 to occur.

  (10) The present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is generated. The period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is sandwiched by the period in which the movable member 392 is inclined to the left. It is good also as a structure generated several times. Specifically, the following configuration may be used. In 1R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is zero, and the movable member 392 is inclined to the left when the number of winning prizes is other than that. In 2R, the movable member 392 is tilted to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 and 2, and the movable member 392 is tilted to the left when the number of winning prizes is other than that. In 3R, the movable member 392 is tilted to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0, 2, and 4, and the movable member 392 is tilted to the left when the number of winning prizes is other than that. . In 4R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0, 2, 4, and 6, and the movable member 392 is left when the other winning numbers are obtained. Inclined. In 5R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0, 2, 4, 6, and 8, and the movable member 392 is tilted to the right. 392 becomes a left slope. In 6R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 to 2, 4, 6, and 8, and the movable member 392 is tilted to the right. 392 becomes a left slope. In 7R, when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 to 4, 6, and 8, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right, and when the number of winnings is other than that, the movable member 392 is left. Inclined. In 8R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 to 6 and 8, and the movable member 392 is inclined to the left when the winning numbers are other than that. . In 9R, the movable member 392 is inclined to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 0 to 7 and 9, and the movable member 392 is inclined to the left when the number of winning prizes is other than that. . According to this configuration, it is possible not only to pay attention to whether or not the round game continues, but also to increase the degree of attention to the operation of the movable member 392.

  (11) At the start of each round game, the movable member 392 is set to be tilted to the left, and the movable member 392 may be tilted to the right when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a reaches a predetermined number. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a to be a predetermined number.

  (12) It is good also as a structure from which the probability that the movable member 392 will incline to the right is different for every number of rounds. Specifically, a lottery table having different probabilities that the movable member 392 is inclined to the right is provided for each number of rounds, and the lottery process is performed with reference to the lottery table to incline the movable member 392. It is good also as a structure which specifies the direction to make it go. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to make a player play a game, making a player predict the kind of the present lottery table.

  (13) The structure for distributing the game balls won to the big prize opening 222a to either the count hole 222l or the continuation hole 222m is not limited to the seesaw 390, and the game balls won to the big prize opening 222a are counted. Any structure can be used as long as it can be distributed to either 222l or continuation hole 222m. Specifically, for example, the variable winning device 222 may be configured to include a croon. The croon may include a continuation hole and a count hole, and the round game may be continued by winning a game ball in the continuation hole. Moreover, in the said structure, it is good also as a structure from which the easiness of winning to the said continuous hole differs according to the number of winning to the big winning opening 222a. In this case, the croon is not rotated. Specifically, when the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a is 0 in 1R, the croon is tilted so that a game ball can easily win in the continuation hole, and in 2R, the winning quantity at the big prize opening 222a. When the number of wins is one or less, the croon is tilted so that a game ball can easily win in the continuation hole. In 3R, if the number of wins to the big winning hole 222a is two or less, a game ball wins the continuation hole. When the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a is 3 or less in 4R, the croon is inclined so that a game ball can easily win the continuation hole. In 5R, the big prize opening If the number of winnings in 222a is 4 or less, the above crean is tilted so that the game ball can easily win in the continuation hole. In 6R, if the number of winnings in the big winning opening 222a is 5 or less, continue When the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a is 6 or less in 7R, the croon is tilted so that the gaming balls are easy to win in the continuation hole. In the case where the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a is 7 or less, the croon is tilted so that the game ball can easily win in the continuation hole, and in 9R, the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a is 8 or less. In some cases, the croon may be inclined so that the game ball can easily win the continuation hole, and the croon may be inclined so that the game ball may easily win the count hole at 10R.

  (14) The present invention is not limited to a configuration in which a round game is continued by winning a game ball in a continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222. For example, whether or not the next round game is performed in each round game. Such a lottery process may be performed, and the greater the number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 provided in the variable winning device 222, the easier the round game can be continued. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the number of winnings in the continuation passage portion 401 provided in the variable winning device 222 will increase. Further, even when no winning in the continuation passage portion 401 occurs, a lottery process for determining whether or not to play the next round game may be performed. Here, if no winning process for the continuation passage portion 401 occurs, a lottery process for determining whether or not to play the next round game is not performed, so that one game ball is won in the continuation hole 222m. If the player specifies that there is no game, the player knows that the round game will not continue. In this case, it becomes impossible to attract a player whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to the present configuration, even if no winning has occurred in the continuation passage section 401, a lottery process for determining whether or not to play the next round game is performed. Even if no winning is generated, it is possible to attract the player whether or not the round game is continued.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a lottery process for determining whether or not to perform the next round game is performed in each round game, a continuous winning is performed in the lottery process according to the total number of winning prizes in the continuation passage portion 401 in a plurality of round games. It is good also as a structure from which a probability differs. In this case, unless the total number of winning prizes in the continuation passage section 401 is constantly grasped, it is not possible to specify the probability of winning continuously in the lottery process. Therefore, with this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the total number of winning prizes in the continuation passage portion 401. Further, in the configuration in which the probability of continuation winning is different in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game according to the total number of winnings in the continuation passage unit 401 in a plurality of round games, the winning of the continuation passage unit 401 is made. The larger the total number, the higher the probability of continuous winning in the lottery process. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the condition where the total number of winning prizes to the said continuing passage part 401 is large.

  (15) When a predetermined area is provided in the variable winning device 222 and a game ball enters the predetermined area, both the upper limit number of winnings set in each round game and the elapse of the opening time of the big winning opening 222a Even in a situation where it does not occur, the current round game may be terminated.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
The configuration of whether or not to continue the round game is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Game state transition processing>
The gaming state transition process executed in step S3104 in the normal process (FIG. 57) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a game state transition process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the sixteenth embodiment.

  First, the processing of step S5401 to step S5403 is the same as the processing of step S3501 to step S3503.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5403, "10" is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5404. After executing the process of step S5404, the processes of steps S5405 to S5406 are executed. The processing in steps S5405 to S5406 is the same as the processing in steps S3515 to S3516.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode (step S5401: YES), a winning opening / closing process is executed in step S5407. The special prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 89 executes a special prize opening / closing process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 222a is open. If the big prize opening 222a is not open, it is determined in step S5502 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is "0". By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening releasing process from being performed in a situation where the timer counter T is not “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, it is determined in step S5503 whether or not an ending flag is set in the RAM 264. The ending flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 transmits an ending command. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the special winning opening opening process from being performed in a situation where an effect corresponding to the ending is displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 231. . If an affirmative determination is made in step S5503, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5503, a special winning opening opening process is executed in step S5504. In the special winning opening opening process, “6000” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and the variable winning driving section 222c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 222a is opened. Is done. The numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 12 sec after the timer counter T is set to “6000”.

  Here, in a situation where the launch handle 28 is operated by the player, one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. In addition, in the positional relationship between the grand prize winning port 222a and the nail 228 planted around the grand prize winning port 222a, a game ball rolling around the big prize winning port 222a wins the grand prize winning port 222a. The proportion is approximately 50%. In other words, it is expected that about 10 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 12 seconds, which is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a. In the present embodiment, details will be described later, but the round game continues when the number of wins to the big prize opening 222a in the current round game is larger than the number of wins to the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game. It has become. Further, when the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a becomes 10, it is determined that the round game is continued. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to continue the launch operation for 12 seconds, which is the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a.

  Further, when the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is set to be longer than 12 sec, the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 222a is 10 with high probability. In this case, since the round game is continued with a high probability, the player cannot be thrilled by whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds, it is assumed that the launch operation is performed for 12 seconds that is the continuous continuation time of the special winning opening 222a. However, the probability that the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a will be 10 is not too high. Therefore, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the round game is continued.

  After executing the process of step S5504, the process of step S5505 is executed. The processing in step S5505 is the same as the processing in step S3605.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5501 that the special winning opening 222a is open, the process proceeds to step S5506. In step S5506, by determining whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”, the opening duration (about 12 seconds) has elapsed for the current opening of the big prize opening 222a. Determine whether or not. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S5507.

  In step S5507, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 222a. When the game ball has not won the big prize opening 222a, the big prize opening opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  Here, the reading process executed in step S3001 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a reading process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, the processing in steps S5601 to S5604 is the same as the processing in steps S4401 to S4404.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5603, or if the process of step S5604 is executed, it is determined in step S5605 whether or not a winning to the variable winning device 222 has occurred. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5605, 1 is added to the 15 prize ball counters provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S5606. The counter for 15 prize balls is for counting the number of times to output 15 prize ball commands for instructing the payout control device 270 to pay out 15 game balls. Each time the 15 prize ball commands are output to the payout control device 270, the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by one.

  In subsequent step S5607, 1 is added to the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The winning number counter is for counting the number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a in each round game.

  Returning to the description of the big winning opening / closing process (FIG. 89), when an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is decremented by 1 in step S5508. In a succeeding step S5509, it is determined whether or not the winning upper limit counter PC is “0”.

  When an affirmative determination is made at step S5506 or when an affirmative determination is made at step S5509, the processing of step S5510 to step S5511 is executed. The processing in steps S5510 to S5511 is the same as the processing in steps S3610 to S3611.

  After executing the processing of step S5511, it is determined in step S5512 whether or not the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “10” or more.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5512, it is determined in step S5513 whether the numerical information of the winning number counter is larger than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area of the RAM 264. The numerical information stored in the winning number storage area of the RAM 264 is the numerical information of the winning number counter in the previous round game.

  According to the present embodiment, the round game continues when the numerical information of the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is larger than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264. As a result, it is possible to give the player a benefit that the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is greater than the number of winning prizes at the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5512, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S5513, numerical information is stored in the winning number storage area of the RAM 264 in step S5514. Specifically, the winning counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is less than “10”, and the numerical information of the winning counter is larger than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264. If the winning number counter is “10” or more, the numerical information of the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264.

  Here, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode being executed this time is finished, the winning number storage area is cleared to “0”. Therefore, in the case of the first round game, the round game is continued by winning one or more game balls in the big winning opening 222a. Further, by executing the processing of step S5514, it is possible to make a determination based on the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a in the current round game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the number of winnings in each round game is 10 or more, it is determined that the round game continues. Therefore, by setting the number of winnings that the round game will continue, the player can specify that the round game will continue when the number of winnings in each round game reaches 10 It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the continuing round game.

  In subsequent step S5515, “500” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, and “10” is set to the winning upper limit counter PC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5513, the processes in steps S5516 to S5517 are executed. The processing in steps S5516 to S5517 is the same as the processing in steps S3617 to S3618.

  After executing the process of step S5517, an ending flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5518. The ending flag is a flag for specifying that the MPU 262 transmits an ending command.

  In subsequent step S5519, the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is cleared to “0” and the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing (FIG. 88), after executing the processing of step S5407, it is determined in step S5408 whether or not the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. judge. If the timer counter T is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated. By providing the process, it is possible to prevent the processes in steps S5410 to S5411 from being executed in the situation where the special winning opening 222a is in the open state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5408, it is determined in step S5409 whether or not an ending flag is set in the RAM 264. If the ending flag is not set in the RAM 264, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. By providing the processing, it is possible to prevent the processing in steps S5410 to S5411 from being executed even though the display screen G has not been notified that the opening / closing execution mode has ended. .

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5409, the processing in steps S5410 to S5411 is executed. The processing in steps S5410 to S5411 is the same as the processing in steps S3520 to S3521. In the present embodiment, there are only two types of jackpot results, a normal jackpot result and a probabilistic jackpot result. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S5411, the normal jackpot result set in the RAM 264 is set. The set flag of the jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is deleted. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result. The probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result. Also, the ending flag set in the RAM 264 is erased in the opening / closing execution mode end processing executed in step S5411.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the round game continues when the numerical information of the winning number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is larger than the numerical information stored in the winning number storage area provided in the RAM 264. As a result, the game can be performed while expecting that the number of winning in the large winning opening 222a in the current round game is larger than the number of winning in the large winning opening 222a in the previous round game.

  The opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds. Here, when it is set as the structure which the opening continuation time of the said big winning opening 222a is set longer than 12 sec, the number of winning of the game ball to the said big winning opening 222a will be 10 with high probability. In this case, since the round game is continued with a high probability, the player cannot be thrilled by whether or not the round game is continued. In this regard, according to this configuration, since the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a is set to 12 seconds, it is assumed that the launch operation is performed for 12 seconds that is the continuous continuation time of the special winning opening 222a. However, the probability that the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a will be 10 is not too high. Therefore, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the round game is continued.

  Further, when the number of winnings in each round game is 10 or more, it is determined that the round game continues. Therefore, by setting the number of winnings that the round game will continue, the player can specify that the round game will continue when the number of winnings in each round game reaches 10 It becomes. Thereby, it becomes possible to give the player a sense of security with respect to the continuing round game.

<Another example of the sixteenth embodiment>
(1) When the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a in the previous round game, or the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening 222a in the current round game May be a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game. In this case, the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening 222a in the previous round game. However, it may be configured such that the probability of continuing winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is higher than the situation in which the number of winnings in the grand prize opening 222a in the previous round game is smaller. According to this configuration, when the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes at the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game, or to the big prize opening 222a in the current round game. Even if the number of wins is less than the number of wins at the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game, it is possible to make the player throbbing whether or not the round game will continue.

  (2) When the upper limit of the count number of each round game is the same, the time until the upper limit of the count number of the current round game is reached The time until the upper limit of the count number of the previous round game is reached In this case, the round game may be continued when it is short or the same. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the time until the number of winnings in the big winning opening 222a reaches the upper limit of the count number, not the number of winning in the big winning opening 222a.

  (3) It is not limited to the configuration in which the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a is constant, and for example, the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a may be shortened as the round game continues. As the round game continues, the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a becomes shorter, and it is highly possible that the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a will decrease as the round game progresses. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the round game from continuing for a long period of time.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure where the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a becomes long as a round game continues. The longer the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a, the higher the possibility that the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a will increase as the round game progresses. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the round game from ending immediately.

  (4) When a reference number of game balls wins the big prize opening 222a even if the number of winning prizes in the big prize opening 222a in the current round game is smaller than the number of winning prizes in the previous round game The configuration may be such that the round game continues. The reference number may be determined by a lottery process. According to this configuration, when the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening 222a becomes the above-mentioned reference number, the winning quantity in the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is more than the number of winning prizes in the previous round game. Even if the number is small, since the round game continues, it is possible to increase the degree of attention of the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 222a.

  (5) When the number of winning prizes at the big winning opening 222a is 10 or more, it is not limited to the configuration in which it is determined that the round game will continue. For example, the number of winning prizes at the big winning opening 222a is 10 or more. Even so, a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game may be performed. According to the configuration, since the condition for determining that the round game is continued is not set, the player can be thrilled by whether or not the round game is continued.

  (6) It is good also as a structure from which the conditions for a round game continuing differ according to the kind of jackpot result. Specifically, in the case of a normal jackpot result, the round game does not continue unless the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is greater than the number of winning prizes in the current round game. In the case of a probable jackpot result, if the number of winnings in the big winning opening 222a in the current round game is equal to or larger than the winning number in the big winning opening 222a in the previous round game, the round game is continued. Also good. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the jackpot result is a probabilistic jackpot result.

<Seventeenth embodiment>
The opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a is different from that of the sixteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the sixteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Big prize opening process>
The special winning opening opening process executed in step S5504 in the special winning opening / closing process (FIG. 89) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing a special prize opening process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the seventeenth embodiment.

  First, in step S5701, the number of rounds is grasped. Specifically, the value of the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is grasped. In the subsequent step S5702, the opening duration time table read from the ROM 263 to the RAM 264 is referred to, and the opening duration time of the special winning opening 222a corresponding to the round counter RC grasped in step S5701 is specified. The opening duration table will be described with reference to FIG. The release duration table is provided in a one-to-one correspondence between the number of rounds and the numerical information of the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening duration table.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the case of 1R, “3000” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. As described above, the numerical information set in the timer counter T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 56) is started. Accordingly, the value is subtracted by 1 every predetermined time (2 msec), and becomes “0” about 6 sec after the timer counter T is set to “3000”. In the positional relationship between the big prize opening 222a and the nail 228 planted around the big prize opening 222a, the proportion of game balls that roll around the big prize opening 222a wins the big prize opening 222a is: Approximately 50%. That is, it is expected that 5.0 gaming balls will win the big prize opening 222a during the 6 second period that is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a.

  In the case of 2R, “3500” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. It becomes “0” about 7 seconds after “3500” is set in the timer counter T. That is, it is expected that about 5.8 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 7 seconds, which is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a.

  In the case of the 3R, “4000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. The timer counter T becomes “0” about 8 seconds after “4000” is set. That is, it is expected that about 6.7 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 8 seconds, which is the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a.

  In the case of 4R, “4500” is set to the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. About 9 seconds after the timer counter T is set to “4500”, it becomes “0”. In other words, it is expected that 7.5 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 9 sec, which is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a.

  In the case of the 5Rth, “5000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. It becomes “0” about 10 seconds after “5000” is set in the timer counter T. That is, it is expected that about 8.3 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 10 seconds, which is the continuation time of the big prize opening 222a.

  In the case of 6R, “5500” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. It becomes “0” about 11 seconds after “5500” is set in the timer counter T. In other words, it is expected that about 9.2 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 11 sec, which is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a.

  After the 7th R, “6000” is set in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264. It becomes “0” about 12 seconds after “6000” is set in the timer counter T. In other words, it is expected that 10.0 game balls will win the big prize opening 222a for 12 seconds that is the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a.

  Since the present embodiment is premised on the sixteenth embodiment, the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a in the current round game is larger than the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game. In many cases, the round game continues. In this configuration, in this embodiment, it is set so that the open continuation time of the special winning opening 222a becomes longer as the round game progresses.

  In this embodiment, the upper limit number of winnings in the 1R round game is set to 5, the upper limit number of winnings in the 2R round game is set to 6, and the 3R round game The maximum number of winnings is set to 7, the upper limit number of winnings for the 4R round game is set to 8, and the upper limit number of winnings for the 5R round game is set to 9 The upper limit number of winnings in round games after the 6th R is set to 10. As described above, the expected number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a at the 1Rth is 5.0, and the expected number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a at the 2Rth is about 5.8, which is a large number at the 3Rth. The expected number of winnings to the winning opening 222a is about 6.7, the expected number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a in the 4Rth is 7.5, and the expected number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a in the 5Rth is There are about 8.3, the expected number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a at the 6Rth is about 9.2, and the expected number of winnings to the large winning opening 222a after the 7Rth is 10.0. Here, when the upper limit number of winnings to the big winning opening 222a and the expected winning number are compared for each number of rounds, both are set to be substantially the same.

  Returning to the description of the big winning opening opening process (FIG. 91), when the process of step S5702 is executed, the timer counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 indicates the opening duration specified in step S5702 in step S5703. Set to T.

  In subsequent step S5704, an opening execution process is executed. Specifically, the variable winning drive unit 222c is driven and controlled so that the special winning opening 222a is opened. Thereafter, the main prize winning opening process is terminated.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to this embodiment, as the number of rounds progresses, the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a tends to become longer. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a will increase as the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a becomes longer. That is, as the round game progresses, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a will be larger than the number of game balls won in the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to give a player the benefit with respect to many times that the round game continued.

  In addition, after the number of rounds is 7R, the opening continuation time of the special winning opening 222a is set to be the same. Here, even if the number of rounds is 7R or later, if the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is increased in proportion to the number of rounds, the round game may not end. In addition, when the number of rounds is 7R or later and the structure is such that the opening duration of the special winning opening 222a is reduced in proportion to the number of rounds, the frequency at which the round game ends after 7R increases. . In that respect, according to this configuration, since the number of rounds after the 7th round is the same as the opening duration of the grand prize opening 222a, the frequency at which the round game ends after 7R has increased. It is possible to prevent the end of the game and the continued round game.

  Further, the upper limit number of winnings in each round game is set to be substantially the same as the expected winning number in each round game. Therefore, by continuously performing the launch operation over the open continuation time of the big winning opening 222a set in each round game, the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 222a is the upper limit number of winning of each round game. Is likely to reach. As a result, it is possible to make the player desire to win a game ball in the big prize opening 222a until the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a elapses.

<Another example of the seventeenth embodiment>
(1) In a situation where the big prize opening 222a is in a closed state, the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a in the next round game may be determined by lottery. In this case, as the round game progresses, a long open duration may be easily selected in the lottery. According to this configuration, since the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a is not set in advance, the player cannot grasp the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a. That is, the player cannot specify the timing when the special winning opening 222a is changed from the open state to the closed state. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled by whether or not the special winning opening 222a changes from the open state to the closed state.

  (2) When the number of prizes received at the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of prizes received at the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game, or the number of prizes received at the big prize opening 222a in the current round game In the case where is less than the number of winning a prize winning hole 222a in the previous round game, a lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game may be performed. In this case, the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes in the grand prize opening 222a in the previous round game. However, it may be configured such that the probability of continuing winning in the lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the round game is higher than the situation in which the number of winnings in the grand prize opening 222a in the previous round game is smaller. According to this configuration, when the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a in the current round game is the same as the number of winning prizes at the grand prize opening 222a in the previous round game, or to the big prize opening 222a in this round game. Even if the number of wins is less than the number of wins at the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game, it is possible to make the player throbbing whether or not the round game will continue.

  (3) It is not limited to a configuration in which the opening duration of the special prize opening 222a increases by a certain time as the round game progresses. For example, the special prize opening 222a is opened as the round game progresses. It is good also as a structure where the ratio which a duration increases increases. According to this configuration, compared to a configuration in which the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is increased by a certain time, the big prize in the current round game is larger than the number of prizes received in the big prize opening 222a in the previous round game. It is possible to increase the number of winnings to the mouth 222a.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the ratio which the open continuation time of the big winning opening 222a increases as a round game advances according to the kind of jackpot result is different. In this case, the probability variation jackpot result may be configured to have a higher rate of increase in the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a than the normal jackpot result. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the jackpot result is a probabilistic jackpot result.

  (4) It is not limited to the configuration in which the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is the same after the number of rounds is 7R. It is good also as a structure which becomes long open duration of. According to this configuration, as the round game progresses, there is a high possibility that the actual winning number to the big prize opening 222a will reach the upper limit number of winnings in the round game. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage of the situation where the number of times that the round game has continued is large.

  (5) When the actual number of winning prizes 222a is greater than the expected number of winning prizes 222a in each round game, the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a in the next round game is preset. It may be configured to be longer than the predetermined time. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation in which the actual number of winnings at the big winning opening 222a is larger than the expected number of winnings at the large winning opening 222a in each round game.

  (6) Until the number of rounds reaches a predetermined number, the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is the same, and when the number of rounds is greater than the predetermined number, the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a increases. It is good also as composition to go. According to this configuration, the player can be attracted to the game by making the player want to reach the predetermined number of rounds.

  (7) It is good also as a structure from which the opening continuation time of the big prize opening 222a in each round game differs according to the kind of jackpot result. Specifically, an open duration table is provided for each type of jackpot result. In the release duration table, the number of rounds and the value set in the timer counter T are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. A value corresponding to the current round number is set in the timer counter T with reference to the release duration table provided for each jackpot result. In this configuration, when compared for each same round game, the probability variation jackpot result may be longer than the normal jackpot result. According to this configuration, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the jackpot result is a probabilistic jackpot result.

(8) The round game may be continued when the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening 222a in each round game reaches the preset upper limit number in each round game.
In this configuration, the maximum number of round games is determined by lottery while the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a is constant, and the upper limit number determined by the lottery includes the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a. Even if the launch operation is continued over a period of time, an upper limit number that does not generate the upper limit number of round games may be set. According to this configuration, in the lottery for determining the upper limit number of each round game, even if the launch operation is continued over the open continuation period of the big prize opening 222a, the upper limit number that does not generate the upper limit number of round games is determined. It is possible to play a game while expecting not to be selected.

  Further, in a configuration in which the round game continues when the upper limit number of round games is reached, the open duration time of the big prize opening 222a may be determined by lottery while keeping the upper limit number of round games constant. According to this configuration, in the lottery for determining the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a, the game is performed while expecting that the opening continuation time of the large winning opening 222a where the upper limit number of winnings of the round game is generated is selected. It becomes possible to make it.

  Further, in a configuration in which the round game continues when the upper limit number of round games is reached, a configuration in which the upper limit number of round games and the opening duration of the big prize opening 222a are determined by lottery. According to the said structure, when launch operation is continued over the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a determined in the lottery which determines the opening continuation time of the big winning opening 222a, the lottery which determines the upper limit number of round games It is possible to play a game while expecting that the upper limit number of round games determined in step 1 can be won. In addition, by combining the upper limit number of round games and the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a by lottery, the combination of the upper limit number of round games and the opening duration of the big winning opening 222a can be diversified. Is possible.

<Eighteenth embodiment>
The type of the success / failure table referred to in the success / failure determination process is different from that of the ninth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that of the ninth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Attack table>
First, the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table for the low probability mode in the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG. 93 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the success / failure table A for the high probability mode. FIG. 93 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-probability mode acceptance table B, and FIG. 93 (d) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the high-probability mode success / failure table C. .

  As shown in FIG. 93 (a), under the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to, the number of random numbers that are the jackpot result is two. Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), under the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table A is referred to, there are 60 random number values resulting in the jackpot result. In the gaming state in which the high probability mode success / failure table A is referred to, the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, and the number of times of gaming executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is a state of 20 times or less. The first probability variation mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A in the MPU 262. In the switching process of the opening / closing execution mode, when the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result A, the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), under the gaming state in which the high probability mode success / failure table B is referred to, there are 40 random number values resulting in the jackpot result. In the gaming state in which the high probability mode success / failure table B is referred to, the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, and the number of times of gaming executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is a state of 10 times or less. The second probability variation mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B in the MPU 262. In the switching process of the opening / closing execution mode, when the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the probability variation jackpot result B, the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264.

  Here, when the success / failure table A for the high probability mode and the success / failure table B for the high probability mode are compared, the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is larger than the success / failure table B for the high probability mode. There are many random numbers. In addition, the period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode determination table A is longer than the period in which the determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode determination table B. The success / failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to only when the jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage that the jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), under the gaming state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table C is referred to, there are 20 random number values resulting in the jackpot result. The game state in which the high-probability mode success / failure table C is referred to is that the number of game times executed after the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the open / close execution mode ends. Is a state in which the number of game times executed after the second probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the open / close execution mode is completed is 11 times or more.

  According to the present embodiment, a plurality of high-probability mode success / failure tables A, B, and C having different jackpot winning probabilities are set, and are referred to in the success / failure determination process according to the types of probability variation jackpot results A and B. The reject tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode are different. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the current jackpot winning probability when the probability variation jackpot results A and B are obtained.

  Also, a high-probability mode success / failure table C having a smaller random number value that is a jackpot result than the high-probability mode success / failure table A and the high-probability mode success / failure table B is provided. As a result, it is possible to increase the concentration of the game by making the player want to win the big win until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends reaches the predetermined number of times. Become.

  In addition, the high-probability mode success / failure table C has more random numbers resulting in a jackpot result than the low-probability mode success / failure table. Therefore, even if the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends does not become a big win until the predetermined number of times, the high probability mode has a higher jackpot winning probability than the winning table for the low probability mode Since the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the use success / failure table C, it is possible to suppress the frustration with respect to the fact that the winning hit is not reached before reaching the predetermined number of times.

  The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success table for the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure table C is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure tables A and B. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure table B is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure table A.

  If the winning probabilities increase in the order of the success / failure table A for the low probability mode, the success / failure table C for the high probability mode, the success / failure table B for the high probability mode, and the success / failure table A for the high probability mode, the jackpot The number and value of the random numbers that result are arbitrary, and the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success / failure table for the low probability mode becomes the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the success / failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode. Only a part of the configuration may be included, or a configuration that does not include the configuration may be used. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure table C may include only a part of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure tables A and B. It is good also as a structure which is not. Further, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure table B may be configured such that only part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the high probability mode success / failure table A is included, It is good also as a structure which is not contained.

  Next, the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 (e) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the distribution table.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (e), a normal jackpot result, a probability variation jackpot result A, and a probability variation jackpot result B are set as distribution targets for the jackpot result. A jackpot type counter C2 is assigned to each jackpot result so as not to overlap each other. Specifically, when the jackpot type counter C2 is “0-9”, the normal jackpot result is obtained. When the jackpot type counter C2 is “10-11”, the probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, and the jackpot type counter C2 is “ In the case of “12-29”, the probability variation jackpot result B is obtained.

  If a normal jackpot result is obtained in the success / failure determination process, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low probability mode until the next jackpot winner is won. In the event that the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure table A until the probability variation jackpot result B is reached, the success / failure is determined with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure table B until the next jackpot win. Judgment processing is performed.

  According to the above distribution table, the probability variation jackpot result A is set to have a smaller numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 than the probability variation jackpot result B. In other words, the probability variation jackpot result A is less likely to be selected than the probability variation jackpot result B. Here, as described above, when the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is compared with the success / failure table B for the high probability mode, the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is better than the success / failure table for the high probability mode. The jackpot winning probability is set higher than B. As a result, it is possible to give the player a benefit for selecting the probability variation jackpot result A having a low probability of being selected.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed in step S3205 in the game turn control process (FIG. 58) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the variation start process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260.

  First, in step S5801, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In the next step S5802, it is determined whether the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and whether the number of game rotations executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 20 or less. The first probability variation mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A in the MPU 262 as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5802, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined by referring to the probability table A for the high probability mode in step S5803. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S5802, whether the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5804 and whether the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 10 or less. Determine whether. The second probability variation mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B in the MPU 262 as described above.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5804, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined by referring to the probability table B for the high probability mode in step S5805. Determine. If a negative determination is made in step S5804, it is determined in step S5806 whether the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5806, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined by referring to the probability table C for the high probability mode in step S5807. Determine. By providing the process in step S5806, the situation in which the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 times or more, and the RAM 264 Refer to the common probability table C for the high probability mode when the second probability variation mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 11 times or more. It is possible to perform the determination process.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5806, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5801 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined by referring to the winning / failing table for the low probability mode in step S5808. judge.

  In the present embodiment, when the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G until the next jackpot winning. Specifically, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/10” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends up to 20 times. Is displayed, and “1/30” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 times or more. In addition, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/15” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended up to 10 times. When the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 11 or more, “1/30” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G. According to the configuration, the player can easily grasp the current jackpot winning probability in a situation where a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are set. However, it is not limited to the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, and may be any place where the player can visually recognize it. Further, instead of the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, an image corresponding to the jackpot winning probability set at the current stage may be displayed on the display screen G.

  Further, when the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is not set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is not displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. Here, in the situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, when the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, it is emphasized that the jackpot winning probability is low, so it is motivated to play a game. It will decline. In this respect, according to the present configuration, in the situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability is not displayed in the lower left of the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

  When the process of step S5803 is executed, when the process of step S5805 is executed, when the process of step S5807 is executed, or when the process of step S5808 is executed, the process of steps S5809 to S5816 is executed. The processing in steps S5809 to S5816 is the same as the processing in steps S3302 to S3309.

  Here, the special prize opening / closing process in the present embodiment is the same as that in the ninth embodiment, but the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is different from that in the ninth embodiment. In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment, when the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. The first probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result A. In the flag set process corresponding to the type determination process executed in step S3305 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59), the first probable jackpot flag specifies that the type of the current jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A If set, the RAM 264 is set. When the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the second probability variation mode flag is cleared to “0”, and when the first probability variation mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, the state is maintained.

  When the second probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. The second probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result B. In the flag set process corresponding to the type determination process executed in step S3305 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59), the second probability variable jackpot flag specifies that the type of the jackpot result is the probability variable jackpot result B If set, the RAM 264 is set. When the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the first probability variation mode flag is cleared to “0”, and when the second probability variation mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, the state is maintained.

  Further, in a situation where the normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, if the first probability change mode flag or the second probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the set flag is cleared to “0”. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result. The above-mentioned normal jackpot flag is obtained when it is specified in the flag setting process corresponding to the type determination process executed in step S3305 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 59) that the type of the current jackpot result is the normal jackpot result. Set in RAM 264.

  Further, the first probability variation jackpot flag, the second probability variation jackpot flag, or the normal jackpot flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0” in the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode.

<Time chart showing the period during which various success / failure tables are referenced>
A period in which various success / failure tables are referred will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 95 is a time chart showing periods in which various success / failure tables are referred to, FIG. 95 (a) shows the number of game times, and FIG. FIG. 95C shows a period in which the determination process is performed with reference to the determination table C for the high probability mode in a situation where the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. FIG. 95D shows a period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high probability mode's success / failure table A, and FIG. FIG. 95 (f) shows a period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the low-probability mode success / failure table. That.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a) at the timing of t1, the first game is started after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. As shown in FIG. 95 (b) from the timing t1 to the timing t2, the validity determination process is performed with reference to the probability table B for the high probability mode. Specifically, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table B for the high probability mode until the number of game times executed after the previous opening / closing execution mode ends is 10 times.

  When the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, from the timing t3 until the next big hit win is made, as shown in FIG. Is done. The timing of t3 is a timing at which the number of game times executed after the previous opening / closing execution mode ends is 11 times.

  Further, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the determination as to success / failure is made by referring to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode from the timing t1 to the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 95 (d). Processing is performed. Specifically, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high / probability mode success / failure table A until the number of game times executed after the previous opening / closing execution mode ends is 20 times.

  When the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success / failure determination processing with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode as shown in FIG. Is done. The timing of t5 is a timing at which the number of game times executed after the previous opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 times.

According to this configuration, the period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high / probability mode success / failure table A is longer than the period in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure table B. . When the high probability mode success / failure table A and the high probability mode success / failure table B are compared, the former is set such that the jackpot winning probability is higher. Also,
The success / failure determination process with reference to the high probability mode success / failure table A is performed only when the type of jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the type of jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A.

  Further, when the first probability variation mode flag and the second probability variation mode flag are not set in the RAM 264, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), from the timing t1 until the probability variation big hit results A and B are obtained The success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, a plurality of high-probability mode success / failure tables A, B, and C having different jackpot winning probabilities are set, and are referred to in the success / failure determination process according to the types of probability variation jackpot results A and B. The reject tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode are different. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the current jackpot winning probability when the probability variation jackpot results A and B are obtained.

  In addition, the probability determination process is performed with reference to the probability table A for the high probability mode in which the probability variation jackpot result A has a higher probability of winning the jackpot than the probability variation jackpot result B. Further, the probability variation jackpot result A has more game times than the probability variation jackpot result B until the success / failure determination process with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode is started. Thereby, it is possible to ensure the advantage that the type of jackpot result is the probable jackpot result A.

  In addition, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 revolutions or more, or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. When the number of game times executed after the situation and the opening / closing execution mode ends is equal to or greater than 11 rotations, the success / failure determination processing is performed with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode. Since the high-probability mode success / failure table C is set to have a larger jackpot winning probability than the high-probability mode success / failure table A and the high-probability mode success / failure table B, the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is possible to make the player want to win the big win until the number of game times executed reaches a predetermined number. This makes it possible to increase the concentration of the player on the game.

  In addition, the high probability mode success / failure table C is set so that the jackpot winning probability is higher than the low probability mode success / failure table. Therefore, even if the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends does not become a big win until the predetermined number of times, the high probability that the big win win probability is higher than the success / failure table for the low probability mode Since the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the mode's success / failure table C, it is possible to suppress annoyance that the player has not won the big hit before reaching the predetermined number of times.

  Further, when the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G until the next jackpot winning. According to the configuration, the player can easily grasp the current jackpot winning probability in a situation where a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities are set.

  Further, when the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is not set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability is not displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. Here, in the situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, when the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, it is emphasized that the jackpot winning probability is low, so it is motivated to play a game. It will decline. In this respect, according to the present configuration, in the situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability is not displayed in the lower left of the display screen G. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing.

<Another example of the eighteenth embodiment>
(1) The success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low-probability mode until the number of games executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends reaches a predetermined number of times, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the number of game times executed from the above exceeds a predetermined number, the success / failure determination process may be performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode or the success / failure table B for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, whether or not the high-probability mode is used when the number of game times exceeds a predetermined number in the period from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the number of game times executed reaches a predetermined number. It is possible to play a game while expecting that the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the table A or the success / failure table B for the high probability mode.

  (2) It is good also as a structure where the frequency | count of the game number with which the success table A for high probability modes and the success table B for high probability modes are referred is the same. Further, the high-probability mode success / failure table B may be referred to more frequently than the high-probability mode success / failure table A. Here, if the high-probability mode success / failure table A has a higher number of game times referred to than the high-probability mode success / failure table B and the probability variation jackpot result A has a higher jackpot winning probability, When the type of jackpot result is a probable jackpot result B, the player cannot be very happy. In this regard, according to the present configuration, the probability variation jackpot result B is more likely to be subjected to the success / failure determination process with reference to the probability table B for the high probability mode than the probability variation jackpot result A. Therefore, by securing the advantage of the situation in which the type of jackpot result is a probable jackpot result B, to prevent the player from being disappointed when the type of jackpot result becomes the probable jackpot result B Is possible.

(3) It is good also as a structure which determines the frequency | count of the game time in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure tables A and B at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the period during which the success / failure determination process with reference to the success / failure tables A and B for the high probability mode is performed becomes longer.

  In addition, a lottery may be performed to switch from the success / failure determination process with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure tables A and B to the success / failure determination process with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure table C every time the game round ends. . When switching from the success / failure determination process referring to the high-probability mode success / failure tables A and B to the success / failure determination process referring to the high-probability mode success / failure table C, the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G is also determined. Switch. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G whenever a game turn is started.

  (4) The number of stages in which the various success / failure tables are changed may be three or more. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a high probability mode success / failure table D having a lower jackpot winning probability than the high probability mode success / failure table C is set. Specifically, when the first probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends up to 20 times. If the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 to 50 times, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high / probability mode success / failure table C. When the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends exceeds 51 times, the determination process may be performed with reference to the determination table D for the high probability mode. In addition, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, whether or not the game has been executed up to 10 times after the opening / closing execution mode ends is determined by referring to the high-probability mode determination table B. When the process is performed and the opening / closing execution mode ends and the number of game times executed is from 11 to 40 times, the determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode determination table C, and the opening / closing execution mode is performed. When the number of game times executed after the end of the game exceeds 41 times, the success / failure determination process may be performed with reference to the success / failure table D for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to create more situations where the jackpot winning probability is different than when the number of stages in which various tables are changed is two.

  (5) Depending on the type of the jackpot result, the number of stages where the jackpot winning probability is changed may be different. Specifically, when the first probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends up to 20 times. If the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 to 40 times, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high / probability mode determination table B, When the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 41 times or more, the determination process may be performed with reference to the determination table C for the high probability mode. Further, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended up to 10 times is determined by referring to the probability table B for the high probability mode. When the determination process is performed and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 11 or more, the determination process is performed with reference to the determination table C for the high probability mode. Good. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the benefit of the jackpot result being the probable jackpot result A.

  (6) When the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, not only one jackpot winning probability but also a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities may be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/10 or 1/30” may be displayed in the lower left of the display screen G. Further, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/15 or 1/30” may be displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting the set jackpot winning probability.

  (7) Even in a situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability may be displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the present jackpot winning probability reliably by seeing the lower left of the display screen G. FIG.

  (8) When the first probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 20 times or less, or the second probability change mode flag is set If the number of games executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is 10 times or less, the high-frequency support mode is set, and the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the opening / closing execution mode is When the number of game times executed after the completion is more than 20 times, or when the second probability variation mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 10 times. If there are more, the configuration may be a low-frequency support mode. According to this configuration, whether or not the jackpot winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, and whether or not the winning determination process refers to the determination table A and B for the ultra-high probability mode when the high-frequency support mode ends. It becomes possible to grasp that the period to be performed has ended.

  Further, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 20 or less, or the second probability variation mode flag is set. When the number of game times executed after the situation and the opening / closing execution mode ends is 10 or less, the high-frequency support mode is surely set, and the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the opening / closing execution mode. When the number of game times executed after the end of the game is more than 20 times, or when the second probability variation mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode ends is 10 If the number of times is greater than the number of times, the support mode may be set to either the high frequency support mode or the low frequency support mode by lottery. . According to this configuration, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is greater than 20, or the second probability variation mode flag is In the set situation and when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is more than 10, the player is expected to enter the high frequency support mode instead of the low frequency support mode. It is possible to play a game.

<Nineteenth embodiment>
The conditions for referring to the success / failure tables A, B, and C for each high probability mode in the success / failure determination processing are different from those in the eighteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that in the eighteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed in step S3205 in the game turn control process (FIG. 58) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the nineteenth embodiment.

  First, in step S5901, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In subsequent step S5902, it is determined whether or not the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. As described above, the first probability variation mode flag is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A in the MPU 262, and the second probability variation mode flag is the MPU 262. This is a flag for specifying that the previous jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result B.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5902, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined by referring to the winning table for low probability mode in step S5903. judge.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5902, the situation in which the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5904 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is greater than 20, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is greater than 30 times.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5904, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined by referring to the probability table C for the high probability mode in step S5905. Determine. Since this embodiment is premised on the eighteenth embodiment, a high-probability mode success / failure table A, a high-probability mode success / failure table B, and a high-probability mode success / failure table C are provided. As described above, in the gaming state in which the high probability mode success / failure table A is referred to, there are 60 random number values resulting in the jackpot result, and the high probability mode success / failure table B is referred to. Under the gaming state to be won, there are 40 random number values resulting in the jackpot result. Under the gaming state in which the high probability mode success / failure table C is referenced, the random number resulting in the jackpot result There are 20 values. That is, the high-probability mode success / failure table C has the lowest jackpot winning probability among the high-probability mode success / failure tables A, B, and C. According to this configuration, the situation in which the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 20 or less, or the second probability variation mode in the RAM 264. In the situation where the flag is set and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed is 30 or less, the biggest winning winning in the success / failure tables A, B and C for the high probability mode The success / failure determination processing is performed with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode with a low probability.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5904, a situation where the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 in step S5906 and a situation where the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is greater than 40 times, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is more than 60 times.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5906, whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 with reference to the high probability mode win / fail table B in step S5907 is a value corresponding to the big win winning is determined. Determine. The high probability mode success / failure table B has the second highest jackpot winning probability among the high probability mode success / failure tables A, B, and C. According to this configuration, the situation in which the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 to 40 times, or the RAM 264 has the second In the situation where the probability variation mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 31 to 60 times, in the acceptance table A, B, C for the high probability mode Then, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table B for the high probability mode having the second highest jackpot winning probability.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5906, it is determined in step S5908 whether or not the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is greater than 100. If a negative determination is made in step S5908, whether or not the value of the big hit random number counter C1 grasped in step S5901 with reference to the high probability mode win / fail table A in step S5909 is a value corresponding to the big win winning is determined. Determine. The high probability mode success / failure table A has the highest jackpot winning probability among the high probability mode success / failure tables A, B, and C. According to this configuration, the situation in which the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is finished is 41 to 100 times, or the RAM 264 has the second In the situation where the probability variation mode flag is set and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 61 to 100 times, in the acceptance tables A, B and C for the high probability mode Then, the success / failure determination processing is performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode having the highest jackpot winning probability.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5908, the process of step S5910 is executed. The processing in step S5910 is the same as the processing in step S5903. In this embodiment, when the types of jackpot results are the probability variation jackpot result A and the probability variation jackpot result B, the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is more than 100, so The success / failure table A for the high probability mode having a high winning probability is switched to the success / failure table for the low probability mode having the lowest jackpot winning probability. However, the end reference number is not limited to 100. For example, the end reference number may be less than 100 times or may be more than 100 times.

  In addition, when the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the current jackpot winning probability until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends reaches 100 times. Is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G. Specifically, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/30” is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends up to 20 times. Is displayed, and “1/15” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended 21 to 40 times, and after the opening / closing execution mode is ended. “1/10” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G until the number of executed game times is 41 to 100 times. Further, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/30” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended up to 30 times. , “1/15” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G from 31 to 60 times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the game was executed after the opening / closing execution mode ended. “1/10” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G when the number of game times is 61 to 100 times. However, it is not limited to the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, and may be any place where the player can visually recognize it. Further, instead of the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, an image corresponding to the jackpot winning probability set at the current stage may be displayed on the display screen G. Further, in the situation where the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, the display screen G The current jackpot winning probability displayed in the lower left is no longer displayed.

  When the process of step S5903 is executed, when the process of step S5905 is executed, when the process of step S5907 is executed, when the process of step S5909 or step S5910 is executed, the process of step S5911 to step S5918 is executed. . The processing in steps S5911 to S5918 is the same as the processing in steps S5809 to S5816.

  Here, the winning opening opening / closing process and the end process of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment are the same as those in the eighteenth embodiment, but the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is different from the eighteenth embodiment. Yes. In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends exceeds 100, the high frequency support flag set in the RAM 264 is “0”. “100” is set in the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 so as to be cleared. When the game number counter becomes “0”, the high frequency support flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”.

  Also in the present embodiment, as in the eighteenth embodiment, when the first probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. The first probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result A. When the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the second probability variation mode flag is cleared to “0”, and when the first probability variation mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, the state is maintained.

  When the second probability variation jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264. The second probability variation jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 262 is the probability variation jackpot result B. When the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the first probability variation mode flag is cleared to “0”, and when the second probability variation mode flag is already set in the RAM 264, the state is maintained.

  Further, in a situation where the normal jackpot flag is set in the RAM 264, if the first probability change mode flag or the second probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the set flag is cleared to “0”. The normal jackpot flag is a flag for specifying that the type of jackpot result that triggers the transition to the current open / close execution mode in the MPU 262 is the normal jackpot result.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game times in which the success / failure determination process with reference to the high / probability mode success / failure tables A, B, and C is set. The success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode having a high winning probability. In this case, there is a high possibility that the number of game times won in the big win will be close to the upper limit number. Therefore, it is possible to make the player throbbing whether the success / failure determination process referring to the success / failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode ends.

  In addition, the probability variation jackpot result A is more likely than the probability variation jackpot result B to the number of game times changed from the high-probability mode success / failure table C to the high-probability mode success / failure table B, and the high-probability mode success / failure table B. The number of game times to be changed to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is small. Here, the jackpot winning probability increases in the order of the success / failure table C for the high probability mode, the success / failure table B for the high probability mode, and the success / failure table A for the high probability mode. Accordingly, the probability variation jackpot result A is more likely than the probability variation jackpot result B in the situation where the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is completed is smaller than the probability variation jackpot result B. Thereby, it is possible to secure the advantage that the jackpot result is the probability variation jackpot result A.

  Further, in the situation where the first probability variation mode flag or the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, if the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, the display screen G The current jackpot winning probability displayed in the lower left is no longer displayed. Thus, it is possible to specify that the success / failure table A for the high probability mode has been switched to the success / failure table for the low probability mode without grasping the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Is possible.

<Another example of the nineteenth embodiment>
(1) At the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the number of game times for which the success / failure determination process is performed may be determined by lottery with reference to the probability tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, it is possible to expect that the period during which the success / failure determination process with reference to the success / failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode is performed becomes longer.

  Also, a lottery for switching from a success / failure determination process referring to the high / probability mode success / failure table C to a correct / failure determination process referring to the high-probability mode success / failure table B every time a game round is completed, or a high-probability mode success / failure table. A lottery for switching from the success / failure determination process referring to B to the success / failure determination process referring to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode may be performed. When the success / failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode are switched, the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G is also switched. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the jackpot winning probability displayed on the display screen G whenever a game turn is started.

  (2) The situation in which the first probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264 and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is more than 40 times, or the second probability change mode flag is set in the RAM 264 In the situation where the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode ends is more than 60 times, the success / failure table C for the high-probability mode is generated when the case where the big win is continuously generated occurs. The number of game times to be changed to the high probability mode success / failure table B and the number of game times to be changed from the high probability mode success / failure table B to the high probability mode success / failure table A may be reduced. According to this configuration, by preventing the situation where the number of game times is large when winning a big win, it is possible to prevent the accumulation of frustration against not being a big win immediately. It becomes possible.

  (3) When the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends exceeds 100 times, it is limited to a configuration in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the failure / prohibition table for the low probability mode. For example, there is no end reference number for determining whether or not the winning determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode determination table A, and determination is made with reference to the high-probability mode determination table A until a big win is won. A configuration in which processing is performed may be employed. According to this configuration, when the jackpot result becomes the probable jackpot results A and B, it becomes possible to give a sense of security that the situation where the jackpot winning probability is high continues until the next jackpot winning win.

  (4) The number of stages in which the various success / failure tables are changed may be four or more. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which a high probability mode success / failure table D having a lower jackpot winning probability than the high probability mode success / failure table C is set. Specifically, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, the success / failure table D for the high probability mode is referred to until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends up to 20 times. If the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 21 to 40 times, the success / failure determination process is performed by referring to the high / probability mode determination table C. When the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 41 to 60 times, the determination process is performed with reference to the high / probability mode determination table B, and the opening / closing execution mode ends. A configuration may be adopted in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode when the number of executed game times is 61 to 100 times. In addition, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, whether or not the game has been executed up to 30 times after the opening / closing execution mode has ended is determined by referring to the high-probability mode determination table D. When the process is performed and the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 31 to 50 times, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode. When the number of game times executed after the completion of the game is 51 to 70 times, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table B for the high probability mode and executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is good also as a structure where the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode until the number of game times is 71 to 100 times. According to this configuration, it is possible to create more situations where the jackpot winning probability is different than when the number of stages in which various tables are changed is three.

  (5) When the number of game times executed after the open / close execution mode ends reaches a preset upper limit number, the success / failure for the high probability mode is determined from the success / failure determination process with reference to the failure probability table for the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure which switches to the success / failure determination process which referred table A, B, C. FIG. Also, in this case, the winning probability is set higher in the order of the high probability mode success / failure table C, the high probability mode success / failure table B, and the high probability mode success / failure table A. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure tables A, B, and C for the high probability mode having a high jackpot winning probability. Here, if a period in which the jackpot is not won occurs for a long time, it will be frustrated that the jackpot will not be won. In this regard, according to the present configuration, when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends reaches the upper limit number of times, the high / low probability mode processing is performed based on the determination processing with reference to the low / high probability mode determination table Since the success / failure determination process with reference to the success / failure tables A, B, and C is switched, the jackpot winning probability is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's irritation by giving a benefit that the probability of winning the jackpot is increased for a long period in which the jackpot is not won.

  (6) When the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, not only one jackpot winning probability but also a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities may be displayed. Specifically, for example, when the first probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/10 or 1/30” may be displayed in the lower left of the display screen G. Further, when the second probability variation mode flag is set in the RAM 264, “1/15 or 1/30” may be displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting the set jackpot winning probability.

  (7) Even in a situation where the current jackpot winning probability is low, the jackpot winning probability may be displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to grasp | ascertain the present jackpot winning probability reliably by seeing the lower left of the display screen G. FIG.

<20th Embodiment>
The conditions for referring to the high / bad mode A / B tables for the high probability mode are different from those in the eighteenth embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration will be described in detail. The description of the same configuration as that in the eighteenth embodiment is basically omitted.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed in step S3205 in the game turn control process (FIG. 58) of the MPU 262 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the change start process executed by the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twentieth embodiment.

  First, in step S6001, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is grasped. In subsequent step S6002, it is determined whether or not the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”. The jackpot continuation counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the MPU 262 is in a situation where the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure tables A and B for the high probability mode.

  Here, in this embodiment, a success / failure table for the low probability mode, a success / failure table A for the high probability mode, and a success / failure table B for the high probability mode are set. In addition, multiple types of jackpot results are not set. In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process is not performed with reference to the success / failure table according to the type of the jackpot result, but the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table according to the value of the jackpot continuation counter.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6002, it is determined in step S6003 whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S6001 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the low probability mode success / failure table. judge.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6002, it is determined in step S6004 whether or not the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1”. The situation where the jackpot continuation counter is “1” is a situation where the jackpot winning counter is won when the jackpot continuation counter is “0”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6004, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S6001 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning by referring to the probability table B for the high probability mode in step S6005. Determine.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6004, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 grasped in step S6001 with reference to the high probability mode winning / failure table A in step S6006 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is determined. Determine. The case of negative determination in step S6004 is a case where the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “2”. The situation where the jackpot continuation counter is “2” is a situation where the jackpot winning counter is won when the jackpot continuation counter is “1”.

  When comparing the high-probability mode success / failure table A with the high-probability mode success / failure table B, the high-probability mode success / failure table A is larger than the high-probability mode success / failure table B. The winning probability is set to be high. According to this configuration, when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “2”, the jackpot winning probability is higher than when the jackpot continuation counter is “1”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot continuation counter is “1” or the jackpot continuation counter is “2”, the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode until the next jackpot winning is won. When the jackpot continuation counter is “0”, the state where the support mode is set to the low-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot win is won.

  When the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1” or “2”, the current big hit winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G until the next big hit win. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter is “1”, “1/15” is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G until the next jackpot winning win, and when the jackpot continuation counter is “2”, “1/10” is displayed in the lower left of the display screen G until the next big hit win. However, it is not limited to the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, and may be any place where the player can visually recognize it. Further, instead of the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is displayed on the lower left of the display screen G, an image corresponding to the jackpot winning probability set at the current stage may be displayed on the display screen G.

  When the process of step S6003 is executed, when the process of step S6005 is executed, or when the process of step S6006 is executed, when a big win is won (step S6007: YES), the jackpot result is obtained in step S6008 Execute stop result setting process. In this process, in the case of a jackpot result, information on the pattern mode that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 233 is stored in the RAM 264.

  Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of types of jackpot results are not set, the type determination process executed in step S5810 of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 94) and step S5812 are executed. The flag setting process corresponding to the type determination process is not executed.

  When the processing of step S6008 is executed, 1 is added to the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 in step S6009. In subsequent step S6010, it is determined whether or not the big hit continuation counter is “3”.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6010, the big hit continuation counter is cleared to “0” in step S6011. In this process, since the big hit continuation counter is cleared to “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S6002. That is, when the jackpot continuation counter is “2” and the jackpot is won, in the next hit determination process, the determination process is performed with reference to the low probability mode determination table.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6007, the process of step S6012 is executed. The processing in step S6012 is the same as the processing in step S5813.

  When a negative determination is made in step S6010, when the process of step S6011 is executed, or when the process of step S6012 is executed, the process of step S6013 is executed. The processing in step S6013 is the same as the processing in step S5814.

  In subsequent step S6014, a change command and a jackpot winning command are set. The jackpot winning command is a command for causing the sound emission control device 290 to specify that the result of winning or failing is a jackpot winning.

  The change command and the jackpot winning command set in step S6014 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 290 in step S3101 in the normal process (FIG. 57). When the sound emission control device 290 receives a jackpot winning command from the MPU 262 of the main control device 260, the sound emission control device 290 corresponds to a stop result in which the same even symbol or the same odd symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5. Information is determined as information of the current stop result. In this case, the types of symbols (even-numbered symbol types and odd-numbered symbol types) and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  After executing the process of step S6014, the process of step S6015 is executed. The processing in step S6015 is the same as the processing in step S5816.

  Here, the special prize opening / closing process in the present embodiment is the same as that in the eighteenth embodiment, but the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is different from that in the eighteenth embodiment. In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in this embodiment, when the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1” or “2”, the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 264. When the big hit continuation counter is “0”, the high frequency support flag set in the RAM 264 is cleared to “0”. In the present embodiment, since the success / failure determination processing is performed with reference to the success / failure table corresponding to the value of the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264, the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode is not performed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  According to the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure mode for the low-probability mode and the jackpot is won, the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 becomes “2”. Up / down determination processing is performed with reference to the determination tables A and B for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode until a big hit is made a plurality of times. Here, when the success / failure table for the low probability mode and the success / failure tables A and B for the high probability mode are compared, the jackpot winning probability is set lower for the former. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a player a benefit for winning a jackpot in a situation where the jackpot winning probability is low.

  When the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1”, the hit determination process is performed with reference to the high probability mode determination table B, and the big hit continuation counter is “2”. In this case, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure table A having a higher jackpot winning probability than the high-probability mode success / failure table B. Here, since the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is higher in the jackpot winning probability than the success / failure table B for the high probability mode, the success / failure determination processing is performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode. There is a higher possibility that the number of game times to be executed is reduced until a big win is won, compared to the case where the winning determination process is performed by referring to the high probability mode winning / failing table B. The number of game times executed until the jackpot winning counter is won in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is “2”, and the number of game times executed until the jackpot winning counter is set in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is “1” If the number of game times executed until the jackpot winning is increased in the situation where the jackpot continuation counter is “1”, the number of games played until the jackpot winning is increased. It becomes possible to suppress irritation due to a large number of times.

<Another example of the twentieth embodiment>
(1) When the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1”, the hit determination process is performed with reference to the high probability mode determination table A, and the jackpot continuation counter is “2”. In this case, the success / failure determination processing may be performed with reference to the success / failure table B for the high probability mode. Here, when the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table for the low-probability mode, the big win is won, compared to when the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure tables A and B for the high-probability mode. There is a high possibility that the number of game times executed until will be increased. In this situation, if the number of game times executed until the next jackpot win is increased, there is a high possibility that the player will feel frustrated with the increase in the number of game times executed until the jackpot win. . Therefore, after a situation where there is a high possibility that the number of game times executed until the big win is won, it is better to reduce the number of game times executed until the next big win. In this regard, according to the present configuration, after performing the success / failure determination process with reference to the success / failure table for the low-probability mode and winning the jackpot winning, the success / failure table A for the high-probability mode having the highest jackpot winning probability is referred to. In this way, a determination process is performed. With this, after the situation where the number of game times executed until winning the jackpot is high, it is likely that the number of game times executed before winning the jackpot will be reduced, It becomes possible to suppress the frustration with respect to the large number of game times executed before winning the big hit.

  (2) When the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”, when the big win is won, and when the same odd symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 And the period in which the determination process is performed with reference to the determination tables A and B for the high-probability mode is different between the case where the combination of the same even number symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5. It is good also as a structure. Specifically, when the same even number combination is established on one active line L1 to L5, refer to the success / failure tables A and B for the high probability mode until the jackpot continuation counter becomes “3”. When the determination process is performed and the same odd symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5, refer to the determination tables A and B for the high probability mode until the jackpot continuation counter becomes “5”. Then, a configuration may be adopted in which the success / failure determination process is performed. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to the combination of the symbol established on one effective line L1-L5.

  (3) When the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1” or “2”, the state in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode continues until the next big win is won. For example, a pattern in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the next jackpot is won, a pattern in which the high-frequency support mode continues until the preset upper limit is reached, and the high-frequency support mode are: It is good also as a structure by which the pattern which is not set is set. In this case, it is good also as a structure which determines any pattern from said 3 types of patterns by lottery process. The lottery process may be performed at the time of a big win when the lottery mode is in the low probability mode and when the second big win is counted from when the lottery mode is in the low probability mode Good. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while expecting that the high-frequency support mode will continue until the next jackpot is won.

Further, in the configuration in which the support mode pattern is determined by lottery processing, the support mode of the above-mentioned support mode is selected when the jackpot is won when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and when the jackpot is won when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. It is good also as a structure from which the distribution of the pattern of the support mode selected in the lottery process which determines a pattern differs.
Specifically, for example, when the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the jackpot is won,
The pattern that the high frequency support mode continues until the preset maximum number of times is reached is most likely to be selected, and if the lottery mode is a high probability mode and wins a big win, what is the high frequency support mode? It is good also as a structure with the highest possibility that the pattern which should not be selected. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to vary the benefit which a player receives according to a condition.

  Further, in the configuration in which the support mode pattern is determined by the lottery process, the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1” or “2” and the jackpot is not in the high frequency support mode. When winning, it is good also as a structure where 1 is not added to the said big hit continuation counter. Since the jackpot continuation counter is not incremented by 1, the winning / nothing determination process is performed again with reference to the winning / prohibition tables A and B for the high probability mode until the next jackpot winning is won. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a player the benefit of winning a big hit in a situation that is not in the high frequency support mode. The jackpot continuation counter is decremented by 1 when the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “2” and the jackpot is won in the non-high frequency support mode. It is good.

  (4) When the jackpot winning probability is displayed at the lower left of the display screen G, not only one jackpot winning probability but also a plurality of jackpot winning probabilities may be displayed. Specifically, “1/10 or 1/15” may be displayed on the lower left of the display screen G. According to this configuration, it is possible to play a game while predicting the set jackpot winning probability.

(5) When the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1” or “2”, refer to the high probability mode determination table A and the high probability mode determination table B. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a hit / fail judgment process is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter is “1”, the number of game times executed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is up to 50 times with reference to the high-probability mode success / failure table B. When the determination process is performed and the jackpot continuation counter is “2”, the success / failure table A for the high probability mode is referred to when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 51 times or more. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a hit / fail judgment process is performed. The jackpot continuation counter is “2”.
In the case of “”, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table B for the high-probability mode until the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended up to 30 times. In the case of “2”, when the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended is 31 times or more, the success / failure determination processing may be performed with reference to the success / failure table A for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, since the jackpot winning probability is changed midway, the player can be attracted to the game as compared to the configuration in which the jackpot winning probability is not changed midway.

  (6) The number of stages to which various types of success / failure tables are referred may be three or more. In this case, a high probability mode success / failure table C having a lower jackpot winning probability than the high probability mode success / failure table B may be set. Specifically, when the big hit continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “0”, the success / failure determination processing is performed with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table. If “1”, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure table C for the high probability mode. If the jackpot continuation counter is “2”, the success / failure is determined with reference to the success / failure table B for the high probability mode. When the determination process is performed and the jackpot continuation counter is “3”, the determination process may be performed with reference to the determination table A for the high probability mode. According to this configuration, since the benefits of winning a big hit in a situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode, it is possible to increase the motivation for the game in the situation where the lottery mode is the low probability mode It becomes. In the above configuration, the jackpot continuation counter is cleared to “0” when the jackpot continuation counter becomes “4”.

  (7) Probabilistic jackpot results and normal jackpot results are set as the types of jackpot results, and if a probable jackpot result is reached, it will be counted twice from the chance of winning the jackpot result. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the success / failure tables A and B for the high probability mode. According to the said structure, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage that the kind of jackpot result is a probabilistic jackpot result. Further, in this configuration, the determination process may be performed with reference to the high / non-probability mode success / failure tables A and B having different jackpot winning probabilities according to the number of times of winning the big success. Specifically, when the jackpot continuation counter is “1”, the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the probability table B for the high probability mode. When the jackpot continuation counter is “2”, the probability is high. A configuration may be adopted in which the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the mode's determination table A and the success / failure determination process is performed with reference to the failure / probability table for the low probability mode when the jackpot continuation counter is “0”. .

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be combined with each other, and the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination to the combined configurations.

  (1) When winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, a predetermined number of game balls may be paid out. The predetermined number may be one or two or more. Further, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls is executed regardless of whether the winning through period for the distributing through winning portion 35 is valid or not. Alternatively, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls may be executed only when a prize is awarded to the distribution through winning portion 35 during a period different from the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35. Good. In these cases, a profit of paying out the game ball is given to the fact that the winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs in a period different from the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35. . Further, instead of this configuration, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls may be executed only when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period of the distributing through winning portion 35. Good. In this case, it is possible to increase the advantage of the winning validity period.

  (2) Instead of a configuration in which the allocation execution mode is surely generated when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs, an allocation is performed when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs. When the lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the minute execution mode is executed (for example, a winning winning is performed with a probability of 10%), and the winning selection is made in the lottery process, the sorting execution mode is set. It may be configured to occur. In this case, the winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 may be continued until the distribution execution mode is generated, and even if the distribution execution mode does not occur, the distribution through winning portion 35 is distributed to the distribution through winning portion 35. When the number of winning prizes reaches a specific number (for example, 10) or when the number of occurrences of the lottery process reaches a specific number of times (for example, 10), the winning validity period of the distribution through winning portion 35 ends. Also good.

  (3) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the variation display of the pattern in the distribution display unit 42c is started when the winning validity period of the distribution through winning unit 35 is started, the distribution through As a configuration in which the variation display of the pattern on the distribution display unit 42c is started at the timing when the winning to the distribution through winning unit 35 occurs or the distribution execution mode is started in the winning period of the winning unit 35. Also good.

  (4) Instead of the configuration in which the V prize is not generated basically in the second allocation execution mode, the V allocation is less likely to occur in the second allocation execution mode than in the first allocation execution mode. A configuration in which a winning can occur may be adopted. For example, the release mode of the allocation winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first allocation execution mode and the second allocation execution mode, and the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position is the first allocation. The second distribution execution mode may have a shorter period than the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. Thus, a gaming ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being placed at the V guide position. In these cases, even in the second distribution execution mode, a V prize can be generated in a regular game, so that the player's attention to the second distribution execution mode can be increased.

  In this configuration, the same opening / closing execution mode may be generated when a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. Further, instead of this configuration, when the V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode, the player enters the opening / closing execution mode which is more advantageous for the player than when the V winning is generated in the first distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure. For example, the number of round games that can be awarded to the special electric prize winning device 37 is greater when the V prize is generated in the second allocation execution mode than when the V prize is generated in the first allocation execution mode. As a result, the number of occurrences of winning in the special electric prize winning device 37 during the opening / closing execution mode may be increased. In addition, for example, when the V prize is generated in the second allocation execution mode, the upper limit number of prizes to the special electricity prize winning device 37 in each round game is larger than when the V prize is generated in the first allocation execution mode. As a result, the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening / closing execution mode may be increased. In these cases, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction that the V winning has occurred in the second distribution execution mode in which the expected degree of occurrence of the V winning is relatively low.

  (5) When the V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode may not be generated.

  (6) When a V winning is generated in the second distribution execution mode in each of the above embodiments, an external signal may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall.

  (7) When a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, any one of the display light emitting unit 73, the speaker unit 74, and the symbol display device 44 or a predetermined combination is abnormal. The notification may be executed. Further, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69 in a situation that is not in the distribution execution mode, an external signal may be output from the pachinko machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the same opening / closing execution mode is generated when a V prize is generated in the first distribution execution mode and when a V prize is generated in the second distribution execution mode. It is good. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the opening / closing execution mode.

  (9) The third distribution execution mode may be set in addition to the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode in the above embodiments. For example, while the opening manner of the distribution winning device 36 is the same or substantially the same in the first distribution execution mode and the third distribution execution mode, the period during which the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position is the first distribution time. The third distribution execution mode may have a shorter period than the minute execution mode. Further, for example, in the third distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is arranged at the V guide position after the distribution winning device 36 is closed, but immediately before the distribution winning device 36 is closed. Thus, a gaming ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 may be configured to reach the position of the switching piece 66 after being placed at the V guide position.

  (10) The configuration of the distribution winning device 36 is not limited to the configuration in each of the above-described embodiments. For example, a rolling portion in which a rolling area of game balls is formed is provided in the distribution winning device 36. In addition, a plurality of game ball drop holes are provided in the rolling part, and the game ball that has won the distribution winning device 36 rolls in one of the drop holes after rolling in the rolling region. Also good. And when a game ball falls in the fall hole corresponding to V winning, it is good also as a structure which transfers to opening-and-closing execution mode as generation | occurrence | production of V winning. In this case, in the first distribution execution mode, the game balls are led out to the rolling area so that the game balls can fall into the drop holes corresponding to the V winnings. In the second distribution execution mode, May be configured such that the game ball is led out to the rolling region so that the game ball does not fall into the drop hole corresponding to the V prize.

  (11) The special prize winning device 37 may not be provided, and each round game may be performed by opening the distribution winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode.

  (12) Instead of the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is generated as a privilege when the V winning is generated in the allocation execution mode, the winning / raising lottery mode after the allocation execution mode may be the high probability mode. The support mode after the execution mode may be a high-frequency support mode, or a structure in which a large amount of game balls are paid out may be used.

  (13) On-hold information (hereinafter referred to as first on-hold information) acquired when a winning to the first operating part 32 occurs and on-hold information acquired when a winning to the second operating part 33 occurs ( Hereinafter, the second hold information) may be stored separately. In this case, it is good also as a structure from which the player's advantage differs at the time of a success / failure determination process being performed by the first hold information and the second hold information. For example, the configuration in which the game determination process is executed for the second hold information may be more advantageous to the player than the game determination process is executed for the first hold information. Specifically, the case where the success / failure determination process is executed for the second hold information and the hit result is more than the case where the hit / failure determination process is executed for the first hold information and the hit result is obtained. Alternatively, the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process may be high.

  Further, in the configuration in which the first hold information and the second hold information are distinguished and stored as described above, the determination of success / failure is made in the order obtained regardless of whether the first hold information or the second hold information. The configuration may be a process execution target, and the second hold information may be a priority determination process execution target over the first hold information regardless of the order of acquisition.

  (14) In the second distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 may not be arranged at the V guide position so that the V winning is not generated reliably.

  (15) In each of the above embodiments, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the first distribution execution mode is triggered by the occurrence of the V prize in the second allocation execution mode. As a result, the number of round games that can be awarded to the special prize winning device 37 is larger than the open / close execution mode, and as a result, the number of occurrences of winnings to the special prize winning device 37 during the opening / closing execution mode increases. It is good also as a structure. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in the first distribution execution mode is greater than the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the occurrence of the V winning in the second allocation execution mode. In addition, the number of payouts of game balls in the open / close execution mode may be increased as a result of increasing the upper limit number of winnings to the special electricity winning device 37 in each round game.

  (16) When the result of the success / failure determination process is a winning result, the prize winning valid period of the distribution through winning portion 35 does not occur, but the distribution execution mode occurs, and in the distribution execution mode V A configuration may be adopted in which an open / close execution mode occurs when a winning occurs. In this case, in the allocation execution mode, the game balls that have won the allocation prize winning device 36 may be configured such that a V prize is generated with a predetermined probability that is greater than 0% and less than 100%. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the distribution execution mode is generated when the result of the determination process is a hit result, when the game ball enters the first entrance, the entrance to the second entrance And a distribution execution mode is generated when a game ball enters the second pitching section, and an open / close execution mode is generated when a V winning is generated in the distribution execution mode. .

  (17) In the distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 may not be in the driving state. In the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state. The guidance unit 52 may not be in the driving state in the distribution execution mode. The guidance unit 52 may be in the driving state in the first distribution execution mode, whereas the guidance unit 52 is in the second distribution execution mode. It is good also as a structure which is not in a drive state. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the guidance unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 may not be in the drive state, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 can be in the drive state. On the other hand, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 may not be driven. In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first distribution execution mode, the guidance unit 52 The guidance unit 52 may not be in the driving state in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second distribution execution mode, although it may be in the driving state.

  (18) The distribution through winning portion 35 may be provided below the second operating portion 33. In this case, the guiding unit 52 of the second operating unit 33 is not driven during the winning effective period of the distribution through winning unit 35, and the second operating unit 33 is guided during a period different from the winning effective period. The unit 52 may be in a driving state.

  (19) Even if the result of the hit determination process and the distribution determination process is a highly accurate result, if the open / close execution mode does not occur, the pass / fail lottery mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low probability mode. It is good also as a structure to be made. In this case, the support mode may be configured to be set to the low frequency support mode, or may be configured to be set to the high frequency support mode that continues until the next hit result occurs. It is good also as a structure set to the high frequency support mode which continues until a game time is digested.

  In addition, even if the results of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process result in a low probability, if the opening / closing execution mode does not occur, the support mode after the end of the distribution execution mode is set to the low frequency support mode. It is good also as a structure to be.

  (20) When the distribution execution mode is entered, it may be configured that the detection of the game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69 occurs reliably regardless of the type. For example, the passage through which the game balls won in the distribution prize winning device 36 pass is not branched at the discharge passage area 65b and the V prize passage area 65c but is provided with only the V prize passage area 65c. A game ball that has won a prize in the device 36 may pass through the V winning path area 65c and be reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. Further, instead of this configuration, the path through which the game balls won in the distribution prize winning device 36 are branched into the discharge path area 65b and the V prize path area 65c, as in the above-described embodiments. Even in the distribution execution mode, the switching piece 66 is used so that at least one of the game balls won in the distribution winning device 36 passes through the V winning path area 65c and is reliably detected by the V winning detection sensor 69. The drive control may be performed.

  (21) The V winning detection sensor 69 is replaced with a configuration in which the open / close execution mode is surely generated when the V winning detection sensor 69 detects a game ball won in the distribution winning device 36 in the distribution executing mode. The opening / closing execution mode may be generated with a predetermined probability (probability greater than 0% and less than 100%) when a game ball is detected at. For example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning detection sensor 69, a lottery process is executed by the main MPU 92, and an opening / closing execution mode may be generated when a winning selection is made in the lottery process. . As a result, the player expects not only that a V prize will be generated but also that the player will win a prize in the lottery process.

  (22) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 81 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 111 is controlled by the sound emission control device 101 based on a command output from the main control device 81 The device 111 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 101. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 101 and the display control device 111 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main control device 81, and both functions of these two control devices may be integrated into the main control device 81. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound emission control device 101 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 101 to the display control device 111 are also arbitrary.

  (23) The device for performing the effect for the game times is not limited to the symbol display device 44, and the effect for the effect for the game times is executed by operating the decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (24) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used without being discharged to an island facility. In addition, it is impossible for a player to replenish game balls to a pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation is performed in a situation where the number of available game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when a game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a winning ball is generated by winning through the distribution through winning unit 35, the distribution winning device 36, or the special electricity winning device 37, the number of usable game balls increases in the data. It becomes.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, only the first distribution execution mode may exist as the distribution execution mode. In this case, when the allocation execution mode occurs, the V winning is generated by continuing to fire the game ball aiming for the winning to the distribution winning device 36. When this configuration is applied to the fourth to eighth embodiments, the first distribution execution mode is surely generated when the shift to the distribution execution mode is won in the distribution determination process.

  (26) In the fourth to eighth embodiments, when a winning to the distribution through winning portion 35 occurs during the winning validity period to the distributing through winning portion 35, the distribution execution mode is entered. Although the transition occurs surely, the distribution probability between the first distribution execution mode and the second distribution execution mode may be changed according to the gaming state. For example, in the case of the fourth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, when any of the first to fifth high-accuracy results is obtained, the first distribution is performed as compared with the case where the low-accuracy results are obtained. The distribution probability to the execution mode may be increased, and the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode may be different in each of the first to fifth high-accuracy results. Further, for example, in the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, in the probability determination lottery process of the distribution determination, the distribution probability to the first distribution execution mode is changed, and the success / failure determination process is performed. As a configuration, at least one probability is corrected so that a combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected and the probability that the first distribution execution mode is selected in the distribution determination process is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Also good.

  (27) In the case where the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode is changed in the distribution determination process triggered by the high probability result in the fourth to seventh embodiments, It is good also as a structure changed into the probability higher than the said probability set as a trigger that it became a low probability hit result. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of having a highly accurate result.

  (28) When the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process is changed in response to the high probability result in the fourth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the low probability result It is good also as a structure which can be changed into the probability lower than the said probability set as the opportunity. However, in this case, in order to ensure the advantage of having a high-accuracy hit result, the probability that the hit result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the shift to the distribution execution mode in the assignment determination process Transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process so that the combined probability of each probability is higher than the combined probability of each probability set when the combined probability obtained by integrating It is preferable that the probability of winning is set.

  (29) In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process are determined. At least one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process is corrected so that the integrated composite probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Although it is configured, in addition to or instead of this, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process so that the above-described composite probability is equal to or higher than the specific value and the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process It is good also as a structure by which at least one is corrected among the probability of winning. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the synthesis probability from becoming lower than expected.

  (30) In the fifth embodiment to the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the transition determination mode is won in the distribution determination process are high. In the case where a higher probability than the low probability is set when triggered by the hit result, the probability may be corrected so that the combined probability obtained by integrating the probabilities always becomes a predetermined probability. For example, in the case of the fifth embodiment, in the distribution determination probability correction process (step S2307), the distribution determination process has a probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode so that the synthesis probability becomes a predetermined probability. Will be corrected.

  Further, for example, in the case of the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the distribution determination mode is won in the distribution determination process. A situation can occur in which one is set to a probability at the time of a low probability and the other is set to a probability triggered by a high probability result. In such a case, while keeping one probability set as the probability at the low probability as it is, the other probability is set so that the synthesis probability becomes a predetermined probability. As a result, when a high-accuracy result is generated for at least one of the success / failure determination process and the distribution determination process, the above-described combination probability is surely a predetermined probability.

  In addition, for example, in the case of the seventh embodiment, one of the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the distribution determination mode is won in the distribution determination process is first. While the number of continuations becomes “0” and is set to a probability at the time of low probability, a situation may occur where the number of continuations is one or more and the probability at the time of high probability is maintained. In such a case, at the timing when one of the continuation times is “0” and set to a low probability, the probability of the side having the continuation number of 1 or more is higher than before so that the composite probability becomes a predetermined probability. Will be changed to a high probability. Thereby, the change opportunity of a probability is diversified.

  (31) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode according to the probability. May be configured such that the probability is not notified at all, or may be configured to perform notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability.

  (32) In the fourth embodiment to the eighth embodiment described above, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode may be notified as it is in the distribution determination process, and according to the probability. It is good also as a structure from which the selection probability of an alerting | reporting aspect differs, the structure which the said probability is not alert | reported at all, and the alerting | reporting which shows whether it is more than a predetermined probability are good.

  (33) In the eighth embodiment, the probability that the V winning prize is won in the V winning lottery process may be notified as it is, and the selection probability of the notification mode is different depending on the probability. Alternatively, a configuration in which the probability is not notified at all may be used, or a configuration in which notification indicating whether the probability is equal to or higher than a predetermined probability may be executed.

  (34) In the fourth embodiment, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) is not executed unless the opening / closing execution mode that has been transitioned due to the occurrence of the V winning is completed. Even if no occurrence occurs, the game state transition process (FIG. 37) may be executed when the transition to the distribution execution mode occurs, and the transition to the distribution execution mode does not occur. The game state transition process (FIG. 37) may be executed when the game round that is the winning result in the determination process is completed. As a result, it is possible to generate many chances that the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability that the winning in the distribution determination process is a win in the distribution execution mode will fluctuate.

  (35) In the fifth embodiment, in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 39), the probability determination lottery process for the distribution determination may be executed prior to the probability determination lottery process for the success / failure determination. In this case, if the combined probability obtained by integrating the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process and the probability of winning the transition execution mode in the distribution determination process is greater than a predetermined value, the determination is correct / failed. The probability that the winning result is selected in the process is corrected.

  (36) Embodiments other than the seventh embodiment in which the situation in which a higher probability than the low probability is set or a situation where the probability can be set continues for the number of continuations as in the seventh embodiment You may apply to.

  (37) In the seventh embodiment, when the probability is set and the number of continuations is set in response to the high probability result, the set probability has the value of the number of continuations of “0”. It is good also as a structure hold | maintained until it becomes. This makes it easier for the player to understand the probability setting status.

  (38) In the eighth embodiment, the probability that the winning result is selected in the success / failure determination process may not be changed. In this case, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process and the probability of winning the V prize in the V winning lottery process vary. To the configuration, a configuration in which the probability correction process is executed so that the composite probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the triggers for changing each probability may be applied, and a configuration in which a situation in which the probability becomes higher or higher than in the low probability as in the seventh embodiment continues for a continuous number of times. You may apply.

  (39) In the eighth embodiment described above, the probability of winning the transition to the distribution execution mode in the distribution determination process may not be changed. In this case, the probability that the winning result is selected in the winner determination process and the probability of winning the V prize in the V prize lottery process vary. To the configuration, a configuration in which the probability correction process is executed so that the composite probability is equal to or less than a predetermined value as in the fifth embodiment may be applied, as in the sixth embodiment. A configuration in which the triggers for changing each probability may be applied, and a configuration in which a situation in which the probability becomes higher or higher than in the low probability as in the seventh embodiment continues for a continuous number of times. You may apply.

  (40) For a configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode is surely generated when the game times that have been won in the success / failure determination process are finished, the probability of being a winning result in the failure / inhibition determination process is higher than when the probability is low. A configuration may be applied in which the situation continues until a predetermined number of opening / closing execution modes occurs and there are a plurality of types of the predetermined number of times. In this case, the hold information acquired based on the winning to the first operating unit 32 and the hold information acquired based on the winning to the second operating unit 33 are stored separately, and which is the holding information? The selection rate of the predetermined number of times, the number of types of the predetermined number of times, and the selection expected value of the predetermined number of times may be different. As a result, the predetermined number of selection modes can be made different depending on the type of the operating units 32 and 33 that triggered the acquisition of the hold information, thereby diversifying the game.

  (41) There are three or more types of probable outcomes in the success / failure determination process for the configuration in which the open / close execution mode is surely generated when the game times that are the outcome of the success / failure determination process are completed. A configuration may be applied.

  (42) During a round game, it is determined whether a lottery process or a round game for determining the number of counts is continued by winning a game ball in the general winning port 221, the upper operating port 223, or the lower operating port 224. It is good also as a structure by which the lottery process for doing is performed. Specifically, whether or not a lottery process or a round game for determining the number of counts is continued when a winning to the general winning port 221, the upper operating port 223, or the lower operating port 224 occurs in each round game It is good also as a structure by which the lottery process for determining is performed. In addition, the count number or the continuation rate of the round game may be changed according to the number of winning prizes to the general winning opening 221, the upper operating opening 223, or the lower operating opening 224. By adopting such a configuration, not only that the game ball wins the big prize opening 222a during the round game but also that the game ball wins the general prize opening 221, the upper operation opening 223, or the lower operation opening 224. It can be expected.

  (43) Display control based on a command output from the main control device 260 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 300 is controlled by the sound emission control device 290 based on a command output from the main control device 260 The device 300 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 290. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 290 and the display control device 300 are separately provided, both the control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 260, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 260. The configuration of commands output from the main control device 260 to the sound emission control device 290 and the configuration of commands output from the sound emission control device 290 to the display control device 300 are also arbitrary.

  (44) A device for performing a game-turn effect is not limited to the symbol display device 231, and a configuration in which a game-turn effect is executed by operating a decorative member provided in a movable manner. It is also possible to have a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by turning on a predetermined light emitting unit, or a configuration in which an effect for game times is executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects. Good.

  (45) A configuration in which the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode when the winning / non-winning determination process is performed in response to the winning of the operation ports 23 and 24 and the winning / non-winning result is obtained, and the game ball is predetermined The present invention is also applied to a gaming machine that is configured to win a region and win a game by winning a game ball in a jackpot area provided in the predetermined region, so that the gaming state is shifted to an opening / closing execution mode. Applicable.

  (46) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, for example, a pachinko machine in which the electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right when it enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

  Further, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which game balls are circulated and used without being discharged to an island facility. In addition, it is impossible for a player to replenish game balls to a pachinko machine, the number of game balls that can be used by the player is managed as data, and the launch operation is performed in a situation where the number of available game balls is one or more. The present invention may be applied to a configuration in which when a game ball is fired, the number of usable game balls is subtracted. In this case, when a winning ball is generated by winning the upper operating port 223, the lower operating port 224, or the big winning port 222a, the number of usable game balls is increased in the data.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
A state setting means (a function for executing a distribution standby process in the main MPU 92) for setting the variable entry control to a state (allocation execution mode);
A privilege (transition to the opening / closing execution mode) is granted to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) by the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means. Privilege granting means (function of executing the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature A1, even when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature A2. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
A privilege (transition to the opening / closing execution mode) is granted to the player based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball by the V winning detection sensor 69) by the game ball that has entered the variable pitching means. Privilege granting means (function of executing the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92);
Predetermined lottery means for executing predetermined lottery processing based on the occurrence of a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning of the distribution through winning portion 35) (in the first embodiment, the processing of steps S1003 and S1004 in the main MPU 92 is executed) A function to execute the processing of step S1802 and step S1803 in the main MPU 92 in the third embodiment),
First state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1104 and S1105 in the main MPU 92) for setting the variable entrance control to be executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result;
Second state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1106 and S1107 in the main MPU 92) for setting the variable entry control when the predetermined lottery process result is a non-specific result; ,
With
When the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the privilege grant opportunity may occur, or when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result, the result of the predetermined lottery process is The gaming machine is characterized in that the privilege grant opportunity is more likely to occur than when a non-specific result is obtained.

  According to the feature A2, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when the result of the predetermined lottery process executed based on the occurrence of the predetermined lottery is a specific result, a privilege granting opportunity is more likely to occur than when a non-specific result is obtained. As a result, the player not only expects the variable entry control of the variable entry means to be executed, but also expects the result of the predetermined lottery process to be a specific result. Therefore, the number of objects that the player expects can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, not only when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a specific result, but also when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed. Thereby, when a predetermined lottery opportunity occurs, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed regardless of the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to give many opportunities to execute the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature A3. Based on the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity, as the granting of the privilege, the variable pitching means or the variable pitching means (special prize winning device 37) different from the variable pitching means is subsequently opened. A gaming machine according to A2.

  According to the feature A3, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the variable entrance means or a different variable entrance means different from the variable entrance control of the variable entrance means for the occurrence of the predetermined lottery opportunity is opened. It becomes a state. Thereby, it becomes possible to extend the situation where the variable pitching means is opened by generating a privilege grant opportunity.

  Feature A4. Based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, a means (a payout device 86, a payout control device 87) that gives a player a grant target that is either a game ball or usable game ball number information. A gaming machine according to the feature A2 or A3, characterized in that

  According to the feature A4, since the number of game balls that can be used by the player increases due to the occurrence of game balls entering the variable ball entry means, variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It becomes possible to raise the attention degree to. When the predetermined lottery trigger is generated, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed even if the predetermined lottery process result is a non-specific result when the predetermined lottery trigger occurs. Even if the result becomes a non-specific result, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from being extremely lowered.

Feature A5. In a state where the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result, the total period of the open state in the variable pitch means is variable in relation to the game ball launch cycle. It is set to a period that allows a specific number of game balls to enter the ball entry means,
In the state where the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result, the total period of the open state in the variable pitch means is related to the game ball launch cycle. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A4, wherein the gaming machine is set to a period during which the specific number of gaming balls can be entered into the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature A5, even if the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result, it is equivalent to the case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result in the state where the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed. The number of game balls can be made to enter the variable entry means. Thereby, it becomes possible to reduce a player's disadvantageous feeling that the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result.

  Feature A6. The state where the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result, and the variable pitch control is executed when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A5, wherein an expected number of game balls entering the variable entry means is different depending on a state.

  According to the feature A6, the result of the predetermined lottery process is a specific result in relation to the expected number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a state where the variable ball entry control of the variable ball entry means is executed. It is possible to make a difference in the advantage between the case and the case where the non-specific result is obtained.

  Feature A7. The game according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein the bonus granting unit does not grant the bonus when the bonus granting opportunity occurs even though the predetermined lottery process is not executed. Machine.

  When a privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the fact that the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, there is a high possibility that the privilege grant opportunity has been caused by an illegal act. Under such circumstances, according to the feature A7, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the fact that the predetermined lottery process has not been executed, no privilege is granted, and thus no privilege is granted for such fraudulent acts. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature A8. The predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball entering a predetermined pitching portion (the distribution through winning portion 35),
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a period different from the predetermined effective period, The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A7, wherein the predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the feature A8, since a predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball having entered the predetermined entrance part, in order to generate a privilege grant opportunity, first, the game ball is inserted into the predetermined entrance part. After that, it is necessary to enter the game ball into the variable ball entry means. As a result, the target for entering the game ball changes in stages, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, a predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering part during the predetermined effective period, and even if a game ball enters the predetermined ball entering part during a period different from the predetermined effective period The lottery process is not executed. As a result, it is possible to limit the situation in which the entry of the game ball into the predetermined pitching part triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, and the execution frequency of the predetermined lottery process can be set to an appropriate frequency.

  Feature A9. When the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the state where the variable pitch control is executed in response to the result of the predetermined lottery process being the non-specific result, and the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result Means for executing different notifications as notifications of occurrence of the privilege granting trigger when the privilege granting trigger occurs in the state where the variable pitching control triggered by the occurrence is performed ( The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A8, further including a function of executing processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main side MPU 92 and a display side MPU 113).

  According to the feature A9, whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in a state in which the variable pitch control is executed in response to the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming a non-specific result, or the result of the predetermined lottery process is the specific result It becomes possible to clearly grasp whether or not a privilege granting opportunity has occurred in a state where the variable pitching control is being executed in response to the event.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A9, further comprising result notifying means (distribution display unit 42c) for notifying information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process.

  According to the feature A10, it is possible to notify the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature A11. A first control means (main MPU 92) having the privilege granting means, the predetermined lottery means, the first state setting means and the second state setting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein the result notification unit is controlled by the first control unit.

  According to the feature A11, the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification unit can be increased.

Feature A12. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33) occurs, a predetermined effective period (a winning effective period of the distribution through winning part 35) that can generate the predetermined lottery opportunity Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the function (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The gaming machine according to Feature A10 or A11, further including a function of executing the processing of Step S412, Step S803, and Step S804 in the main MPU 92.

  According to the feature A12, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notifying means. Are provided individually. Accordingly, it is possible to monitor each content individually by checking the specific operation means and the result notification means.

  Feature A13. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit effect is started, and when the predetermined effective period is subsequently executed, the specific effect means (symbol) so that the specific unit effect is continued in the predetermined effective period. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, comprising means (display-side MPU 113) for controlling the display device 44).

  According to the feature A13, by performing a series of effects including the predetermined effective period before the start of the predetermined effective period and the predetermined effective period by the specific effect means, it is possible to enhance the effect in the period. Further, in such a configuration in which a series of effects including a predetermined effective period is executed before the start of the predetermined effective period by the specific effect unit, each content is monitored by confirming the specific operation unit and the result notifying unit. It can be done individually.

  Feature A14. Any of the features A10 to A13, wherein the notification of the information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is started when the state in which the variable pitch control is executed is started. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A14, the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process can be notified at the start of the state in which the variable pitch control is executed.

  Feature A15. The game according to any one of features A10 to A14, wherein the notification of information corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification means is continued in a state in which the variable pitch control is executed. Machine.

  According to the feature A15, it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the predetermined lottery process by confirming the result notifying unit at an arbitrary timing in a state where the variable pitch control is executed.

Feature A16. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating part 32 or the second operating part 33) occurs, a predetermined effective period (a winning effective period of the distribution through winning part 35) that can generate the predetermined lottery opportunity Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate the function (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
A unit effect control means (display side) that starts a specific unit effect in the specific effect means (symbol display device 44) and sets the execution mode of the specific unit effect to a mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. MPU113),
With
The execution mode of the specific unit effect is an execution mode corresponding to the fact that the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, and the predetermined effective period occurs in a situation where the specific unit effect is continued. The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A15.

  According to the feature A16, it is possible to provide an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process by executing the specific unit effect that is an execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process. In this case, the specific unit effect is continued in the predetermined effective period even after the execution mode becomes an execution mode corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process being the winning result. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player that the predetermined effective period is in use using the specific unit effect that has been executed before the predetermined effective period is started.

  Feature A17. The game machine according to Feature A16, wherein the unit effect control means continues the specific unit effect even in a state where the variable pitch control is executed.

  According to the feature A17, the specific unit effect including the state in which the variable entry control is executed is executed, so that the period before the predetermined effective period is started, the predetermined effective period, and the variable entry control are executed. It becomes possible to provide a series of specific unit effects by using the period.

  Feature A18. The game machine according to Feature A17, wherein, when the privilege grant opportunity occurs, the unit effect control means sets the execution mode of the specific unit effect as a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege grant trigger.

  According to the feature A18, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a state where the variable pitch control is executed, the execution mode of the specific unit effect becomes a mode corresponding to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity, whereby the specific unit effect is It becomes possible to notify the occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity.

  Feature A19. The unit effect control means, as the specific unit effect, to display a variation display of a pattern in a plurality of variable display areas, and when the predetermined period has passed when the lottery result of the specific lottery process is a winning result, In the situation where the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed in a part of the plurality of variable display areas and a combination of reach patterns is formed, the variable display of the pattern is continued in the remaining variable display area, The game according to Feature A18, wherein when a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the same type of design as the design forming the reach design combination is stopped and displayed in the remaining variable display area. Machine.

  According to the feature A19, it is possible to execute a series of effects using the variable display of the pattern in the period before the predetermined effective period is started, the predetermined effective period, and the period during which the variable pitch control is performed. . In addition, reach variation display is started when the predetermined effective period starts, and when a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the combination of the same type of pattern is stopped and displayed, so that each situation is displayed as a variation display of the pattern It is possible to make notification using this aspect.

Feature A20. Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804 in the main MPU 92);
When starting the predetermined unit motion and ending the predetermined unit motion, the predetermined motion means (vibration) is selected so that the content of the motion corresponds to the presence / absence of the privilege granting trigger when the variable pitch control is executed. Predetermined operation control means for controlling the minute display unit 42c) (function of executing the processing of step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302, and step S1306 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A16 to A19, comprising:

  According to the feature A20, the operation means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, the state in which the variable pitch control is executed, and whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred Is provided separately as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Thus, in a configuration in which a series of effects including the predetermined effective period is executed by the specific effect unit before the start of the predetermined effective period, the specific operation unit and the predetermined operation unit are confirmed to monitor each period individually. Can be done.

  Feature A21. The gaming machine according to Feature A20, wherein the predetermined operation control means starts the predetermined unit operation when the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature A21, it is possible for the manager of the game hall to clearly grasp whether or not the predetermined effective period has been started by checking whether or not the predetermined unit operation has been started in the predetermined operation means. .

  Feature A22. The gaming machine according to Feature A21, wherein the specific action control means ends the specific unit action before the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature A22, the result of the specific lottery process is notified in the specific operation means before the predetermined effective period is started. Thereby, the administrator of the game hall can confirm whether or not the predetermined effective period generated thereafter is normal by confirming the specific operation means.

Feature A23. First control means (main-side MPU 92) having the predetermined lottery means, the specific lottery means, and the privilege granting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling the specific effect means based on information transmitted by the first control means;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features A20 to A22, wherein the first control means includes the specific action control means and the predetermined action control means.

  According to the feature A23, since the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means are directly controlled by the first control means, it is possible to improve the reliability of the contents in the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. On the other hand, since the specific effect means is controlled by the second control means, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the first control means.

  Feature A24. The privilege granting means includes a case where the privilege grant trigger occurs in a state where the variable pitch control is executed in response to the result of the predetermined lottery process becoming the non-specific result, and the predetermined lottery process The features A2 to A2 are characterized in that the privilege granting mode is different from the case where the privilege granting trigger is generated in a state in which the variable pitch control is executed when the result becomes the specific result. The gaming machine according to any one of A23.

  According to the feature A24, since a privilege granting mode when a privilege grant opportunity occurs is different between a case where the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result and a case where the result is a specific result, the predetermined lottery is different. Even if the result of the processing becomes a non-specific result, the variable pitching control of the variable pitching means is executed, and when a bonus granting opportunity occurs in a state where the variable pitching control is executed, the bonus is given. A difference corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process in the configuration to be given can be generated with respect to the content of the privilege.

Feature A25. Based on the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity, as the grant of the privilege, the variable game means or a variable game means different from it is then configured to generate a specific game state,
The privilege granting means includes a case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result and the privilege grant opportunity occurs, and a case where the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result and the privilege grant opportunity occurs, The gaming machine according to Feature A24, wherein a minimum time required for the end of the specific gaming state is made different.

  According to the feature A25, the specific gaming state ends when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes a non-specific result and a bonus granting opportunity occurs and when the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the specific result and a bonus granting trigger occurs. Since the minimum time required for the game is different, it is possible to clearly distinguish both in the appearance of the operation content of the game.

Feature A26. When a game ball enters the variable ball entry means that is in the open state in the specific game state, a means (payout) that gives the player a grant target that is either a game ball or usable game ball number information Device 86, a payout control device 87),
The bonus granting means generates the bonus grant opportunity when the result of the predetermined lottery process is the non-specific result and the bonus game is triggered and the specific gaming state is generated and the result of the lottery process is the specific result. Compared with the case where the launch operation is performed in the same manner in the specific game state, the number of grants of the grant target expected in the specific game state is comparable. The gaming machine according to Feature A25, wherein there is a game machine.

  According to the feature A26, when a specific gaming state occurs, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage according to the result of the predetermined lottery process from occurring with respect to the number of objects to be granted in the specific gaming state.

  Feature A27. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result, and the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity causes the result of the predetermined lottery process to become the specific result and the privilege grant opportunity. The gaming machine according to Feature A26, characterized in that a minimum time required for completion is made longer than the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the game.

  According to feature A27, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs even though the result of the predetermined lottery process is a non-specific result, the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is increased. It becomes easy for the administrator of the game hall to confirm whether or not the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity is regular.

  Feature A28. The privilege granting means is configured such that the result of the predetermined lottery process becomes the non-specific result, and the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity causes the result of the predetermined lottery process to become the specific result and the privilege grant opportunity. The gaming machine according to Feature A27, characterized in that the period during which the variable pitching means to be opened in the specific gaming state is maintained in the closed state is made longer than the specific gaming state due to the occurrence of the game.

  According to feature A28, the minimum time required for the completion of the specific game state is lengthened while the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state is not affected. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features A1 to A28, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, a specific period (allocation execution mode) or a period that allows the specific period to start (for allocation) A specific lottery means (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92) for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a prize winning period of the through winning portion 35);
A predetermined lottery that executes a predetermined lottery process when a predetermined lottery opportunity (winning to the distribution through winning portion 35) occurs based on a player's game operation after the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes a winning result Means (function to execute the processing of step S1003 and step S1004 in the main MPU 92 in the first embodiment, function to execute the processing of step S1802 and step S1803 in the main MPU 92 in the third embodiment),
A specific period setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1104 to S1107 in the main MPU 92) to perform the specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, when the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result, the specific period corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process is not performed, but the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result. After that, a specific period corresponding to the result of the predetermined lottery process executed when the predetermined lottery trigger is generated based on the player's game operation is performed. Thus, in a situation where it is determined that a specific period will occur, the player performs a game operation while expecting the contents of the specific period to be advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on a game ball having entered a predetermined pitching portion (the distribution through winning portion 35).

  According to the feature B2, since a predetermined lottery opportunity is generated based on the game ball entering the predetermined pitching part, in the configuration in which the predetermined lottery trigger is generated based on the player's game operation, It is possible to make the generation condition clear.

Feature B3. A predetermined effective period (a winning effective period to the distribution through winning portion 35) occurs after the lottery result of the specific lottery process becomes the winning result,
The predetermined lottery process is executed when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a predetermined effective period, and even if the game ball enters the predetermined entrance part during a period different from the predetermined effective period, The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the predetermined lottery process is not executed.

  According to the feature B3, it is possible to limit the situation in which the entry of the game ball to the predetermined pitching part triggers the execution of the predetermined lottery process, even though the result of the specific lottery process is not the winning result. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined lottery process from being executed.

  Feature B4. When a game ball enters the predetermined ball-entry unit, the grant is either a game ball or usable game ball number information regardless of the predetermined effective period or a period different from the predetermined effective period The gaming machine according to Feature B3, further comprising means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving a target to a player.

  According to the feature B4, when a game ball enters the predetermined entrance part, the game mode is given to the player even during a period different from the predetermined effective period. It becomes possible to give a profit to the player for the occurrence of the ball.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the specific period setting unit starts the specific period when the predetermined lottery process is executed.

  According to the feature B5, the predetermined lottery opportunity can be set not only as an execution trigger for the predetermined lottery process but also as a start trigger for the specific period. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the understanding of the game content as compared to a configuration in which each opportunity is different.

  Feature B6. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5, further comprising result notifying means (distribution display unit 42c) for notifying information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process.

  According to the feature B6, it is possible to notify the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process.

Feature B7. First control means (main-side MPU 92) having the specific lottery means, the predetermined lottery means, and the specific period setting means;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The gaming machine according to Feature B6, wherein the result notification unit is controlled by the first control unit.

  According to the feature B7, the reliability of the information displayed on the result notification unit can be increased.

  Feature B8. Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The gaming machine according to Feature B6 or B7, further including a function of executing the processing of Step S412, Step S803, and Step S804 in the main MPU 92.

  According to the feature B8, the means for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process and the means for notifying the result of the predetermined lottery process are the specific operation means and the result notifying means. Are provided individually. Accordingly, it is possible to monitor each content individually by checking the specific operation means and the result notification means.

  Feature B9. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit effect is started, and when the specific period is subsequently executed, the specific effect means (symbol display device) so that the specific unit effect is continued in the specific period. 44) The gaming machine according to Feature B8, further comprising means for controlling (display-side MPU 113).

  According to the feature B9, it is possible to enhance the production effect in these periods by executing a series of productions including the specific period before the start of the specific period and the specific period. Further, in the configuration in which a series of effects is executed including the specific period before the start of the specific period and the specific effect means in this way, each content is individually monitored by confirming the specific operation means and the result notifying means. Can be done.

  Feature B10. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B9, wherein notification of information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification unit is started when the specific period is started.

  According to the feature B10, the content of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process can be notified at the start of the specific period.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to any one of features B6 to B10, wherein notification of information corresponding to a result of the predetermined lottery process in the result notification unit is continued in the specific period.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to grasp the contents of the specific period determined by the predetermined lottery process by confirming the result notification means at an arbitrary timing of the specific period.

Feature B12. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
With
The specific period is a period during which the variable entry control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein the bonus granting opportunity is generated by a gaming ball that has entered the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature B12, even when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features B1 to B12, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Based on the fact that a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69) is generated by a player's game operation in a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player is rewarded (transition to the opening / closing execution mode). Privilege granting means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92),
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 in the main MPU 92) for controlling the predetermined operation means (distribution display unit 42c) so that the predetermined unit operation is executed in the specific period and The function of executing the process of step S1306),
With
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit operation depending on whether or not the privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A game machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature C1, when a privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity during a specific period, the player performs a game operation while expecting a privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when the predetermined unit operation is performed by the predetermined operation unit in the specific period, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined operation unit. In addition, in a configuration in which a case where a privilege is granted or a case where a privilege is not granted is given depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period, a predetermined value is set depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period The execution mode of the unit operation changes. Thereby, it is possible to cause the predetermined unit operation to function not only as an operation for notifying the specific period but also as an operation for notifying whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred during the specific period.

Feature C2. First control means (main MPU 92) for controlling the progress of the game;
Second control means (sound light side MPU 103, display side MPU 113) for executing processing for controlling execution of the effect in the specific effect means based on the information transmitted by the first control means,
The first control means includes
Based on the fact that a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69) is generated by a player's game operation in a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player is rewarded (transition to the opening / closing execution mode). Privilege granting means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92),
Predetermined operation control means (step S905, step S1001, step S1101, step S1201, step S1302 in the main MPU 92) for controlling the predetermined operation means (distribution display unit 42c) so that the predetermined unit operation is executed in the specific period and The function of executing the process of step S1306),
With
The predetermined operation control means is a mode determination means (processing of steps S1302 and S1306 in the main MPU 92) that changes the execution mode of the predetermined unit operation depending on whether or not the privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the specific period. A game machine characterized by having a function of

  According to the feature C2, when a privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity during a specific period, the player performs a game operation while expecting a privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period; Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, when the predetermined unit operation is performed by the predetermined operation unit in the specific period, it is possible to grasp whether or not it is the specific period by checking the predetermined operation unit. In addition, in a configuration in which a case where a privilege is granted or a case where a privilege is not granted is given depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period, a predetermined value is set depending on whether or not a privilege grant opportunity occurs in a specific period The execution mode of the unit operation changes. This makes it possible to cause the predetermined unit operation to function not only as an operation for notifying the specific period but also as an operation for notifying whether or not a privilege granting opportunity has occurred during the specific period.

  Further, in the configuration in which the processing load of the first control means is reduced by providing not only the first control means but also the second control means for executing the process for controlling the execution of the effect, the predetermined operation means is the second control means. Instead, it is directly controlled by the first control means. Thereby, it becomes possible to improve the reliability of the content in the predetermined operation means.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the mode determination unit causes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit operation is terminated to correspond to the presence / absence of the privilege granting opportunity during the specific period. .

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in a specific period by confirming the notification result when the predetermined unit operation ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the confirmation timing easy to understand when confirming whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred based on the content of the predetermined operation means.

Feature C4. Even if the privilege grant opportunity occurs, the specific period is continued until an end condition is satisfied,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the predetermined operation control means ends the predetermined unit operation when the specific period ends.

  According to the feature C4, even if a privilege grant opportunity occurs, the specific period is continued, so that the period during which the specific period is executed does not fluctuate according to the occurrence timing of the privilege grant opportunity. It becomes possible. In addition, since the predetermined unit operation ends when the specific period ends, it is possible to grasp the end timing of the specific period by confirming the predetermined operation means.

Feature C5. The aspect determining means causes the content of the notification result when the predetermined unit operation is terminated to correspond to the presence or absence of occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the specific period,
The gaming machine includes notification execution means (display-side MPU 113) for executing notification corresponding to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity when the privilege granting trigger occurs during the specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, characterized by:

  According to the feature C5, it is possible to grasp whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred in the specific period by confirming the notification result when the predetermined unit operation ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the confirmation timing easy to understand when confirming whether or not a privilege grant opportunity has occurred based on the content of the predetermined operation means. On the other hand, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs during a specific period, a corresponding notification is executed, so that the player can easily understand that a privilege grant opportunity has occurred.

Feature C6. Means (step S1104 in the main MPU 92) for starting the specific period when a predetermined opportunity (winning to the distribution through winning section 35) occurs in the predetermined effective period (winning effective period of the distributing through winning section 35) ~ Function of executing the process of step S1107),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the predetermined operation control means starts the predetermined unit operation when the predetermined effective period is started.

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to notify that the predetermined effective period is using the predetermined unit operation.

Feature C7. When a specific lottery opportunity (winning to the first operating unit 32 or the second operating unit 33) occurs, the specific period or a period during which the specific period can be started (of the distribution through winning unit 35) Specific lottery means for executing a specific lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a winning validity period (a function for executing the processes of steps S301 and S403 in the main MPU 92);
Specific operation control means for controlling the specific operation means (special drawing display unit 42a) so as to have the operation content corresponding to the lottery result of the specific lottery process when the specific unit operation is started and the specific unit operation is ended. The function of executing the processing of step S412, step S803 and step S804 in the main MPU 92);
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, comprising:

  According to the feature C7, an operation unit for notifying that the specific lottery process has been executed and the lottery result of the specific lottery process, and an operation unit for notifying that the specific period and the occurrence of a privilege granting event have occurred. Are individually provided as the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Accordingly, it is possible to individually monitor each period by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means.

  Feature C8. When the specific lottery process is executed, the specific unit effect is started, and when the specific period is subsequently executed, the specific effect means (symbol display device) so that the specific unit effect is continued in the specific period. 44) The gaming machine according to Feature C7, further comprising means for controlling (display-side MPU 113).

  According to the feature C8, it is possible to enhance the production effect in these periods by executing a series of productions including the specific period before the start of the specific period and the specific period. Further, in the configuration in which a series of effects including the specific period is executed by the specific effect means before the start of the specific period, monitoring of each period is individually performed by confirming the specific operation means and the predetermined operation means. Can be done.

Feature C9. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
With
The specific period is a period during which the variable entry control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the bonus granting opportunity is generated by a gaming ball that has entered the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature C9, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a bonus is not given to the player unless a bonus grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 or the feature C2 described above is provided, and the specific unit operation is executed by the specific operation means in the specific period, so that it is clear that the specific period and the privilege grant opportunity have occurred. It becomes possible to grasp.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features C1 to C9, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Based on the fact that a privilege grant opportunity (detection of a game ball in the V winning detection sensor 69) is generated by a player's game operation in a specific period (distribution execution mode), the player is rewarded (transition to the opening / closing execution mode). Provided with a privilege granting means (function to execute the process of step S1311 in the main MPU 92),
As the specific period, at least a first specific period (first distribution execution mode) and a second specific period (second distribution execution mode) are set such that the degree of expectation that the privilege grant opportunity occurs is different. And
The privilege granting unit varies the privilege grant mode depending on whether the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege grant trigger occurs in the second specific period. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D1, when a privilege is granted based on the occurrence of a privilege grant opportunity during a specific period, the player performs a game operation while expecting a privilege grant opportunity to occur during the specific period. Become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, as the specific period, there are a first specific period and a second specific period so that the degree of expectation that a privilege grant opportunity occurs is different. As a result, the specific period is diversified in relation to the expected degree of occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity, and from this point, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, a privilege granting mode is different between a case where a privilege grant opportunity occurs in the first specific period and a case where a privilege grant opportunity occurs in the second specific period. Thereby, not only the expectation degree of occurrence of a privilege granting opportunity is different between the first specific period and the second specific period, but also it is possible to change the manner of granting a privilege that is given when a privilege granting opportunity occurs. The difference between the first specific period and the second specific period can be clarified.

Feature D2. Based on the occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity, a specific game state (opening / closing execution mode) in which the predetermined variable pitching means (special prize winning device 37) is in an open state thereafter occurs as the granting of the privilege. ,
The privilege granting means is minimum until the specific gaming state is ended when the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege grant opportunity occurs in the second specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the time required is different.

  According to the feature D2, the minimum time required for the specific gaming state to end is different between when the privilege granting opportunity occurs in the first specific period and when the privilege granting trigger occurs in the second specific period. This makes it possible to clearly distinguish both in the appearance of the game operation content.

Feature D3. Means (payout device 86, payout control device 87) for giving an object to be given, which is either a game ball or usable game ball number information, when a game ball enters the predetermined variable ball entry means Prepared,
The privilege granting means is fired in the specific game state due to occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the first specific period and the specific game state due to occurrence of the privilege grant opportunity in the second specific period. The feature D2 is characterized in that the number of grants of the grant target expected in the specific gaming state is comparable when compared with the case where the operations are performed in the same mode. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D3, when a specific gaming state occurs, there is no advantage or disadvantage according to the type of the specific period that triggered the generation of the specific gaming state with respect to the number of grants to be granted in the specific gaming state. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature D4. The second specific period is configured to have a lower degree of expectation that the privilege grant opportunity occurs than the first specific period,
The privilege granting means is that the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the second specific period is more than the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the first specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, characterized in that the minimum time required for completion is lengthened.

  According to the feature D4, when a privilege grant opportunity occurs despite the occurrence of the second specific period, the minimum time required for the specific game state to end becomes longer. It becomes easy for the manager of the game hall to check whether or not is genuine.

  Feature D5. The privilege granting means is that the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the second specific period is more than the specific gaming state due to occurrence of the privilege granting opportunity in the first specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D4, characterized in that the period during which the variable pitching means to be opened in the specific gaming state is maintained in the closed state is lengthened.

  According to the feature D5, the minimum time required for completing the specific game state is lengthened while not affecting the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means to be released in the specific game state. It becomes possible.

Feature D6. Variable pitching means (distribution winning device 36) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state (function for executing the distribution start process and the distribution process in the main MPU 92); ,
With
The specific period is a period during which the variable entry control is executed,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5, wherein the bonus granting opportunity is generated by a gaming ball that has entered the variable pitching means.

  According to the feature D6, even if a game ball enters the variable ball entry means, a privilege is not given to the player unless a privilege grant opportunity is generated by the game ball. As a result, when the variable entry control of the variable entry means is executed, the player not only enters the game ball into the variable entry means, but also the game that entered the variable entry means. It is expected that a privilege grant opportunity will be generated by the ball. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation becomes gradual, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features D1 to D6, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (a situation in which a probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability variation means capable of generating a situation with a different probability (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the game state transition process in the main MPU 92, the first In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main MPU 92),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process may vary, and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of each lottery process. Further, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from the case of the predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process are fluctuating at the same time, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. Can be greatly different. Therefore, the equalization of the game is suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. Predetermined privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege to the player based on the result of the specific lottery in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising:

  According to the feature E2, in order to be given a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in at least the first lottery process and a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, a plurality of lottery processes targeted by a player who expects to receive a predetermined privilege are provided, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability that the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are integrated affects the probability of granting the predetermined privilege. In this case, the configuration of the characteristic E1 is provided, and both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the provision probability of a predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. Further, it is possible to greatly vary the probability of granting the predetermined privilege without largely varying the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

  The configuration of the feature E2 may be configured such that the trigger for executing the second lottery process occurs only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, it is necessary to obtain a specific lottery result in the second lottery process in order to be granted a predetermined privilege, and it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the first lottery process.

  Feature E3. The feature E1 or E2 characterized in that at least one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process exists in three or more types. Game machines.

  According to the feature E3, the probability of each lottery process is determined by the fact that at least one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process exists. It is possible to diversify, and it is also possible to diversify the synthesis probability of these lottery processes.

  Feature E4. The probability changing means includes a predetermined lottery result in a plurality of types of lottery processes including a probability that the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process and a probability that the specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery process. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the probability is changed so that an increase with respect to the combination probability in the predetermined situation in the combination probability of the probability becomes a predetermined increase.

  According to the feature E4, in the configuration in which both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process vary, the predetermined lottery process including them It is possible to prevent the combined probability of the probability of the lottery result from becoming extremely higher than in the predetermined situation.

  Feature E5. The probability changing means determines a target probability that is one of a probability that becomes the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a probability that becomes the specific lottery result in the second lottery process in the plurality of types of lottery processes. Correction means (a function for executing the process of step S2307 in the main MPU 92 in the fifth embodiment, and the processes of steps S2505 and S2605 in the main MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment). The gaming machine according to Feature E4, further comprising a function to be executed, a function to execute the processing of Step S2708 and Step S2808 in the main MPU 92 in the seventh embodiment.

  According to the feature E5, the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are individually determined by correcting the target probability according to the probability of the other lottery process. Even if it is a structure which fluctuates in this way, it is possible to increase the amount of increase of the combination probability with respect to the combination probability in a predetermined situation up to a predetermined increase amount.

  Feature E6. The probability varying means varies both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process when a predetermined variation condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5.

  According to the feature E6, it is possible to cause a situation in which the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process fluctuate together.

Feature E7. The probability varying means is
First variation means (a function of executing the first game state transition process in the main MPU 92) for varying the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process based on the occurrence of the first opportunity;
A second changing means (function for executing the second game state transition process in the main MPU 92) for changing the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process based on the occurrence of the second opportunity;
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, comprising:

  According to the feature E7, a situation in which the probability of being a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a situation in which the probability of being a specific lottery result in the second lottery process are individually generated. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to Feature E7, comprising at least one of the following configuration (1) and the following configuration (2).
(1) In the first variation means, the first trigger is generated a predetermined number of times that the probability that the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation. (A function of executing the processing of step S2701 and step S2711 in the main MPU 92).
(2) In the second variation means, the second trigger occurs a specific number of times that the probability that the result of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation. (A function for executing the processing of step S2801 and step S2811 in the main MPU 92).

  According to feature E8, a situation in which at least one of a probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process is different from the probability in the predetermined situation is continued to some extent. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to continue the situation where the probability varies to some extent.

  The feature E8 may include a means for changing the predetermined number of times or a means for changing the specific number of times. In this case, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the situation where the probability varies.

Feature E9. The first varying means continues until the first trigger occurs a predetermined number of times that the probability that the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation. Means (function to execute the processing of step S2701 and step S2711 in the main MPU 92),
The second changing means continues a situation in which the probability that the result of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is or may be different from the probability in the predetermined situation until the second opportunity occurs a specific number of times. Means (function to execute the processing of step S2801 and step S2811 in the main MPU 92),
The gaming machine according to Feature E7, wherein the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times are different or can be different.

  According to the feature E9, it is possible to continue to some extent the situation in which the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are different from the probabilities in the predetermined situation. . As a result, it is possible to continue the situation where the probability varies to some extent. In addition, because the predetermined number of times and the specific number of times may be different or different, the duration of the situation in which the probability varies for one of the first lottery process and the second lottery process has ended. Regardless, it is possible to continue the situation in which the probability varies for the other. Therefore, it becomes possible to diversify the variation mode of each probability, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E10. The probability changing means has a probability of becoming the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a probability of being the specific lottery result in the second lottery process than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E9, characterized in that a situation can be caused that becomes higher and lower than the probability of the corresponding lottery process in the predetermined situation.

  According to the feature E10, one of the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is advantageous over the predetermined situation and the other is disadvantageous than the predetermined situation. Can be generated. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the setting mode of each probability.

  Feature E11. Notification that one of the probabilities of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process is executed and the notification corresponding to the other is not executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E10, further comprising means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2204, S2208, and S2211 in the main MPU 92, and the sound light MPU 103).

  According to the feature E11, while the notification corresponding to one of the probabilities is executed, the notification corresponding to the other is not executed, so that one part of the lottery probability that is to confirm the notification content is grasped. It is possible to create a situation in which the lottery probability of the part is predicted. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the way of paying attention to the game in relation to each lottery probability, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E12. First lottery means for executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S1904 in the main MPU 92);
Second lottery means for executing the second lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S1803 in the main MPU 92, a function for executing the process of step S2902 in the main MPU 92);
Both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are those probabilities in a predetermined situation (a situation in which a probability corresponding to the low probability result is set) Probability variation means capable of generating a situation with a different probability (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment and the eighth embodiment, the function of executing the game state transition process in the main MPU 92, the first In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, a function of executing the first game state transition process and the second game state transition process in the main MPU 92),
Predetermined privilege granting means for giving a predetermined privilege to the player based on the result of the specific lottery in the second lottery process after the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process (the process of step S2008 in the main MPU 92) Function to execute)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E12, the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process may vary, and the probability of a specific lottery result in the second lottery process may vary. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the execution mode of each lottery process. Further, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from the case of the predetermined situation. As a result, it is possible to cause a situation in which the execution modes of both the first lottery process and the second lottery process are fluctuating at the same time, and the contents of the game progressing through the results of the first lottery process and the second lottery process. Can be greatly different. Therefore, the equalization of the game is suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in order to be given a predetermined privilege, it is necessary to obtain at least a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and a specific lottery result in the second lottery process. Therefore, a plurality of lottery processes targeted by a player who expects to receive a predetermined privilege are provided, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the probability that the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process are integrated affects the probability of granting the predetermined privilege. In this case, both the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process may be different from those in the predetermined situation. Thereby, it becomes possible to diversify the provision probability of a predetermined privilege compared to the configuration in which only one of the probability of the first lottery process and the probability of the second lottery process varies. Further, it is possible to greatly vary the probability of granting the predetermined privilege without largely varying the probability of the predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process and the probability of the specific lottery result in the second lottery process.

  In the configuration of the feature E12, the second lottery process may be triggered only when the predetermined lottery result is obtained in the first lottery process. In this case, it is necessary to obtain a specific lottery result in the second lottery process in order to be granted a predetermined privilege, and it is necessary to obtain a predetermined lottery result in the first lottery process in order to execute the second lottery process. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the first lottery process.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features E1 to E12, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (a function for executing the success / failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
In the special lottery process, the probability variation means that can generate a situation in which the probability of the special lottery result is different from the predetermined situation (the process of steps S2705 to S2708 or S2805 to S2808 in the main MPU 92). Function to execute)
A return means for returning the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to the probability in the predetermined situation when the return condition is satisfied (function to execute the process of step S2712 or step S2812 in the main MPU 92);
With
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of types of return conditions exist.

  According to the feature F1, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process returns to the probability in a predetermined situation. Thereby, for example, if the probability that the result of the special lottery result is a probability that is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the return condition is difficult to return to the predetermined situation. If the situation has a probability that is less disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the return condition is easy to return to the predetermined situation. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature F2. If the probability change means sets the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process to a probability different from the predetermined situation, and the special condition occurs in a situation where the return condition is not satisfied, the special lottery The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the resulting probability can be varied.

  According to the feature F2, since the probability can change even in a situation where the return condition for returning the probability of the special lottery result to the probability in the predetermined situation is not satisfied, the setting mode of the probability is diversified, It is possible to improve the interest of games.

Feature F3. The probability changing means can generate a situation in which a probability that is a special lottery result in the special lottery process is different from a predetermined situation when a special opportunity occurs, and in the special lottery process, The situation in which the probability of the special lottery result is different from the probability in the predetermined situation, or the situation that can be, is continued until the special opportunity occurs a special number of times,
The return condition is established as at least one condition that the special opportunity has occurred the special number of times,
The gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2, wherein a plurality of types of the special times are present.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to diversify the continuation mode of the situation in which the probability of the special lottery result varies from the probability in the predetermined situation. In this case, for example, if the probability of the special lottery result is more advantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects that the number of times that the situation where the probability fluctuates continues for a long time is selected. If the probability of the lottery result is more disadvantageous than the predetermined situation, the player expects to select the number of times that the situation in which the probability is changing does not continue so much. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features F1 to F3, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. Special lottery means for executing the special lottery process (a function for executing the success / failure determination process or the distribution determination process in the main MPU 92);
Selection means for selecting the probability of the special lottery result in the special lottery process from among three or more probabilities (in the fourth embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the eighth embodiment, the game state transition in the main MPU 92) A function of executing a process, a function of executing a first game state transition process and a second game state transition process in the main MPU 92 in the sixth and seventh embodiments), To play.

  According to the feature G1, since there are three or more types of probabilities resulting in the special lottery result, it becomes possible to diversify the setting modes of the probabilities, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the feature G1, features A1 to A28, features B1 to B12, features C1 to C9, features D1 to D6, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F3, features G1, features H1 to H19, feature I1 Any one or a plurality of configurations among ˜I10, features J1 to J17, and features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 222) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable pitching means is in the open state;
An end execution means (a function for executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) to end the predetermined game state by setting the variable pitching means to the closed state when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
Means for changing the termination condition (in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3504 to S3514 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, in the tenth embodiment, the processing of step S3716 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) In the eleventh embodiment, the function of executing steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, and in step 12 of the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twelfth embodiment. Function, a function for executing the processing of steps S4603 to S4610 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the thirteenth embodiment, and steps S4812 to S in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fourteenth embodiment. A function for executing the processing of 817, a function for executing the processing of steps S5113 to S5116 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the fifteenth embodiment, and a step S55010 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the sixteenth embodiment. The function of executing the processing of S5515),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, since the end condition that triggers the end of the predetermined gaming state changes, not only whether or not the end condition is satisfied, but also the degree of attention to the end condition can be increased.

Feature H2. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 222) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable pitching means is in the open state;
When the predetermined number of game balls (count number) have entered the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state, the variable execution means is set to the closed state to end the predetermined game state (main control) A function of executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the apparatus 260);
Number difference means (in the ninth embodiment, a main control device) that allows the end trigger number to be different between the predetermined gaming state executed at a predetermined timing and the predetermined gaming state executed at a different timing. A function of executing processing of steps S3504 to S3514 in the MPU 262 of 260, a function of executing processing of step S3716 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the tenth embodiment, and an MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the eleventh embodiment. Function for executing the processing of step S4004 to step S4008 in FIG. 13, in the thirteenth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4603 to step S4610 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H2, the end opportunity number can be different between a predetermined game state executed at a predetermined timing and a predetermined game state executed at a different timing. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the number of end triggers.

Feature H3. Means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win / fail determination process) becomes the predetermined winning result (function to execute the gaming state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) )
In the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state can occur multiple times,
The gaming machine according to claim H2, wherein the number difference means makes the number of the end triggers different between a plurality of the predetermined gaming states included in one specific gaming state.

  Here, assuming that the number of end triggers is the same among a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific gaming state, a predetermined gaming state with a large number of end triggers occurs when a small number of end triggers is set. The predetermined game state cannot be executed while expecting to do so. In that regard, according to the feature H3, the number of end triggers can be different between a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state. Therefore, even if a small end opportunity number is set, the predetermined game state can be executed while expecting a predetermined game state with a large end opportunity number to occur.

  Feature H4. The number difference means is a number information group (count number distribution table A) in which information on the end trigger number set for each of the plurality of predetermined gaming states included in one specific gaming state is set. , B, C, D), the game machine according to the feature H3, wherein the end trigger number of each of the predetermined game states is set.

  According to the feature H4, by referring to the number information group, it is possible to set information on the end trigger number set for each of a plurality of predetermined gaming states included in one specific gaming state. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process of setting information on the number of end triggers set for each of a plurality of predetermined gaming states included in one specific gaming state.

Feature H5. A plurality of the predetermined winning results are set,
The gaming machine according to the feature H4, wherein the number different means makes the setting mode of the end opportunity number for the predetermined gaming state included in the specific gaming state different according to the type of the predetermined winning result.

  According to the feature H5, the setting mode of the end opportunity number differs depending on the type of the predetermined winning result. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the type of the predetermined winning result.

Feature H6. As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (ordinary jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable jackpot result),
The number difference means is in each of the specific gaming state that is executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific gaming state that is executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. In the specific gaming state that is executed by using either the first predetermined winning result or the second predetermined winning result as a trigger, the end trigger number of the predetermined gaming state at a predetermined execution time including at least the first execution time The gaming machine according to Feature H5, wherein the gaming machine is set so that it is difficult for the player to identify whether or not there is any.

  According to the feature H6, the specific game state in which the end trigger number of the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time including at least the first execution time is executed with any one of the first predetermined winning result and the second predetermined winning result as an opportunity Is set so that it is difficult for the player to identify whether or not. Accordingly, it is possible to execute the predetermined game state while expecting that the specific game state is executed in response to the predetermined winning result desired by the player.

  Feature H7. The number difference means makes the same total number of the end trigger numbers set for each of the plurality of predetermined game states in each specific game state between the one specific game state and another specific game state. However, the gaming machine according to any one of features H3 to H6, wherein the number of the end triggers of at least some of the predetermined gaming states included in the specific gaming state is made different.

  According to the feature H7, it is possible to diversify the modes of the specific game state because the setting mode of the end trigger number of the predetermined game state can be different among the plurality of specific game states. Further, even if the setting mode of the number of end triggers for a predetermined gaming state can be different, the total number of end triggers for a plurality of specific gaming states is the same, so that the advantage of the specific gaming state is It is possible to achieve the above effects while not giving a difference in the degree.

  Feature H8. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H7, wherein the number different means determines the number of the end triggers by lottery.

  According to the feature H8, since the end trigger number is determined by lottery, it can be expected that the end trigger number increases.

Feature H9. Means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win / fail determination process) becomes the predetermined winning result (function to execute the gaming state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) )
In the specific game state, the predetermined game state (round game) can occur multiple times,
The gaming machine according to Feature H8, wherein the number difference means determines the end trigger number for each of the plurality of predetermined gaming states included in the specific gaming state by lottery.

  According to the feature H9, the end trigger number for each of a plurality of predetermined gaming states included in the specific gaming state is determined by lottery. Therefore, even if the number of completion triggers for one predetermined gaming state decreases, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of completion triggers for a predetermined gaming state to be executed next.

Feature H10. The number difference means is:
Distribution that distributes a lottery object, which is one of a game ball and a throwing object thrown by the throwing means, to any of a plurality of types of target areas (first hole 351, second hole 352, third hole 353) Means (Kroon 350);
Number setting means (a function for executing the process of step S3716 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for setting the number corresponding to the type of the target area to which the lottery object is distributed as the end trigger number;
The gaming machine according to feature H8 or H9, comprising:

  According to the feature H10, it is possible to perform a physical lottery using the distribution unit. In this case, since the lottery result is derived without using the internal lottery, it is possible to increase interest in the lottery operation using the lottery object.

Feature H11. The lottery object is supplied to the allocating means when an allocable condition is satisfied,
The number setting means sets the end trigger number when the allocation possible condition is not satisfied, and sets the number equal to or less than the smallest number among the numbers corresponding to the type of the target area. The gaming machine according to Feature H10, wherein the gaming machine is set as an opportunity number.

  According to the feature H11, when the allocation possibility condition is not satisfied in the situation where the end trigger number is set, the number equal to or less than the smallest number among the numbers corresponding to the type of the target area is set as the end trigger number. Thus, it is possible to make the player want to establish the allocation possible condition. Thereby, it becomes possible to attract a player to a game.

Feature H12. Means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win / fail determination process) becomes the predetermined winning result (function to execute the gaming state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) )
In the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state can occur multiple times,
The number difference means is:
The number of derivation triggers, which is either the total number of the end triggers set for each of the plurality of predetermined game states in one specific gaming state and the number from which the total can be derived, Derivation opportunity determination means (a function for executing the process of step S4004 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for determining the difference between the plurality of specific gaming states,
Number deriving means for deriving the number of end timings of each of the plurality of predetermined gaming states included in the specific gaming state from the number of derivation timings determined by the derivation timing determining means (step S4007 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) Function to execute processing)
The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H11, comprising:

  According to the feature H12, the number of ending triggers for each predetermined gaming state included in the specific gaming state is derived from the number of derivation triggers determined by the derivation triggering means. As a result, it is not necessary for the gaming machine to store all the number of end triggers set for each of the predetermined gaming states, so that it is possible to reduce the cost for manufacturing the gaming machine.

  Feature H13. The gaming machine according to the feature H12, wherein the number deriving means makes the end trigger number the same among a plurality of the predetermined gaming states included in one specific gaming state.

  Here, if the number of end triggers is different between a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific game state, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of derivation triggers determined by the derivation trigger determination means. . In that respect, according to the feature H13, since the number of end triggers is the same among a plurality of predetermined game states included in one specific gaming state, the player knows the number of derivation triggers determined by the derivation trigger determination means. It becomes possible to make it easy.

Feature H14. Means for executing an increasing process for increasing the number of game balls that can be used by a player when a single game ball enters the variable entry means (step in MPU 262 of main controller 260) S4405 to step S4406)
The game according to Feature H12 or H13, wherein the number of derivation triggers is a number assuming a total increase in the number of usable game balls due to the increase processing in one specific game state. Machine.

  According to the feature H14, even if any one of the derivation triggers is selected by the derivation trigger determination means, it is assumed that the total increase in the number of usable game balls by the increase processing in one specific gaming state is assumed. It becomes possible to derive the number of opportunities.

Feature H15. As the specific gaming state, a first specific gaming state (the upper limit of the number of rounds is 1R) in which the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state is a first number, and a second specification in which the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state is a second number of times. A gaming state (the upper limit of the number of rounds is 10R) is set,
Any one of the features H12 to H14, wherein the derivation opportunity determining means can determine a predetermined number as the derivation opportunity number in any of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature H15, the same number of derivation triggers can be selected even between specific gaming states in which the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state is different. As a result, it is possible to make the same substantial profit even between specific gaming states in which the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state is different. Further, in the specific game state where the number of executions of the predetermined game state is small, the number of triggers for ending the predetermined game state increases, and thus it is possible to give unexpectedness.

  Feature H16. The gaming machine according to any one of features H12 to H15, wherein the derivation opportunity determining means determines the number of derivation opportunities by lottery.

  According to the feature H16, since the number of derivation triggers is determined by lottery, it is possible to expect an increase in the number of derivation triggers.

Feature H17. As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (ordinary jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable jackpot result),
The derivation opportunity determining means includes the specific gaming state that is executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific gaming state that is executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to Feature H16, wherein the lottery of the number of derivation opportunities is performed so as to be different lottery modes.

  According to the feature H17, the lottery aspect of the number of derivation opportunities differs according to the type of the predetermined winning result. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the type of the predetermined winning result.

Feature H18. Means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win / fail determination process) becomes the predetermined winning result (function to execute the gaming state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) )
In the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state is generated,
As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (ordinary jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable jackpot result),
The number difference means is different between the specific gaming state executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific gaming state executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H17, wherein the number of end triggers is determined so as to be a determination mode.

  According to the feature H18, the determination mode when determining the end opportunity number according to the type of the predetermined winning result is different. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the type of the predetermined winning result.

  Feature H19. The gaming machine according to feature H18, wherein the predetermined gaming state is generated only once in the specific gaming state.

  According to the feature H19, in the configuration in which the predetermined gaming state occurs only once in the specific gaming state, it is possible to increase the variation amount of the ending opportunity number by changing the end triggering number of the predetermined gaming state. It becomes possible to give unexpectedness.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features H1 to H19, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 222) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable pitching means is in the open state;
An end execution means (a function for executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) to end the predetermined game state by setting the variable pitching means to the closed state when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
Means for allowing the timing at which the end condition is satisfied to change (in the ninth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3504 to S3514 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, in the tenth embodiment, the main controller The function of executing the processing of step S3716 in the MPU 262 of 260, the function of executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the eleventh embodiment, and the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the twelfth embodiment. The function of executing step S4412 in FIG. 14, the function of executing the processes of steps S4812 to S4814 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fourteenth embodiment, and the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fifteenth embodiment. The function of executing the processing of step S5113 to step S5116, the function of executing the processing of step S5510 to step S5515 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the sixteenth embodiment, and the function of the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the seventeenth embodiment The function of executing the processing of steps S5701 to S5704),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I1, the timing at which the end condition is satisfied may vary. Thereby, it is possible to execute the predetermined gaming state while expecting that the period until the end condition is satisfied becomes longer.

Feature I2. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 222) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable pitching means is in the open state;
An end execution means (a function for executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) to end the predetermined game state by setting the variable pitching means to the closed state when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
End lottery means for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied or the content of the end condition by end lottery (in the eleventh embodiment, a function for executing the processing of steps S4004 to S4008 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, In the embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S4412 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260, the function of executing the processing of steps S4812 to S4814 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 in the fourteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I2, whether or not the end condition is satisfied or the content of the end condition is determined by the end lottery. In this case, the player cannot grasp the timing when the predetermined gaming state ends or the content of the end condition. Thereby, when determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied by the end lottery, it is possible to make the player throb for a long time whether or not the predetermined gaming state continues, and the content of the end condition is determined by the end lottery In this case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the content of the end condition.

Feature I3. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 222) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Predetermined transition means (a function of executing a big prize opening / closing process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for shifting the game state to the predetermined game state (round game) in which the variable pitching means is in the open state;
An end execution means (a function for executing a closing execution process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) to end the predetermined game state by setting the variable pitching means to the closed state when an end condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
End lottery means for determining whether or not the end condition is satisfied by end lottery (the function of executing step S4412 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twelfth embodiment, the main controller 260 in the fourteenth embodiment) The function of executing the processing of step S4812 to step S4814 in the MPU 262);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I3, whether or not the end condition is satisfied is determined by the end lottery. In this case, the player cannot grasp the timing when the predetermined gaming state ends. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the player throb for a long time whether or not the predetermined gaming state is continued.

  Feature I4. The gaming machine according to claim I3, wherein the end lottery means executes the end lottery when a game ball enters the variable pitching means.

  According to the characteristic I4, the end lottery is executed when a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. This gives the player a sense of tension that the end condition is determined when the game ball enters the variable entry means and an expectation that the end condition will not be satisfied. It becomes possible.

  Feature I5. The game machine according to claim I3 or I4, wherein the end lottery means executes the end lottery every time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature I5, the end lottery is executed every time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled by whether or not the predetermined game state continues each time a game ball enters the variable ball entry means.

  Feature I6. In the end lottery means, the probability that the end condition is satisfied corresponds to the time required from the time when one game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the next game ball enters. In addition, the game machine according to any one of features I3 to I5, wherein the end lottery is executed.

  According to the feature I6, the probability that the end condition is satisfied corresponds to the time required from the time when one game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the next game ball enters. Since the player wants to know the probability that the end condition will be met, the possibility of constantly grasping the time required for the next game ball to enter after one game ball enters the variable entry means Is expensive. By letting the player keep track of the time it takes for one game ball to enter the variable entry means until the next game ball enters, the player is concentrated in a predetermined gaming state for a long period of time. It becomes possible.

  Feature I7. In the end lottery means, the probability that the end condition is satisfied increases as the time required for one game ball to enter the variable entry means until the next game ball enters is longer. The game machine according to any one of features I3 to I6, wherein the end lottery is executed as described above.

  According to the feature I7, the probability that the end condition is satisfied increases as the time required from the time when one game ball enters the variable ball entry means until the next game ball enters. In this case, the player is highly likely to play a game so that the time required for the next game ball to enter after one game ball enters the variable entrance means is shortened. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the predetermined gaming state from becoming unnecessarily long by preventing the variable pitching means from being opened for a long time.

  Feature I8. Means (steps in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) that the end condition is not satisfied until the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means after the predetermined game state is started reaches the lottery opportunity number. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I7, which includes a function of executing the processing of S4409.

  Here, if the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means after the start of the predetermined game state does not reach the lottery opportunity number, the end condition may be satisfied. The state may end soon. In this case, the player feels frustrated that the predetermined gaming state has ended immediately. In that respect, according to the feature I8, the end condition is not satisfied until the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means after the start of the predetermined game state becomes the lottery opportunity number. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the predetermined gaming state ends immediately. As a result, it is possible to prevent annoyance that the predetermined gaming state has ended immediately from being accumulated.

Feature I9. Means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win / fail determination process) becomes the predetermined winning result (function to execute the gaming state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) )
In the specific gaming state, the predetermined gaming state is generated,
As the predetermined winning results, there are a first predetermined winning result (ordinary jackpot result) and a second predetermined winning result (probable jackpot result),
The end lottery means is different between the specific gaming state executed when the first predetermined winning result is obtained and the specific gaming state executed when the second predetermined winning result is obtained. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I8, wherein the end lottery is executed so as to be in a lottery mode.

  According to the feature I9, the lottery mode of the end lottery is different according to the type of the predetermined winning result. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the type of the predetermined winning result.

Feature I10. Means for shifting the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) when the result of the predetermined lottery process (win / fail determination process) becomes the predetermined winning result (function to execute the gaming state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) )
The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I9, wherein the predetermined gaming state is generated only once in the specific gaming state.

  According to the feature I10, it is not determined by lottery whether the variable pitching means is once opened after the variable pitching means is closed, but whether the open state is continued or not is determined by lottery. In the configuration in which the open state is continued as it is when it is decided and continued winning, the waiting time until the open state is resumed is generated in the configuration in which whether or not to continue the open state is determined by lottery. It is possible not to let it.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features I1 to I10, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Variable pitching means (variable winning device 222) provided so as to be switchable between an open state and a closed state;
Specific transition means (function for executing game state transition processing in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for transitioning the gaming state to the specific gaming state (opening / closing execution mode);
With
The specified game state (round game) is a game state in which the variable ball entry means is in the open state and the game state in which the variable ball entry means is in the closed state and ends when an end condition is satisfied. It is a configuration that can occur multiple times in the gaming state,
When the continuation condition is satisfied, the gaming machine continues the predetermined gaming state of the next execution time after the predetermined gaming state of the predetermined execution time in the specific gaming state ends ( In the fourteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S4810 to S4816 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5111 to S5116 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260. With
A gaming machine, wherein the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied may vary.

  According to the feature J1, since the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied can be changed, it can be expected that the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is the highest.

Feature J2. The continuation means is
Continuation determination means for determining whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied after the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution times is completed (in the fourteenth embodiment, in steps S4810 to S4815 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260). A function of executing the process, a function of executing the processes of step S5111 to step S5115 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fifteenth embodiment),
Means for starting the predetermined game state for the next execution time when the continuation determination means determines that the continuation condition is satisfied (in the fourteenth embodiment, the process of step S4816 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) In the fifteenth embodiment, the function of executing step S5116 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260),
A gaming machine according to the characteristic J1, characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J2, the player is not informed whether or not the continuation condition is satisfied until the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time is ended, and therefore the continuation condition until the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time is ended. It is possible to thrill a player whether or not is established.

  Feature J3. The gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2, wherein the specific gaming state does not have an upper limit on the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature J3, the upper limit of the number of executions of the predetermined gaming state is not set in the specific gaming state. In this case, the specific game state continues until the continuation condition is not satisfied. This makes it possible to expect that the continuation condition will continue to hold.

  Feature J4. The continuation probability setting means for setting the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied to the probability corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the variable entry means (the processing of steps S4907 to S4908 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 is executed). The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the gaming machine is provided with a function).

  According to the feature J4, the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is set to the probability corresponding to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the attention degree with respect to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

  Feature J5. The continuation probability setting means determines the probability that the continuation condition for the predetermined game state of the next execution time is satisfied with respect to the predetermined execution time, and the variable entry in the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time The gaming machine according to Feature J4, wherein the gaming machine is set to a probability corresponding to a result of entering the game ball into the means.

  According to the feature J5, the probability that the continuation condition for the predetermined game state of the next execution time is satisfied with respect to the predetermined execution time is determined by the game ball entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution time. The probability corresponding to the sphere result is set. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled whether or not the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is increased every time the predetermined gaming state is started.

  Feature J6. The feature rate J4 or J5 is characterized in that the continuation rate setting means is configured such that the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is likely to increase as the number of game balls entering the variable entry means increases. Gaming machine.

  According to feature J6, the greater the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means, the higher the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage over the large number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means.

Feature J7. The variable entry means is configured such that a game ball that has entered the variable entry means flows into one of a specific area (continuation passage section 401) and an area other than the specific area (count passage section 400). And
In any one of the features J4 to J6, the continuation rate setting means is configured such that the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied is likely to increase as the number of game balls entering the specific region increases. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to give the player the joy that the game ball has won the variable ball entry means and the expectation that the game ball will win the specific area.

  Feature J8. The variable entry means is a guiding means (seesaw saw) that guides the game ball so that the game ball entering the variable entry means can easily flow into either the specific area or an area other than the specific area. 390), the gaming machine according to Feature J7.

  According to the feature J8, not only whether or not the game ball enters the specific area, but also the guidance means can be noted. In addition, it is possible to entertain the process until the game ball wins a specific area, as compared with the configuration in which the variable pitching means does not include the guiding means.

  Feature J9. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8, wherein the continuation condition is satisfied based on a result of a game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

  According to the feature J9, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the result of the game ball entering the variable ball entry means.

Feature J10. In the variable entry means, the game ball that has entered the variable entry means easily flows into either the specific area (continuation passage section 401) or an area other than the specific area (counting passage section 400). It is provided with a guiding means (seesaw 390) for guiding the game ball,
The continuation condition is satisfied when a game ball flows into the specific area,
The gaming machine includes a changing means for changing a period during which the guiding means is in a specific guiding state (a state in which the movable member 392 is inclined toward the continuation hole 222m) to guide the game ball so that the guiding means can easily flow into the specific area. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9, characterized in that the MPU 262 of the main control device 260 has a function of executing the processing of step S5110.

  According to the feature J10, the period of the specific guidance state for guiding the game ball is varied so that the guidance means can easily flow into the specific area. As a result, it is possible to expect that the period during which the specific guidance state is set becomes longer. Further, according to the feature J10, it is possible to make the period of the specific guidance state different depending on each predetermined gaming state, so that the probability that the continuation condition is satisfied can be made different for each predetermined gaming state. .

  Feature J11. The varying means switches the guiding state of the guiding means in the middle of the predetermined gaming state in accordance with the number of game balls that have entered the variable pitching means generated in one predetermined gaming state. A gaming machine according to J10.

  According to the feature J11, the guiding state of the guiding means is switched in the middle of the predetermined gaming state in accordance with the number of game balls entering the variable pitching means generated in one predetermined gaming state. Therefore, not only the number of game balls won in the variable ball entry means in one predetermined game state, but also the number of times that the guidance state of the guide means is switched in one predetermined game state and the number of times the switching operation occurs. Can also be noticed.

  Feature J12. The fluctuating means is configured such that the period during which the guiding means is in the specific guiding state is longer than the predetermined gaming state in which the predetermined gaming state that is the subsequent execution time is the preceding execution time. A gaming machine according to Feature J10 or J11.

  According to the feature J12, the period in which the guiding means is in the specific guidance state is longer in the predetermined gaming state that is the subsequent execution time than in the predetermined gaming state that is the previous execution time. In this case, the predetermined game state is easily continued as the number of executions of the predetermined game state increases. As a result, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a situation where the number of times that the predetermined gaming state has continued is large.

  Feature J13. In the case where the guidance means is set to the specific guidance state in one predetermined gaming state, the varying means is set to a plurality of times with a period in which the specific guidance state is set in the predetermined gaming state, with a period in which the other guidance state is entered. The gaming machine according to any one of features J10 to J12, wherein the gaming machines are not generated but are collectively generated as a period of the specific guidance state.

  According to feature J13, when the guidance means is set to the specific guidance state in one predetermined gaming state, the period in which the specific guidance state is set in the predetermined gaming state is generated a plurality of times across the period in which the other guidance state is entered. Rather, the period of specific guidance state is generated as one period. Here, since the game ball is more likely to enter the specific area when the guide means is in the specific guide state than when the guide means is in another guide state, the guide means has switched from the specific guide state to another guide state. If so, the player will feel frustrated. In the feature J13, since the period in which the specific guidance state is set is generated as one period, the number of times that the guidance unit changes from the specific guidance state to another guidance state can be kept to a minimum. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the player's irritation from increasing.

  Feature J14. The continuation condition is satisfied when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state for the predetermined number of executions is equal to or greater than a continuation reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature J14, the continuation condition is satisfied when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a predetermined game state for a predetermined number of executions is equal to or greater than the continuation reference number. In this case, the player can specify that the predetermined game state will continue when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state for a predetermined execution time becomes equal to or greater than the continuous reference number. It becomes. Accordingly, by setting the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means that establishes that the continuation condition is satisfied, the player is given a sense of security that the predetermined game state will continue. It becomes possible.

  Feature J15. The feature reference number J14 is characterized in that the continuation reference number is a number equal to or greater than the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the execution times before the predetermined execution times. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature J15, the continuation reference number is set to a number that is equal to or greater than the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the execution times before the predetermined execution time. As a result, the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the current execution time is greater than the number of game balls that enter the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the previous execution time. It is possible to cause the player to execute a predetermined gaming state while expecting the situation.

Feature J16. Means for terminating the predetermined gaming state when the end reference period elapses in the predetermined gaming state (function of executing the processes of steps S5506 and S5510 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
The gaming machine according to feature J15, wherein the end reference period is longer in the predetermined gaming state that is the execution time on the rear side than in the predetermined gaming state that is the execution time on the front side. .

  According to the feature J16, the end reference period is longer in the predetermined game state that is the subsequent execution time than in the predetermined game state that is the previous execution time. In this case, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a predetermined game state for a predetermined number of executions will be equal to or greater than the continuous reference number. As a result, it is possible to give a player the benefit of having a large number of executed predetermined game states.

Feature J17. Means for ending the predetermined game state when the number of game balls having entered the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state (steps S4809 to S4810 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the fourteenth embodiment) In the fifteenth embodiment, the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 has the function of executing the processes of steps S5109 and S5111).
The continuation condition is satisfied when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of the predetermined execution times exceeds the end trigger number. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature J17, when the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in the predetermined game state of a predetermined execution time exceeds the end trigger number, the predetermined game state of the next execution time is surely started. The As a result, it is possible to give the player a benefit for the number of game balls entering the variable ball entry means in a predetermined game state for a predetermined number of executions exceeding the end trigger number.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features J1 to J17, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Predetermined entrance portions (upper operation port 223, lower operation port 224) in which game balls flowing down the game area (game area PA) can enter;
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball having entered the predetermined ball-entry unit (a function for executing the processing of steps S3005 to S3008 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to the grant correspondence information (in the eighteenth embodiment, the processing in steps S5801 to S5809 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) In the nineteenth embodiment, the function of executing steps S5901 to S5911 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260, and the processes of steps S6001 to S6007 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260 in the twentieth embodiment. Function to execute)
A state in which the game state is shifted to a specific game state (open / close execution mode) advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination that the special information is a grant response result corresponding to the grant correspondence information. Transition means (function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
With
As the mode of the grant determination, a low probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively low, a first high probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than the low probability mode, and the grant correspondence result And a second high probability mode that is higher than the first high probability mode.

  According to the feature K1, a plurality of high probability modes are set. This makes it possible to focus on whether the current grant determination mode is the first high probability mode or the second high probability mode.

Feature K2. When the result of the grant determination is a predetermined grant correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result B) among the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the first high probability mode. Means (function to execute the processing of step S5804 to step S5805 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
When the result of the grant determination is a specific grant correspondence result (probability change jackpot result A) among the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the second high probability mode. Means (function to execute the processing of step S5802 to step S5803 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The grant determination is performed when a predetermined switching condition (the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 10 or more) in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the first high probability mode. The execution target mode is set to a high probability mode other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode, and a specific switching condition (open / close execution mode) is set in the situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the second high probability mode. When the number of game times executed after the completion of the game has been established), the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to a high probability mode other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode. Means (function to execute the processing of step S5806 to step S5807 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The gaming machine according to Feature K1, comprising:

  Here, when the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is satisfied, if the first high probability mode or the second high probability mode is switched to the low probability mode, before the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is satisfied. I feel frustrated with the fact that it did not result in a grant response. In that regard, according to the feature K2, when a predetermined switching condition or a specific switching condition is satisfied, the mode is changed to a high probability mode other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode. As a result, it is possible to suppress the frustration with respect to the fact that the result of giving is not obtained before the predetermined switching condition or the specific switching condition is established.

  Further, the switching conditions for changing to a high probability mode other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode differ between the situation in the first high probability mode and the situation in the second high probability mode. Yes. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the type of assignment correspondence result.

Feature K3. In response to the execution of the grant determination, the game turn operation is terminated when the game turn operation is started and the operation result corresponding to the grant determination result is ended. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) for controlling the game time execution means so that the game time operation is executed,
The switching conditions are set so that the number of times of the game in which the corresponding high probability mode continues is greater or more likely to be greater in the specific switching condition than in the predetermined switching condition. A gaming machine according to K2.

  According to the characteristic K3, the switching condition is set so that the number of game times in which the corresponding high probability mode continues is greater or more likely to be greater in the specific switching condition than in the predetermined switching condition. Thereby, it becomes possible to ensure the advantage over the result of the grant determination being the specific grant response result.

  Feature K4. In a situation where one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, the switching condition (the jackpot continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 264b of the RAM 264 is “1”) Switching means (the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) sets the other of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode to the execution target mode of the grant determination. The game machine according to any one of the characteristics K1 to K3, including a function of executing the processing of steps S6004 to S6006.

  According to the feature K4, the high probability mode is maintained even when the execution target mode of the assignment determination is switched. Thereby, it is possible to change the setting state of the execution target mode of the grant determination while giving the player a sense of security that the high probability mode will continue.

Feature K5. In response to the execution of the grant determination, the game turn operation is terminated when the game turn operation is started and the operation result corresponding to the grant determination result is ended. Game time control means (function to execute game time control processing in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) for controlling the game time execution means so that the game time operation is executed,
The switching means, when one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, when the game number of switching reference times is executed, The gaming machine according to Feature K4, wherein the switching condition is satisfied, and the other of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode is set as the execution target mode of the grant determination.

  According to the feature K5, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand when the execution target mode of the grant determination is switched while maintaining the high probability mode.

Feature K6. The switching means is
Means for setting the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state to the second high probability mode (a process of setting a first probability variation mode flag in the RAM 264 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
Means (main control device 260) that sets the execution target mode of the grant determination to the first high probability mode when the switching condition is satisfied in the situation where the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination Process of setting the second probability variation mode flag in the RAM 264 of the MPU 262 of
The gaming machine according to feature K4 or K5, characterized in that

  According to the feature K6, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the second high probability mode with the highest probability of being the grant correspondence result among the execution target modes of the grant determination. Here, the player desires to obtain the grant determination result as soon as possible. Therefore, by setting the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state to the second high probability mode having the highest probability of the grant response result among the execution target modes of the grant determination, until the grant response result is obtained. It is possible to prevent the number of game times that have been executed at the same time from becoming excessive. This makes it possible to meet the needs of the player.

  In addition, when the switching condition is satisfied in a situation where the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, the execution target mode of the grant determination is switched from the second high probability mode to the first high probability mode. In the first high probability mode, the jackpot winning probability is set lower than that in the second high probability mode, so it is possible to make the player think that he wants to give a grant response result before the switching condition is satisfied. It becomes. This makes it possible to increase the concentration of the player on the game.

  Feature K7. If the execution target mode of the grant determination is one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode after the specific gaming state ends, the grant determination is performed when the switching condition is satisfied. The execution target mode is the other one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode, and the other mode after the switching is continued until the result of the assignment determination becomes the assignment correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features K4 to K6.

  According to the feature K7, it is possible to change the setting state of the execution target mode of the grant determination while giving a sense of security that the high probability mode continues until the grant determination result becomes the grant correspondence result.

Feature K8. As a mode of the grant determination, there is a third high probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than the second high probability mode,
The gaming machine is
When the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result (probability variation jackpot result A) of the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the first high probability mode. , Means for setting to a predetermined high probability mode which is one of the second high probability mode and the third high probability mode (function to execute the processing of steps S5802 to S5803 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
When the result of the grant determination is the second grant correspondence result (probability change jackpot result B) among the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the first high probability mode. , Means for setting a specific high probability mode which is one of the second high probability mode and the third high probability mode other than the predetermined high probability mode (steps S5804 to S5805 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) Function to execute processing)
With
The switching means satisfies the first switching condition (the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 20 or more) in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the predetermined high probability mode. If the execution target mode of the grant determination is a high probability mode other than the predetermined high probability mode and the specific high probability mode among the first high probability mode, the second high probability mode, and the third high probability mode. The second switching condition in a situation in which a certain high probability mode is set and the execution target mode of the grant determination is the specific high probability mode (the number of game times executed after the opening / closing execution mode ends is 10 times or more) The gaming machine according to any one of features K4 to K7, wherein when the condition is established, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the special high probability mode.

  According to the characteristic K8, the execution determination mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state differs depending on the type of grant correspondence result, but the grant determination execution target after the corresponding switching conditions are established The mode is the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the difference in benefits that can be received according to the type of grant response result from becoming too large.

Feature K9. In response to the execution of the grant determination, the game turn operation is terminated when the game turn operation is started and the operation result corresponding to the grant determination result is ended. Game time control means (function for executing game time control processing in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) for controlling the game time execution means so that the game time operation is executed;
Means for setting the execution target mode of the grant determination to a specific state in which the probability that the grant correspondence result is higher than the low probability mode is set (the first probability variation flag or the second probability variation in the RAM 264 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260). Flag set processing), and
Means (steps S5908 and S5910 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) for setting the execution mode of the grant determination to the low probability mode when the number of game times of the end trigger is executed in the specific state Process to execute the process of)
Means for setting one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode in the specific state (function of executing the processes of step S5905, step S5907, and step S5909 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260) )When,
When the switching condition is satisfied in the state where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode in the specific state, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the first high probability mode and the second high probability. Mode switching means for setting the other mode among the modes (function of executing the processing of steps S5904 to S5909 in the MPU 262 of the main controller 260);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K8, comprising:

  According to the feature K9, when the switching condition is satisfied in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is one mode in the specific state, the execution target mode of the grant determination is the first high probability mode or the second high probability mode. When the mode is switched to the other mode, and the number of game times of the end trigger is executed in the specific state, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to a predetermined state in which the low probability mode is set. This makes it possible to increase the degree of attention to the switching condition.

  Feature K10. The gaming machine of claim K9, wherein the one mode is the first high probability mode and the other mode is the second high probability mode.

  According to the feature K10, there is a high possibility that the number of game times executed until the result of giving in the specific state is close to the number of times of termination. This makes it possible for the player to be thrilled by whether or not the specific state has ended.

  Feature K11. The mode switching means, when the game condition of a predetermined switching reference number of times is executed in a state where the specific state and the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode, as the establishment of the switching condition, The gaming machine according to feature K9 or K10, wherein the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the other mode.

  According to the feature K11, it is possible to make it easy for the player to understand when the execution target mode of the grant determination is switched while maintaining the high probability mode.

Feature K12. Means (steps in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260) such that the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific gaming state is one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode The function of executing the processing of S6004 to S6005),
In a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode, when the game state transitions to the specific game state, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific game state ends is the first high Means for making the other mode out of the probability mode and the second high probability mode (function to execute the processing of step S6004 and step S6006 in the MPU 262 of the main control device 260);
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K11, comprising:

  According to the feature K12, when the game state transitions to the specific game state in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is one mode, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific game state ends is the first The other mode is the high probability mode or the second high probability mode. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to experience both the situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the first high probability mode and the situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the second high probability mode. It becomes.

  In addition, with respect to the configuration of the features K1 to K12, the features A1 to A28, the features B1 to B12, the features C1 to C9, the features D1 to D6, the features E1 to E12, the features F1 to F3, the features G1, and the features H1 to H19, Any one or more of the features I1 to I10, the features J1 to J17, and the features K1 to K12 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The feature group A, the feature group B, the feature group C, the feature group D, the feature group E, the feature group F, the feature group G, the feature group H, the feature group I, the feature group J and According to the invention relating to the feature K group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, for pachinko machines, a configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained by lottery or when a game ball passes through a predetermined area, the game machine shifts to a predetermined game state. And when it transfers to a predetermined | prescribed game state, opening and closing of the pitching apparatus provided, for example in the game area | region is started.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32 ... 1st action | operation part, 33 ... 2nd action part, 35 ... Distribution through prize winning part, 36 ... Distribution prize winning device, 37 ... Special electric prize winning device, 42a ... Special figure display part, 42c ... Distribution display unit, 44 ... Symbol display device, 69 ... V winning detection sensor, 86 ... Dispensing device, 87 ... Dispensing control device, 92 ... Main side MPU, 103 ... Sound light side MPU, 113 ... Display side MPU, 222 ... Variable winning device, 222m ... continuous hole, 223 ... upper operation port, 224 ... lower operation port, 260 ... main control device, 262 ... MPU, 264 ... RAM, 264b ... various counter areas, 350 ... clune, 351 ... first hole 352 ... second hole, 353 ... third hole, 390 ... seesaw, 392 ... movable member, 400 ... counting passage part, 401 ... continuation passage part, PA ... game area.

Claims (9)

A predetermined entrance part where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a game ball having entered the predetermined entrance part;
Grant determination means for performing grant determination as to whether or not the special information acquired by the information acquisition means corresponds to grant correspondence information;
A state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player based on the result of the granting determination being that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information corresponding to the grant correspondence information;
With
As the mode of the grant determination, a low probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is relatively low, a first high probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than the low probability mode, and the grant correspondence result And a second high probability mode that is higher than the first high probability mode. Means for setting the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state as the first high probability mode when the result of the grant determination is a predetermined grant response result among the grant correspondence results;
Means for setting the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state as the second high probability mode when the result of the grant determination is a specific grant response result among the grant correspondence results;
When a predetermined switching condition is satisfied in a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the first high probability mode, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to a high level other than the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode. When the specific switching condition is satisfied in a situation in which the execution target mode of the grant determination is the second high probability mode, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the first high probability mode and the second high probability. Means for setting a high probability mode other than the mode;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising:   The first high probability mode and the second high probability when a switching condition is satisfied in a situation where one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a switching unit that sets the other of the modes as the execution target mode of the grant determination. In response to the execution of the grant determination, the game turn operation is terminated when the game turn operation is started and the operation result corresponding to the grant determination result is ended. Game time control means for controlling the game time execution means so that the game time operation is executed,
The switching means, when one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode is the execution target mode of the grant determination, when the game number of switching reference times is executed, 4. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein, as the switching condition is satisfied, the other of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode is set as the execution determination execution mode.   If the execution target mode of the grant determination is one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode after the specific gaming state ends, the grant determination is performed when the switching condition is satisfied. The execution target mode is the other one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode, and the other mode after the switching is continued until the result of the assignment determination becomes the assignment correspondence result. The gaming machine according to claim 3 or 4, characterized in that. As a mode of the grant determination, there is a third high probability mode in which the probability of the grant correspondence result is higher than the second high probability mode,
The gaming machine is
When the result of the grant determination is the first grant response result among the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the first high probability mode, the second high probability Means for setting to a predetermined high probability mode which is one of a mode and the third high probability mode;
When the result of the grant determination is the second grant response result among the grant correspondence results, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state is the first high probability mode, the second high probability A mode that is a specific high probability mode that is a high probability mode other than the predetermined high probability mode among the mode and the third high probability mode;
With
The switching means sets the execution target mode of the grant determination to the first high probability mode and the second when the first switching condition is satisfied when the execution target mode of the grant determination is the predetermined high probability mode. Among the high probability mode and the third high probability mode, a special high probability mode that is a high probability mode other than the predetermined high probability mode and the specific high probability mode, and the execution target mode of the grant determination is the specific high probability mode 6. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein when the second switching condition is satisfied in a certain situation, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the special high probability mode. In response to the execution of the grant determination, the game turn operation is terminated when the game turn operation is started and the operation result corresponding to the grant determination result is ended. Game times control means for controlling game times execution means so that the game times operation is executed;
Means for setting a specific state in which the execution target mode of the grant determination is a mode having a higher probability of being the grant correspondence result than the low probability mode;
Means for setting the execution mode of the grant determination to the predetermined state in which the execution mode of the grant determination is the low-probability mode when the number of game times of the end trigger is executed in the specific state;
Means for setting one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode in the specific state;
When the switching condition is satisfied in the state where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode in the specific state, the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the first high probability mode and the second high probability. Mode switching means for setting the other mode among the modes;
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising:   The mode switching means, when the game condition of a predetermined switching reference number of times is executed in a state where the specific state and the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode, as the establishment of the switching condition, 8. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein the execution target mode of the grant determination is set to the other mode. Means for causing the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific gaming state is ended to be one of the first high probability mode and the second high probability mode;
In a situation where the execution target mode of the grant determination is the one mode, when the game state transitions to the specific game state, the execution target mode of the grant determination after the specific game state ends is the first high Means for becoming the other mode of the probability mode and the second high probability mode;
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized by comprising:

Images